JP2020058682A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To prevent inappropriate drive control from being performed.SOLUTION: A game machine includes: drive means for operating a movable body provided operably in the game machine; drive control means capable of executing drive control of the drive means on the basis of input of a clock signal and a plurality of different control signals; performance control means for performing control of a movable body performance following operation of the movable body; and signal conversion means capable of converting serial control data by serial signals outputted from the performance control means to a plurality of different control signals and outputting them to drive control means, and capable of converting serial clock data by serial signals outputted from the performance control means to clock signals and outputting them to the drive control means.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 6

Description

  The present invention relates to a game machine capable of playing a game.

  Conventionally, a driver IC serving as a drive control circuit that performs drive control of a drive motor for rotating a reel included in a gaming machine based on a control instruction from a production control device (sub-board) that controls a variable display production by the reel. In, the operation clock generated by the operation clock generation circuit individually provided corresponding to the driver IC is input to the driver IC, and the driver IC controls the drive of the drive motor based on the input operation clock. There is one (for example, refer to Patent Document 1).

JP, 2012-1007771, A

  However, in Patent Document 1, since the driver IC (drive control circuit) operates based on the operation clock generated by the operation clock generation circuit, the operation control device (sub-board) cannot directly manage the operation clock. , Inappropriate drive control is executed and the drive motor malfunctions because the cycle used by the effect control device (sub-board) for control processing is different from the operation clock of the driver IC (drive control circuit). There was a problem that it might end up.

  The present invention has been made in view of such problems, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of preventing inappropriate drive control from being performed.

In order to solve the above-mentioned problems, the gaming machine according to means 1 of the present invention,
A gaming machine that can be played (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1),
A movable body operably provided (for example, reels 301L, 301C, 301R),
Drive means (for example, reel stepping motors 307L, 307C, 307R) for generating drive force for operating the movable body;
The drive control of the drive means is controlled by a clock signal (for example, a control clock signal) and a plurality of different control signals (for example, output control signal, electrical angle initialization signal, forward / reverse rotation signal, excitation setting signal 0, excitation setting). Drive control means (for example, motor drive circuits 85, 86, 87) that can be executed based on inputs of signal 1, excitation setting signal 2, A-phase output setting signal, B-phase output setting signal),
Production control means (for example, production control board 80) for controlling movable production (for example, variable display production) accompanied by the operation of the movable body,
Convert serial control data (for example, motor drive circuit 1 control data, motor drive circuit 2 control data, motor drive circuit 3 control data) by a serial signal transmitted from the effect control means into a plurality of different control signals. Output to the drive control means, and serial clock data by a serial signal transmitted from the effect control means (for example, motor drive circuit 1 clock signal data, motor drive circuit 2 clock signal data, motor drive circuit A signal conversion means (for example, a serial signal circuit 89) capable of converting the 3 clock signal data into a clock signal for control and outputting the clock signal to the drive control means;
A suggestive effect execution means (for example, CPU 90120 for effect control) capable of executing a suggestive effect (for example, reach effect) suggesting that the player is controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit game state) advantageous to the player.
A title notifying unit (for example, CPU 90120 for effect control) capable of notifying a title corresponding to the suggestive effect,
The title notification means can notify the title corresponding to the suggested effect when a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the suggested effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 44-2 (D) or FIG. 44-2 (F)). Part to display the title of reach production),
The suggestive effect execution means executes at least a first suggestive effect (e.g., reach effect of super reach A or super reach B) and a second suggestive effect (e.g., reach effect of super reach D or super reach E) as the suggestive effect. Is possible,
In the second suggestion effect, the title notifying unit notifies the title corresponding to the second suggestion effect from the start of the second suggestion effect (for example, as shown in FIG. (The part that displays the title 31AK007 corresponding to the reach effect of the super reach D from the start of the reach effect)
It is characterized by:
According to this characteristic, the clock signal input to the drive control means can be directly managed by the production control means by the serial clock data, and is not synchronized with the serial signal from the individual clock signal generation circuit. It is possible to prevent improper drive control from being performed by inputting the clock signal to the drive control means. Moreover, since the notification of the title according to the suggestive effect can be executed, the effect of the effect is improved.

A gaming machine of means 2 of the present invention is the gaming machine according to means 1,
The effect control means (for example, effect control board 80) can store clock data corresponding to the serial clock data, can read the stored clock data, and can transmit the serial clock data ( For example, a data string of “00110011 ...” Corresponding to the control clock signal (A) of the shortest cycle, a data string of “00110011 ...” Corresponding to the control clock signal (B) of a double cycle of the shortest cycle, or the shortest. A data string of “000111000111 ...” Corresponding to the control clock signal (C) having a cycle three times the cycle is stored in the ROM, and the data string is read from the ROM to read the clock signal data for the motor drive circuit 1 and the motor drive. Circuit 2 clock signal data, motor drive circuit 3 clock signal data to be transmitted)
It is characterized by:
According to this feature, since it is not necessary to generate the clock data every time the serial clock data is transmitted, it is possible to reduce the processing load associated with the transmission of the serial clock data.

The gaming machine of means 3 of the present invention is the gaming machine according to means 1 or 2,
The effect control means can generate and transmit the serial clock data based on an operation clock generated by an operation clock generation circuit included in the effect control means (for example, clock signal data conversion shown in a modification). In the processing, the effect control CPU converts the clock signal into a data string of clock signal data corresponding to a cycle to be output from the serial signal circuit 89 by calculation based on the clock signal input to the effect control CPU. And then send)
It is characterized by:
According to this feature, since the serial clock data is generated based on the operation clock, it becomes easy to maintain the synchronization between the effect control means and the clock signal based on the serial clock.

A gaming machine of means 4 of the present invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 3,
The clock signal (for example, the control clock signal (A) having the shortest cycle) output from the signal conversion unit (for example, the serial signal circuit 89) is converted into a divided clock signal having a different cycle by frequency division, and the driving is performed. Frequency dividing means capable of outputting to the control means (for example, as shown in FIG. 7, by frequency division, converted into a reference wave, a second frequency, a third frequency, ... It is characterized by having a pulse counter 90) capable of outputting.
According to this feature, it is possible to output the divided clock signals having different cycles to the drive control means while suppressing an increase in the processing load of the effect control means.

  Further, the modes for carrying out the invention described later include the invention according to the following means 5. Conventionally, in some gaming machines, as shown in Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2016-101428, at the start of the reach effect, there is a title display for notifying the type of the reach effect. In the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, it is desired to enhance the effect of presentation, and in view of this point, it is required to provide a gaming machine capable of enhancing the effect of presentation.

In order to solve the above-mentioned problems, the gaming machine according to means 5 of the present invention,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 901) that can be controlled in an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player,
A suggestion effect executing means (for example, CPU 90120 for effect control) capable of executing a suggestion effect (for example, reach effect) that suggests that the advantageous state is controlled.
A title notifying unit (for example, CPU 90120 for effect control) capable of notifying a title corresponding to the suggestive effect,
The title notification means can notify the title corresponding to the suggested effect when a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the suggested effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 44-2 (D) or FIG. 44-2 (F)). Part to display the title of reach production),
The suggestive effect execution means executes at least a first suggestive effect (e.g., reach effect of super reach A or super reach B) and a second suggestive effect (e.g., reach effect of super reach D or super reach E) as the suggestive effect. Is possible,
In the second suggestion effect, the title notifying unit notifies the title corresponding to the second suggestion effect from the start of the second suggestion effect (for example, as shown in FIG. (The part that displays the title 31AK007 corresponding to the reach effect of the super reach D from the start of the reach effect)
It is characterized by:
According to this feature, since the notification of the title according to the suggestion effect can be executed, the effect of the effect is improved.

  The present invention may have only the invention specifying matters described in the claims of the present invention, or may have a configuration other than the invention specifying matters described in the claims of the present invention. It may be one.

It is a perspective view showing a game machine in Example 1. It is a block diagram which shows an example of the circuit structure in a main board. It is a block diagram showing an example of a circuit configuration in a power supply board, a performance control board, a reel drive control board, and a performance display device. It is a block diagram showing an example of circuit composition in a motor drive circuit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the connection state in a serial signal circuit, and the input / output state of a signal. It is explanatory drawing which shows the signal conversion condition in a serial signal circuit. It is a figure which shows the modification which uses the frequency division signal by a pulse counter. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of a setting of an excitation mode. It is explanatory drawing which shows the electric current value and electrical angle when an electrical angle signal is Low in each excitation mode. It is a flow chart which shows an example of excitation mode change processing. It is a perspective view showing a variable display unit for effect. It is an exploded perspective view showing the internal structure of the effect display unit. It is a perspective view showing a state where the reel is seen from diagonally front. It is an exploded perspective view showing a reel. It is a figure which shows the attachment structure of a reel holding frame and a reel stepping motor. It is a schematic diagram which shows the ratio of the electric current value in each phase, and a rotation angle. It is a principle view showing the ratio of the current value in each phase. It is explanatory drawing which shows the drive in 2-phase excitation setting. It is explanatory drawing which shows the drive in 1-2 phase excitation (A type) setting. It is explanatory drawing which shows the drive in W1-2 phase excitation setting. It is explanatory drawing which shows the drive in 2W1-2 phase excitation setting. 6 is a timing chart showing a drive stop timing and a current value in each reel stepping motor. It is the flowchart which shows one example of production control main processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of the 2nd initialization processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of the 2nd initialization processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the operation example of non-detection time operation control, detection time operation control, and operation control for real operation confirmation. It is explanatory drawing which shows the operation speed example of operation control at the time of non-detection, operation control at the time of detection, and operation control for real operation confirmation. It is the flowchart which shows one example of production control process treatment. It is the flowchart which shows one example of the production design fluctuation process. It is a flow chart which shows an example of reel change processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of reel change processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of reel change processing. It is a figure which shows an example of an excitation pattern. 6 is a timing chart showing an example of reel fluctuation control. 9 is an explanatory diagram showing an operation example of non-detection time operation control, detection time operation control, and actual operation confirmation operation control in Modification Example 1. FIG. It is a figure which shows the modification which uses a DC brushless motor as a reel motor. It is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine in this embodiment. It is a block diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted on a pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart which shows an example of game control main processing. It is the flowchart which shows one example of the timer interruption processing for game control. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special design process processing. It is the flowchart which shows one example of production control main processing. It is the flowchart which shows one example of production control process treatment. It is a figure for demonstrating a variation pattern and the kind of reach. It is the figure which shows the production operation example. It is the figure which shows the production operation example. It is the figure which shows the production operation example. It is the figure which shows the production operation example. It is the figure which shows the production operation example. It is the figure which shows the production operation example. It is a flow chart which shows an example of notice production decision processing. It is a figure showing a decision rate in notice production decision processing. It is a figure which shows the example of a production | operation effect of a modification. It is a figure which shows the example of a production | operation effect of a modification. It is a figure which shows the example of a production | operation effect of a modification. It is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine. It is a block diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted on a pachinko gaming machine. It is a figure which shows a game information display part. It is a figure which shows the aspect for every big hit classification in a special symbol display device. It is a figure showing the shift mode of the 1st reservation indicator and the 2nd reservation indicator. It is a figure which shows the aspect for every big hit classification in a round indicator. It is a rear perspective view of a pachinko gaming machine. (A), (B) is a figure which illustrates an effect control command. It is explanatory drawing which shows each random number. It is a figure which illustrates a variation pattern. It is explanatory drawing which shows a display result determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows a display result determination table. It is an explanatory view showing a jackpot type determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of various jackpots. (A) is an explanatory view showing a big hit variation pattern determination table (for big hit A), (B) is an explanation diagram showing a big hit variation pattern judgment table (for big hit B, big hit C), (C) FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram showing a variation pattern determination table for small hits. It is an explanatory view showing a variation pattern determination table for loss. (A) is a front view of a display monitor, (B) is a figure which shows the display mode of a display monitor, (C) is explanatory drawing of a display content. It is a time chart which shows the display time of the item displayed on a display monitor. It is explanatory drawing explaining the change of the display content of a display monitor. It is a flow chart which shows game control main processing. (A) is a flowchart showing a RAM clearing process, and (B) is a schematic diagram of the RAM. It is a flowchart which shows a setting change process. It is a flowchart which shows a setting confirmation process. It is a flow chart which shows power failure detection processing. It is a figure which shows the change of the display mode of a display monitor. (A) is a diagram showing a display mode of the display monitor at a cold start, and (B) shows a display mode of the display monitor at the time of occurrence of a set value abnormality error or at the time of recovery from power failure during setting change. It is a figure. (A) is a diagram showing a change in the display mode of the special symbol display device, the hold display device, the right-handed lamp, and the round display device during execution of the setting change process, and (B) is a set value error error, or It is a figure which shows the change of the display mode of a special symbol display device at the time of returning from the power failure during setting change. It is a figure which shows a part of timer interrupt process for game controls. It is the flowchart which shows production control main processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the information memorize | stored in RAM and the state cleared. It is an explanatory view showing an initial symbol for each received command. It is explanatory drawing which shows the notification mode at the time of starting a pachinko game machine. It is explanatory drawing which shows the operation example of operation control at the time of non-detection, and operation control for real operation confirmation. It is a figure which shows the operation speed in operation | movement of non-detection operation control and operation control for real operation confirmation. 7 is a timing chart showing the relationship between the change timing of the set value and the confirmation end timing of the set value, and the number of times the first movable body initialization process and the second movable body initialization process are executed. It is a figure which shows the display mode of an image display apparatus. It is a flow chart which shows power failure detection processing. It is the flowchart which shows a part of production control process treatment.

  Modes for carrying out a gaming machine according to the present invention will be described below based on Examples.

  First, the overall configuration of a pachinko gaming machine 1, which is an example of a gaming machine, will be described. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine 1 as viewed from the front. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing an example of a circuit configuration on the main board.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is mainly configured by an outer frame 100 formed in a vertically long rectangular frame shape and a front frame 101 attached to the outer frame 100 so as to be openable and closable. A glass door frame 102 and a lower door frame 103 are provided on the front surface of the front frame 101 so as to be openable and closable around the left side.

  On the lower surface of the lower door frame 103, there is a hit ball supply tray (upper tray) 3. At the lower part of the hitting ball supply tray 3, an extra ball receiving tray 4 (lower tray) for storing game balls that cannot be accommodated in the hitting ball supply tray 3 and a hitting ball operation handle (operation knob) 5 for firing a hit ball are provided. . On the back surface of the glass door frame 102, the game board 6 is detachably attached to the front frame 101.

  The game board 6 is made of a veneer plate having a predetermined plate thickness with a game area 7 formed on the front surface, and the effect display device 9 and the effect control board 80 are integrally assembled on the back side of the game board 6. There is.

  In the vicinity of the center of the game area 7, there is a production-use variable display unit 300 (see FIG. 11) that constitutes an effect display device 9 including a plurality of change display portions that each display the effect design (decorative design) for effect. It is provided. The production-use variable display unit 300 is provided so as to be rotatable about a rotation shaft (not shown) that is provided substantially horizontally, and is arranged in parallel in the axial direction (horizontal direction) of the rotation shaft (not shown). The reels 301L, 301C, and 301R (also referred to as a left reel, a middle reel, and a right reel) are formed (see FIG. 12). On the outer circumference (peripheral surface) of each reel, a plurality of types of effect symbols (see FIG. 1) that can be identified are arranged, and as shown in FIG. 1, among the symbols arranged on these reels, they are continuous. The three patterns are arranged so that they can be visually recognized through the transparent window 102a provided in the glass door frame 102. The "left", "middle", and "right" reels 301L, 301C, and 301R are juxtaposed with a predetermined gap from each other, and the pattern can be visually recognized through a see-through window (not shown) formed in the glass door frame 102. It has a variable display section (symbol display area).

  In this way, the effect display device 9 rotates the reels 301L, 301C, 301R during the variable display period of the special symbol by the first special symbol display device 8a or the second special symbol display device 8b, and thereby the variable display of the effect symbol. Change display effect is performed. The effect display device 9 that performs variable display of effect symbols is controlled by the effect control microcomputer mounted on the effect control board 80.

  At the lower right position on the game board 6, a first special symbol display (first variation display means) 8a that variably displays the first special symbol as the first identification information is provided. In the present embodiment, the first special symbol display device 8a is realized by a simple and small-sized display device (for example, a 7-segment LED) capable of variably displaying the numbers 0-9. That is, the first special symbol display device 8a is configured to variably display numbers (or symbols) from 0 to 9. Further, at a position above the first special symbol display device 8a, a second special symbol display device (second variation display means) 8b that variably displays the second special symbol as the second identification information is provided. The second special symbol display device 8b is realized by a simple and small-sized display device (for example, a 7-segment LED) capable of variably displaying numbers 0-9. That is, the second special symbol display device 8b is configured to variably display numbers (or symbols) of 0-9.

  In this embodiment, the type of the first special symbol and the type of the second special symbol are the same (for example, both numbers 0 to 9), but the types may be different. Further, the first special symbol display device 8a and the second special symbol display device 8b, respectively, for example, variably display numbers from 00 to 99 (or two-digit symbols) using two 7-segment LEDs or the like. It may be configured.

  Hereinafter, the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be collectively referred to as a special symbol, and the first special symbol indicator 8a and the second special symbol indicator 8b may be collectively referred to as a special symbol indicator.

  The variable display of the first special symbol is, after the first start condition that is the execution condition of the variable display is satisfied (for example, that the game ball has won the first start winning opening 13a), the start condition of the variable display (for example, When the number of reserved memories is not 0, the variable display of the first special symbol is not being executed, and the jackpot game is not being executed). When the time (variation time) elapses, the display result (stop pattern) is derived and displayed. Further, the variable display of the second special symbol, the second start condition that is the execution condition of the variable display is satisfied (for example, the game ball has won the second start winning port 13b), then the variable display start condition ( For example, when the number of pending storage is not 0, the variable display of the second special symbol is not being executed, and the jackpot game is not being executed). When the variable display time (variation time) elapses, the display result (stop pattern) is derived and displayed. It should be noted that the winning means that the game ball has entered a predetermined winning area such as a winning opening. Derivative display of the display result means that the symbol (an example of identification information) is finally stopped and displayed.

  The effect display device 9 is for decoration (effect) during the variable display time of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 8a and the variable display time of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 8b. Variable display of the effect symbol as a symbol (for) is performed. The variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 8a and the variable display of the effect symbol on the effect display device 9 are synchronized. Further, the variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 8b and the variable display of the effect symbol on the effect display device 9 are synchronized. The synchronization means that the start time and the end time of the variable display are almost the same (or the same), and the period of the variable display is almost the same (or the same). Further, when the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 8a, and when the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display device 8b, the effect symbol is reminiscent of the big hit on the effect display device 9. The combination of is stopped and displayed.

  Below the effect display device 9, a winning device having a first starting winning opening 13a is provided. The game ball that has won the first starting winning opening 13a is guided to the back surface of the game board 6 and detected by the first starting opening switch 14a (eg, proximity switch) and the first winning confirmation switch 14b (eg, photo sensor). It

  Further, a variable winning ball device 15 having a second starting winning opening 13b capable of winning game balls is provided below the winning device having the first starting winning opening (first starting opening) 13a. The game ball that has won the second starting winning opening (second starting opening) 13b is guided to the back surface of the game board 6 and detected by the second starting opening switch 15a and the winning confirmation switch 15b. The variable winning ball device 15 is opened by the solenoid 16. When the variable winning ball device 15 is in the open state, the game ball can enter the second start winning port 13b (it becomes easy to start winning), which is in an advantageous state for the player. When the variable winning ball device 15 is in the open state, the game balls are easier to win in the second starting winning opening 13b than in the first starting winning opening 13a. In addition, in the state where the variable winning ball device 15 is in the closed state, the game ball does not win the second starting winning port 13b. In addition, in the state where the variable winning ball device 15 is in the closed state, although it is difficult to win the prize, it may be possible to win the prize (that is, the game ball is hard to win).

  Further, it is determined whether or not an abnormal prize has occurred based on the detection results of the first starting opening switch 14a and the first winning confirmation switch 14b and the detection results of the second starting opening switch 15a and the second winning confirmation switch 15b. The security signal is externally output based on the detection of the occurrence of.

  Hereinafter, the first start winning opening 13a and the second starting winning opening 13b may be collectively referred to as a starting winning opening or a starting opening.

  When the variable winning ball device 15 is controlled to be in the open state, the game ball heading for the variable winning ball device 15 is extremely easy to win in the second start winning port 13b. The first start winning opening 13a is provided directly below the effect display device 9, but the gap between the lower end of the effect displaying device 9 and the first starting winning opening 13a can be further narrowed, or the first starting winning opening 13a can be formed. Those who place the nails densely in the periphery or arrange the nails around the first starting winning opening 13a so that it is difficult to guide the game ball to the first starting winning opening 13a, and the winning rate of the second starting winning opening 13b is higher. May be set higher than the winning rate of the first starting winning opening 13a.

  On the upper portion of the second special symbol display 8b, the number of effective winning balls that have entered the first starting winning opening 13a, that is, the first reserved memory number (reserved memory is also referred to as starting memory or starting winning memory) is displayed. 1 special symbol reservation memory indicatory section and the 1st special symbol reservation memory indicatory section are provided separately, the 2nd special which displays the number of effective winning balls which entered into the 2nd starting winning a prize mouth 13b, namely the 2nd retention memory number The symbol reserve storage display section and a special symbol reserve storage display 18 including, for example, a 7-segment LED are provided. The first special symbol reserved memory display unit displays the first reserved memory number up to four in the winning order, and increases the number of indicators to be turned on by 1 each time there is an effective starting winning. Then, each time the variation display on the first special symbol display device 8a is started, the number of lighted display devices is reduced by one. Further, the second special symbol reservation storage display unit displays the second reservation storage number up to four in the winning order, and increments the number of indicators to be turned on each time there is an effective start winning. Then, every time the variable display on the second special symbol display device 8b is started, the number of lighted display devices is reduced by one. In addition, in this example, the upper limit number (up to 4) is provided for the number of starting memories for winning the first starting winning opening 13a and the number of starting memories for winning the second starting winning port 13b. There may be four or more.

  Further, at a position below the effect display device 9, there are provided a first hold storage display section 9a for displaying the first hold storage number and a second hold storage display section 9b for displaying the second hold storage number. . An area (total reserved storage display unit) may be provided to display the total number (total reserved storage number), which is the total of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number. In this way, if the total pending storage display unit that displays the total number is provided, it is possible to easily grasp the total number of satisfied execution conditions for which the variable display start condition is not satisfied.

  In addition, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 1, the variable winning ball device 15 that opens and closes only the second starting winning opening 13b is provided. However, the first starting winning opening 13a and the second starting winning opening 13b are provided. A variable winning ball device that opens and closes any of the winning openings 13b may be provided.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 1, a special variable winning ball device 20 is provided below the variable winning ball device 15. The special variable winning ball device 20 is provided with a special winning opening door, and when the specific display result (big hit symbol) is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 8a, and the specific display result on the second special symbol display device 8b (big hit symbol) In the specific game state (big hit game state) that occurs when the symbol) is derived and displayed, the special winning opening door is controlled by the solenoid 21 to be in the open state, so that the big winning opening serving as the winning area is in the open state. The game ball that has won the special winning opening is detected by the count switch 23.

  Based on the fact that the game ball is detected by the count switch 23, a predetermined number (for example, 15) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. In this way, when the game ball passes (enters) the special winning opening which has been opened in the special variable winning ball device 20, for example, the other starting winning openings such as the first starting winning opening 13a and the second starting winning opening 13b are played. More prize balls are paid out than when the balls passed (entered). Therefore, when the special winning opening is opened in the special variable winning ball device 20, the first state is advantageous for the player. On the other hand, if the special winning opening is closed in the special variable winning ball device 20, the gaming ball cannot be passed (entered) into the special winning opening to obtain the winning ball, which is disadvantageous to the player. It becomes a state.

  On the right side of the first special symbol display device 8a, a normal symbol display device 10 is provided. The normal symbol display 10 is composed of, for example, two LEDs. When the game ball passes through the gate 32 and is detected by the gate switch 32a, the variable display of the display of the normal symbol display 10 is started. In this embodiment, the upper and lower LEDs (the pattern can be visually recognized when turned on) are alternately turned on to perform the variable display. For example, when the lower LED is turned on at the end of the variable display, it is a win. Then, when the LED on the lower side of the normal symbol display 10 lights up and hits, the variable winning ball device 15 is opened for a predetermined number of times and for a predetermined time. That is, the state of the variable winning ball device 15 is advantageous from the disadvantageous state to the player when the lower LED lights up (a state in which the game ball can be won in the second starting winning port 13b). ). On the upper portion of the special symbol reservation storage display 18, a normal symbol reservation storage display 41 having four display portions (for example, four segments of 7-segment LED) for displaying the number of winning balls that have passed through the gate 32 is provided. Has been. Every time there is a passage of the game ball to the gate 32, that is, every time the game ball is detected by the gate switch 32a, the normal symbol hold storage display unit 41 increases the number of display units to be turned on. Then, each time the variable display of the normal symbol display device 10 is started, the display unit to be turned on is reduced by 1.

  In addition, the normal symbol reservation storage display 41 consisting of 7-segment LED, with four display units (segments) for displaying the number of winning balls that have passed through the gate 32, for example, the number of times the special variable winning ball device 20 is opened during a big hit. (Big hit round number) Two display units (segments), and two display units (segments) showing the game state are provided, but these display units are normally separate from the symbol reserve storage display unit. You may comprise. Further, the normal symbol display device 10 may be configured by a segment LED or the like capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of identification information called normal symbols (for example, “◯” and “×”).

  Around the special variable winning a prize ball device 20, the winning holes 29a to 29d of the normal winning device are provided, and the game balls winning the winning holes 29a to 29d are detected by the winning hole switch 30. Each of the winning openings 29a to 29d constitutes a winning area provided on the game board 6 as an area for accepting a game ball and allowing winning. The first start winning opening 13a, the second starting winning opening 13b, and the big winning opening also constitute a winning area that accepts game balls and allows winning.

  On the left side of the game area 7, there is provided a decorative member 25 having a decorative LED 25a that blinks during the game, and at the bottom there is an outlet 26 for absorbing a game ball that has not won. Further, four speakers 27 that emit sound effects are provided on the left, right, upper, and lower parts outside the game area 7. On the outer periphery of the game area 7, a top frame LED 28a, a left frame LED 28b and a right frame LED 28c are provided. The top frame LED 28a, the left frame LED 28b, the right frame LED 28c, and the decoration LED 25a are examples of the decoration light-emitting body provided in the game machine.

  Although not shown in FIG. 1 and FIG. 2, a prize ball LED that lights up during payout of a prize ball is provided in the vicinity of the left frame LED 28b, and when the supply ball runs out in the vicinity of the top frame LED 28a. An out-of-bulb LED that lights up is provided. The prize ball LED and the out-of-sphere LED are controlled by the effect control microcomputer mounted on the effect control board when the prize ball is being paid out or when the out-of-sphere LED is detected. Further, although not particularly shown, a prepaid card unit (hereinafter, referred to as “card unit”) 50 that enables a ball lending by inserting a prepaid card is installed adjacent to the pachinko gaming machine 1. .

  A game ball launched from a hitting ball launching device (not shown) by a player enters a game area 7 through a launch ball guide passage (not shown), and then descends from the game area 7. When the game ball enters the first starting winning opening 13a and is detected by the first starting opening switch 14a, if the variable display of the first special symbol can be started (for example, the variable display of the special symbol ends, the first 1 start condition has been established), the first special symbol display 8a starts the variable display (variation) of the first special symbol, and the effect display device 9 starts the variable display of the effect symbol. That is, the variable display of the first special symbol and the effect symbol corresponds to the winning of the first starting winning opening 13a. Unless the variable display of the first special symbol can be started, the first reserved storage number is increased by 1 on condition that the first reserved storage number has not reached the upper limit value.

  When the game ball enters the second starting winning opening 13b and is detected by the second starting opening switch 15a, if the variable display of the second special symbol can be started (for example, the variable display of the special symbol ends, the first 2 start condition is satisfied), the variable display (variation) of the second special symbol is started on the second special symbol display 8b, and the variable display of the effect symbol is started on the effect display device 9. That is, the variable display of the second special symbol and the effect symbol corresponds to the winning of the second starting winning opening 13b. Unless the variable display of the second special symbol can be started, the second reserved storage number is increased by 1 on condition that the second reserved storage number has not reached the upper limit value.

  The variation display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 8a and the variation display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 8b are stopped when the variation time has elapsed. When the special symbol at the time of stop (stop symbol) is a big hit symbol (specific display result), it becomes "big hit", and the special symbol at the time of stop (stop symbol) is different from the big hit symbol and the small hit symbol and is displayed as a special symbol. If so, it will be “out”.

  After the variable display result in the special figure game becomes "big hit", the big hit game state is controlled as a specific game state in which a round advantageous to the player (also called "round game") is executed a predetermined number of times.

  On the reels 301L, 301C, and 301R, of the special figure game using the first special figure on the first special symbol display 8a and the special figure game using the second special figure on the second special symbol display 8b, Corresponding to the start of any special figure game, by rotating these reels 301L, 301C, 301R, the variable display (variable display) of the effect symbols is started. Then, during the period from the start of the variable display of the effect symbols to the end of the variable display due to the stop display of the fixed effect symbols on the reels 301L, 301C, 301R, the variable display state of the effect symbols becomes the predetermined reach state. There is. Here, the reach state, when the effect design which is temporarily stopped and displayed in the display area of the effect display device 9 constitutes a part of the jackpot combination, the effect pattern which is not yet temporarily stopped is also displayed ("reach (Also referred to as "variable pattern") is a display state in which the variation continues, or a display state in which all or some of the effect symbols are synchronized and vary while forming all or part of the jackpot combination. is there. Specifically, part of the reels 301L, 301C, 301R (for example, the reel 301L and the reel 301R, etc.) is a temporary production pattern (for example, a production pattern showing alphanumeric "7") that constitutes a predetermined jackpot combination. In the remaining reel (for example, reel 301C, etc.) that is not yet in the temporary stop display when stopped and displayed, the display state in which the effect design is still changing, or in all or part of the reels 301L, 301C, 301R It is a display state in which the effect symbols are changing in synchronization while forming the whole or a part of the big hit combination.

  In addition, the reels 301L, 301C, and 301R of the present embodiment rotate together in the variable display of the effect symbol, and when the variable display of the effect symbol ends, the rotation stops in the order of reel 301L → reel 301R → reel 301C. In some cases, the reels 301L and 301R stop rotating at the same time, and finally the reel 301C stops rotating. In the variable display of the effect symbol, the reels 301L and 301C do not stop at the same time.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example, a game control board (main board 31) on which a game control microcomputer or the like is mounted, a performance control board on which a performance control microcomputer for controlling a performance display device 9 or other performance device is mounted. 80, a voice control board 70, an LED driver board 35, and various boards such as a payout control board 37 in which a payout control microcomputer for performing ball payout control and the like are mounted.

  Further, on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, a power supply board 82 (see FIG. 3) on which a power supply circuit for creating various power supply voltages such as DC30V, DC21V, DC12V and DC5V is mounted is provided. To the power supply board 82, the main board 31 and each electric component control board (production control board 80 and payout control board 37) in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and each electric component (electric power is provided to the pachinko gaming machine 1 are supplied. A power switch as a power supply permission means for executing or cutting off the power supply to the components operated by the above) and a clear switch for clearing the RAM 55 of the game control microcomputer 156 of the main board 31 are provided. . Further, a replaceable fuse is provided inside the power switch (inside the substrate).

  In the present embodiment, the main board 31 is provided on the game board side, and the payout control board 37 is provided on the game frame side. Even with such a configuration, the communication between the main board 31 and the payout control board 37 is performed by serial communication, thereby facilitating the wiring arrangement when the game board is replaced.

  A control unit including a control microcomputer is mounted on each control board. The control means is an electric component (gaming device: ball payout device 97, effect display device 9, light-emitting body such as an LED, etc.) provided in the gaming machine in accordance with a command signal (control signal) as a command from the game control means or the like. Speaker 27). Hereinafter, the description may be given with the main board 31 included in the control board. In that case, the control means mounted on the control board means the game control means and the means for controlling the electric parts provided in the gaming machine in accordance with the command signal from the game control means or the like. Further, a board on which a microcomputer other than the main board 31 is mounted may be referred to as a sub board. The ball payout device 97 is a device for paying out the game ball guided by a passage for guiding the game ball and a sprocket driven by a stepping motor or the like to the upper plate or the lower plate, and is paid out. A payout number counting switch for counting prize balls and loan balls is also configured as a part of the unit. In the present embodiment, the payout detection means is realized by a payout number counting switch, and has a function of detecting that the prize payout ball or the lending ball is actually paid out from the ball payout device 97. In this case, the payout number counting switch outputs a detection signal each time one payout ball or a loan ball is detected.

  On the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1, a terminal board 91 provided with each terminal for outputting various information to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed. On the terminal board 91, for example, information output signals such as big hit information indicating the occurrence of a big hit game state (starting port signal, symbol determination number 1 signal, big hit 1 signal, big hit 2 signals, big hit 3 signals, time saving signal, security An information output terminal for externally outputting a signal, a prize ball signal 1, a gaming machine error state signal) is provided. Regarding the gaming machine error status signal, it is not always necessary to output it to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and a door indicating that the gaming frame is in an open state from the information output terminal instead of the gaming machine error status signal. An open signal or the like may be output.

  The game balls stored in the storage tank 38 pass through the guide rails, reach the ball payout device 97 covered with the payout case through the curve gutter. Above the ball payout device 97, a ball break switch 43 is provided as a game medium cut detection means. When the ball break switch 43 detects the ball break, the payout operation of the ball payout device 97 is stopped. When the out-of-ball switch 43 detects a shortage of game balls, the supply mechanism provided on the game machine installation island supplies the game balls to the pachinko machine 1.

  When a large number of game balls as prizes based on a prize or game balls based on a ball lending request are paid out and the hit ball supply tray 3 becomes full, the game balls are guided to the surplus ball receiving tray 4 through the surplus ball guide passage. When the game ball is further paid out, a sensing lever (not shown) presses a full tank switch (not shown) as a storage state detecting means, and the full tank switch as a storage state detecting means is turned on. In that state, the rotation of the payout motor in the ball payout device is stopped, the operation of the ball payout device is stopped, and the driving of the hitting ball launching device is also stopped.

  As shown in FIG. 2, on the main board 31, a game control microcomputer (corresponding to a game control means) 156 for controlling the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to a program is mounted. The game control microcomputer 156 is a ROM 54 that stores a program for game control (game progress control), a RAM 55 that is a storage unit used as a work memory, a CPU 56 that performs a control operation according to the program, and an I / O port unit 57. It is possible to send various commands to the payout control board 37 and the effect control board 80 via the I / O port section 57. In this embodiment, the ROM 54 and the RAM 55 are built in the game control microcomputer 156. That is, the game control microcomputer 156 is a one-chip microcomputer. The 1-chip microcomputer only needs to include at least the RAM 55, and the ROM 54 may be external or internal. Further, the I / O port section 57 may be externally attached. The payout control board 37 and the effect control board 80 also have built-in I / O port sections for receiving various commands from the game control microcomputer 156. These I / O port sections are provided in the payout control board 37. Alternatively, it may be externally attached to the effect control board 80. The game control microcomputer 156 further includes a random number circuit 60 that generates a hardware random number (random number generated by a hardware circuit).

  Since the CPU 56 in the game control microcomputer 156 executes control in accordance with the program stored in the ROM 54, the following description means that the game control microcomputer 156 (or the CPU 56) executes (or performs processing). Specifically, the CPU 56 executes control according to a program. This also applies to the microcomputers mounted on other substrates than the main substrate 31.

  The game control microcomputer 156 has a random number circuit 60 built therein. The random number circuit 60 is a hardware circuit used to generate a random number for determination to determine whether or not to make a big hit based on the display result of the variable display of the special symbol. The random number circuit 60 updates the numerical data according to the set updating rule within the numerical range in which the initial value (for example, 0) and the upper limit value (for example, 65535) are set, and the start occurs at random timing. Based on that the time of winning is the time of reading (extracting) the numerical data, the numerical data read has a random number generating function.

  The random number circuit 60 is a hardware circuit used to generate a random number for determination to determine whether or not to make a big hit based on the display result of the variable display of the special symbol. The random number circuit 60 updates the numerical data according to the set updating rule within the numerical range in which the initial value (for example, 0) and the upper limit value (for example, 65535) are set, and the start occurs at random timing. Based on that the time of winning is the time of reading (extracting) the numerical data, the numerical data read has a random number generating function.

  The random number circuit 60 includes a selection setting function for the update range of the numerical data (a selection setting function for the initial value and a selection setting function for the upper limit value), a selection setting function for the numerical data update rule, and a selection for the numerical data update rule. It has various functions such as a switching function. With such a function, the randomness of the generated random numbers can be improved.

  Further, the game control microcomputer 156 has a function of setting the initial value of the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 60. For example, a predetermined calculation is performed using the ID number of the game control microcomputer 156 stored in a predetermined storage area such as the ROM 54 (the ID number assigned with a different numerical value for each product of the game control microcomputer 156). The numerical data thus obtained is set as the initial value of the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 60. By performing such processing, the randomness of the random numbers generated by the random number circuit 60 can be further improved.

  The game control microcomputer 156 reads out numerical data as random R from the random number circuit 60 when the start winning to the first starting opening switch 14a or the second starting opening switch 15a occurs, and starts fluctuation of special symbols and effect symbols. At times, it is determined based on the random R whether or not to make a big hit display result as a specific display result, that is, whether or not to make a big hit. Then, when it is determined to be a big hit, the game state is shifted to the big hit game state as a specific game state advantageous to the player.

  Further, the RAM 55 is a backup RAM as a non-volatile storage means, a part or all of which is backed up by a backup power supply created in the power supply board 82. That is, even if the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped, a part or all of the content of the RAM 55 is saved for a predetermined period (until the capacitor as the backup power supply is discharged and the backup power supply cannot supply power). In particular, at least the data in accordance with the game state, that is, the control state of the game control means (such as the value of the special symbol process flag and the reserved storage number counter) and the data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls (specifically, prize balls described later). The command output counter value) is stored in the backup RAM. The data according to the control state of the game control means is data necessary for recovering the control state before the occurrence of a power failure or the like based on the data when the power is restored after a power failure or the like. Further, data according to the control state and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are defined as data indicating the progress state of the game. In the present embodiment, it is assumed that the entire RAM 55 is backed up by power supply.

  A reset signal from the power supply board 82 is input to the reset terminal of the game control microcomputer 156. The power supply board 82 has a reset circuit for generating a reset signal supplied to the game control microcomputer 156 and the like. It should be noted that when the reset signal becomes high level, the game control microcomputer 156 or the like becomes operable, and when the reset signal becomes low level, the game control microcomputer 156 or the like becomes inoperative. Therefore, during the period when the reset signal is high level, the permission signal for allowing the operation of the game control microcomputer 156 and the like is output, and during the period when the reset signal is low level, the game control microcomputer This means that the operation stop signal for stopping the operation of 156 and the like is output. The reset circuit may be mounted on each electric component control board (a board on which a microcomputer for controlling electric parts is mounted).

  Further, a power-off signal indicating that the power supply voltage from the power supply board 82 has dropped below a predetermined value is input to the input port of the game control microcomputer 156. That is, the power supply board 82 monitors the voltage value of a predetermined voltage (for example, DC30V or DC5V) used in the gaming machine, and when the voltage value drops to a predetermined value (the power supply voltage drops). Is detected), a power supply monitoring circuit that outputs a power supply cutoff signal indicating that is mounted. The power supply monitoring circuit may not be mounted on the power supply board 82, but may be mounted on a board (for example, the main board 31) that is backed up by a backup power supply. Further, a clear signal indicating that the clear switch for instructing to clear the contents of the RAM has been operated is input to the input port of the game control microcomputer 156.

  Further, the gate switch 32a, the first start opening switch 14a, the first winning confirmation switch 14b, the second starting opening switch 15a, the second winning confirmation switch 15b, the count switch 23, the third winning confirmation switch 23a and each winning opening switch 30. , The input driver circuit 58 for giving the detection signal from 30b to the basic circuit is also mounted on the main board 31, the solenoid 16 for opening and closing the variable winning ball device 15, the solenoid 21 for opening and closing the special variable winning ball device 20, and the basic circuit. The output circuit 59 which is driven according to the command of is also mounted on the main board 31, a system reset circuit (not shown) for resetting the game control microcomputer 156 when the power is turned on, a big hit information showing the occurrence of a big hit game state, etc. Information output signal from the terminal board 91 to a hall computer or the like. Information output circuit 64 for outputting to an external device is also mounted on the main substrate 31.

  In this embodiment, the effect control means (which is a microcomputer for effect control) mounted on the effect control board 80 directs the effect contents from the game control microcomputer 156 via the relay board 77. The control command is received, and display control is performed with the effect display device 9 that variably displays effect symbols.

  In addition, in the present embodiment, the form in which the relay board 77 is provided is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the function of the relay board 77, which will be described later, is provided in the effect control board 80 and the main board 31. The relay substrate 77 may be omitted so that the relay substrate 77 is not provided.

  The effect control board 80 has an effect control microcomputer (not shown) including an effect control CPU and a RAM. The RAM may be external. A power supply board 82 is connected to the effect control board 80 (see FIG. 3), and the RAM and ROM mounted on the effect control board 80 by the power supplied from the power supply board 82 and the effect control CPU ( (Not shown) and the like are operable. In the effect control board 80, an effect control CPU (not shown) operates according to a program stored in a built-in or external ROM (not shown), and is input from the main board 31 via the relay board 77. An effect control command is received via the input driver and the input port in response to the input signal (effect control INT signal). In addition, the production control CPU (not shown) outputs predetermined output instruction information (serial signal) to the reel drive control board 81 to rotate / stop the reels 301L, 301C, 301R and the reel light 310a. The reel drive control board 81 can be controlled to turn on / off the lights 310b and 310c.

  The effect control command and the effect control INT signal are first input to the input driver in the effect control board 80. The input driver allows the signal input from the relay board 77 to pass only in the direction toward the inside of the effect control board 80 (the signal does not pass in the direction from the inside of the effect control board 80 to the relay board 77). It is also a unidirectional circuit as a means.

  As signal direction restricting means for allowing the signal input from the main board 31 to pass through the relay board 77 only in the direction toward the effect control board 80 (does not pass the signal in the direction from the effect control board 80 to the relay board 77). The unidirectional circuit (not shown) is mounted. As the unidirectional circuit, for example, a diode or a transistor is used. Further, since the production control command and the production control INT signal are output from the main board 31 via the I / O port section which is a unidirectional circuit, the signal from the relay board 77 to the inside of the main board 31 is restricted. . That is, the signal from the relay board 77 does not enter the main board 31 (on the side of the game control microcomputer 156).

  Further, the effect control CPU (not shown) is a high-frequency signal for driving (clock signal) input to the motor drive circuits 85, 86, 87 from a serial signal circuit (not shown) mounted on the effect control board 80 and various types. A control signal (see FIGS. 4 and 5) and a signal input to the reel light drive circuit 88, which controls turning on / off of the first reel light 310a, the second reel light 310b, and the third reel light 310c. By outputting output instruction information (serial signal) corresponding to the reel write control signal for the first reel stepping motor from the serial signal circuit 89 to the motor drive circuits 85, 86, 87. 307L, to drive the second reel stepping motor 307C, and the third reel stepping motor 307R And various signals, the first reel lights 310a, second reel light 310b, the reel write control signal for turning on and off the third reel light 310c is output to the reel light driving circuit 88.

  The output port of the effect control CPU outputs sound number data to the voice control board 70. In the voice control board 70, the sound number data is input to a voice synthesis IC (not shown) via an input driver (not shown). The voice synthesizing IC generates a voice or a sound effect corresponding to the sound number data and outputs it to an amplifier circuit (not shown). The amplifier circuit amplifies the output level of the voice synthesizing IC to a level corresponding to the volume set by the volume and outputs the audio signal to the speaker 27. The voice data ROM (not shown) stores control data corresponding to the sound number data. The control data according to the sound number data is a collection of data indicating the output mode of the sound effect or the sound in a predetermined period (for example, the variation period of the effect symbol) in time series.

  In the LED driver board 35, a signal for driving an LED is input to the LED driver via an input driver (not shown). The LED driver supplies a drive signal to each LED provided on the frame side such as the top frame LED 28a, the left frame LED 28b, and the right frame LED 28c. In addition, a drive signal is supplied to the decorative LED 25a provided on the game board side. When a light-emitting body other than the LED is provided, a drive circuit (driver) for driving the light-emitting body is mounted on the LED driver board 35.

  Here, the reel drive control board 81 and the effect display device 9 will be described with reference to FIGS. 3 and 4.

  The effect display device 9 is provided with a first reel stepping motor 307L for rotating the reel 301L, a second reel stepping motor 307C for rotating the reel 301C, and a third reel stepping motor 307R for rotating the reel 301R. Has been. Further, the effect display device 9 includes a first reel light 310a for illuminating the reel 301L from the inside of the reel 301L, a second reel light 310b for illuminating the reel 301C from the inside of the reel 301C, and a reel 301R for the reel. A third reel light 310c for illuminating from the inside of 301R, a first reel origin detection sensor 309a, 309b for detecting the origin position (initial position) of the reel 301L, and an origin position (initial position) of the reel 301C are detected. Second reel origin detection sensors 309c and 309d for detecting the origin and third reel origin detection sensors 309e and 309f for detecting the origin position (initial position) of the reel 301R.

  The first reel stepping motor 307L, the second reel stepping motor 307C, and the third reel stepping motor 307R in this embodiment each have a rotor inside and a stator A (hereinafter, phase A) surrounding the rotor. Two-phase stepping in which the basic step angle is set to 1.8 ° by disposing a plurality of magnetic poles over the entire circumference in the rotation direction of the rotor, and a stator B (hereinafter, B phase). It is a motor. In this embodiment, as the first reel stepping motor 307L, the second reel stepping motor 307C, and the third reel stepping motor 307R, a two-phase stepping motor having a basic step angle of 1.8 ° is used. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the stepping motors used as the first reel stepping motor 307L, the second reel stepping motor 307C, and the third reel stepping motor 307R are two-phase stepping motors or the like. It may be a stepping motor other than the phase, or a stepping motor having a basic step angle other than 1.8 °.

  On the reel drive control board 81, a motor drive power supply circuit 83 (motor drive power supply circuit 1), a motor drive power supply circuit 84 (motor drive power supply circuit 2), a motor drive circuit 85 (motor drive circuit 1), a motor The drive circuit 86 (motor drive circuit 2), the motor drive circuit 87 (motor drive circuit 3), the reel light drive circuit 88, the serial signal circuit 89, etc. are mounted.

  Of these, the motor drive power supply circuit 83 is connected to the performance control board 80, the motor drive circuit 85, and the motor drive circuit 86, and the motor drive power supply circuit 84 is connected to the performance control board 80 and the motor drive circuit 87. ing. The motor drive power supply circuit 83 and the motor drive power supply circuit 84 are, as shown in FIG. 3, motor drive circuits 85, 86, 87 based on the electric power supplied from the power supply board 82 via the performance control board 80. Is a power supply circuit for generating electric power to be supplied to the motor (for example, when electric power of DC30V is supplied from the power supply substrate 82, electric power of DC20V is generated). The circuit 85 and the motor drive circuit 86 are connected to each other, and the motor drive power supply circuit 84 is connected to the motor drive circuit 87. The motor drive circuit 85 is capable of driving the first reel stepping motor 307L with the electric power of the voltage generated by the motor drive power supply circuit 83, and the motor drive circuit 86 is driven by the motor drive power supply circuit 83. The second reel stepping motor 307C can be driven with the electric power of the voltage generated by the third reel stepping motor 87 with the electric power of the voltage generated by the motor drive power supply circuit 84. The motor 307R can be driven.

  That is, as described above, the reels 301L, 301C, and 301R are not limited to the case where the rotation is stopped in the order of the reel 301L, the reel 301R, and the reel 301C when the variable display of the effect symbols is finished, and the reels 301L and 301R. Since the rotation of the reels 301C may stop at the same time and the rotation of the reel 301C may stop at the same time, in the present embodiment, a motor drive circuit 85 that drives the first reel stepping motor 307L of the reels 301L that may stop at the same time. , A motor drive circuit 85 for connecting the motor drive circuit 87 for driving the third reel stepping motor 307R of the reel 301R to a different power supply circuit, and for driving the first reel stepping motor 307L of the reel 301L which is less likely to be stopped at the same time. , Reel 301C second reel stepping It connects the motor drive circuit 86 for driving the over data 307C to the same motor drive power circuit 83.

  Therefore, when the rotations of the reels 301L and 301R stop at the same time, the electric power (current) supplied to the first reel stepping motor 307L and the third reel stepping motor 307R changes significantly, and the power supply circuit has a large amount. Although a burden or an overcurrent may flow, in the present embodiment, the first reel stepping motor 307L and the motor drive circuit 85 for rotating the reel 301L and the third reel stepping motor 307R for rotating the reel 301R. Also, since the power supply circuits (motor drive power supply circuit 83 and motor drive power supply circuit 84) that supply power to the motor drive circuit 87 are different power supply circuits as described above, the motor drive circuit 85 and the motor drive circuit 87 are different. Are connected to the same power supply circuit, for example, the motor drive power supply circuit 83. As compared with the case where the reel 301L and the reel 301R are stopped at the same time, it is possible to suppress the amount of change in the power used per power supply circuit to be small. Therefore, it is necessary to provide a protection circuit or the like. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an increase in cost for providing a protection circuit and the like.

  In the present embodiment, a motor drive circuit 85 that drives the first reel stepping motor 307L of the reel 301L that may be stopped at the same time and a motor drive circuit 87 that drives the third reel stepping motor 307R of the reel 301R. A motor drive circuit 85 for driving the first reel stepping motor 307L of the reel 301L, which is less likely to be stopped at the same time in addition to being connected to different power supply circuits, and a motor drive circuit for driving the second reel stepping motor 307C of the reel 301C. 86 and the same motor drive power supply circuit 83, the motor drive power supply circuit is provided in comparison with the case where the motor drive power supply circuits 85, 86, 87 are individually provided with the motor drive power supply circuits. To reduce costs by reducing the number of That is, the present invention is not limited thereto, may each motor driving circuits 85, 86 and 87 to respectively connect to a separate power source circuit.

  The reel light drive circuit 88 is connected to the first reel light 310a, the second reel light 310b, and the third reel light 310c. Further, the motor drive circuits 85, 86, 87 and the reel light drive circuit 88 mounted on the reel drive control board 81, the first reel light 310a, the second reel light 310b, and the second reel light 310b mounted on the effect display device 9. The 3-reel light 310c, the first reel origin detection sensors 309a and 309b, the second reel origin detection sensors 309c and 309d, and the third reel origin detection sensors 309e and 309f serially communicate with the production control board 80 via the serial signal circuit 89. Are connected so that they can communicate with each other. Therefore, the signals output from the first reel origin detection sensors 309a and 309b, the second reel origin detection sensors 309c and 309d, and the third reel origin detection sensors 309e and 309f are input to the serial signal circuit 89, and the serial signal circuit 89 From 89 to the production control board 80, serial data for notifying the signal output states of the first reel origin detection sensors 309a, 309b, the second reel origin detection sensors 309c, 309d, and the third reel origin detection sensors 309e, 309f. By the transmission, the effect control board 80 detects the detection states of the first reel origin detection sensors 309a, 309b, the second reel origin detection sensors 309c, 309d, and the third reel origin detection sensors 309e, 309f, that is, the reel 301L, the reel. 301C and reel 301R are in the initial position And it is capable to know whether located.

  As described above, in this embodiment, since the reel drive control board 81 and the effect control board 80 are connected by serial communication, the reel drive control board 81 and the effect control board 80 are individually transmitted and received. Compared with the case of connecting by parallel communication, it is preferable that the number of wirings connected to the effect control board 80 can be reduced, and it is easy to prevent noise from the power supply line, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, the reel drive control board 81 and the effect control board 80 may be connected in a form other than serial communication.

  In the present embodiment, the motor drive circuits 85, 86, 87, the reel light drive circuit 88, the first reel origin detection sensors 309a, 309b, the second reel origin detection sensors 309c, 309d, via the serial signal circuit 89. Although the mode in which communication is possible between the third reel origin detection sensors 309e and 309f and the effect control board 80 has been illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the serial signal circuit 89 is A first serial signal circuit for enabling communication between the motor drive circuits 85, 86, 87 and the performance control board 80, and a first serial signal circuit for enabling communication between the reel light drive circuit 88 and the performance control board 80. 2 serial signal circuit, first reel origin detection sensors 309a, 309b, second reel origin detection sensors 309c, 309d, third reel origin detection section Sa 309e, may be divided into a third serial signal circuit for enabling communication with the performance control board 80 and 309f. Further, the first serial signal circuit, the second serial signal circuit, and the third serial signal circuit have different communication intervals with the performance control board 80 (for example, the first serial signal circuit is the motor drive circuit 85, It is possible to communicate between 86 and 87 and the performance control board 80 at a relatively short interval of 0.5 ms or 1 ms, and the second serial signal circuit is between the reel light drive circuit 88 and the performance control board 80. , The third serial signal circuit can communicate with the first reel origin detection sensors 309a and 309b, the second reel origin detection sensors 309c and 309d, and the third reel origin detection sensors 309e and 309f. Communication with the production control board 80 may be possible at an intermediate interval of, for example, 5 ms), and by doing so, high-speed rotation is possible. Therefore, the control frequency of the first reel stepping motor 307L, the second reel stepping motor 307C, and the third reel stepping motor 307R by the motor drive circuits 85, 86, 87, which requires fine control, and fine control are unnecessary. Since the reel light drive circuit 88 controls the first reel light 310a, the second reel light 310b, and the third reel light 310c, the frequency of control can be different. It is possible to prevent the processing load of the processing from unnecessarily increasing.

  Also, connect the first reel origin detection sensors 309a, 309b, the second reel origin detection sensors 309c, 309d, and the third reel origin detection sensors 309e, 309f to the production control board 80 without the serial signal circuit 89. Thus, it is possible to directly notify the production control board 80 of the detection state / non-detection state of the first reel origin detection sensors 309a, 309b, the second reel origin detection sensors 309c, 309d, and the third reel origin detection sensors 309e, 309f. You may

  Further, in the present embodiment, the motor drive circuits 85, 86, 87, the reel light drive circuit 88, the first reel origin detection sensors 309a, 309b, the second reel origin detection sensors 309c, 309d, via the serial signal circuit 89. Although the form in which communication is possible between the third reel origin detection sensors 309e, 309f and the performance control board 80 has been illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the motor drive circuits 85, 86, 87, Serial signals can be communicated between the reel light drive circuit 88, the first reel origin detection sensors 309a and 309b, the second reel origin detection sensors 309c and 309d, the third reel origin detection sensors 309e and 309f, and the effect control board 80. May be By doing so, it is not necessary to provide a converter for converting a signal transmitted / received between the production control board 80 and the reel drive control board 81 from a serial signal to a parallel signal or from a parallel signal to a serial signal. The gaming machine 1 can be manufactured at low cost.

  Next, the motor drive circuits 85, 86, 87 will be described. As shown in FIG. 4, the motor drive circuits 85, 86, 87 mainly include a controller 401, an excitation mode setting circuit 402, an electrical angle monitoring circuit 403, a chopping signal generation circuit 404, a step signal generation circuit 405, and an overheat detection circuit. 406, overcurrent detection circuit 407, internal drive power generation circuit 409, power-on reset circuit 408, drive pulse generation circuit 410, drive current setting circuit 411, pulse output control circuit 412, output pulse generation circuits 415, 416, drive Current comparison circuits 413, 414 and the like are included.

  Of these, the controller 401 is a circuit that controls each motor drive circuit 85, 86, 87, and mainly outputs various signals (forward / reverse rotation) output from the serial signal circuit 89 by reception from the effect control board 80. The step signal generation circuit 405 is mainly controlled based on the signal, the electrical angle initialization signal, the output control signal) and the control clock signal.

  The excitation mode setting circuit 402, based on the excitation setting signal 0, the excitation setting signal 1, and the excitation setting signal 2 received from the production control board 80, sets the excitation mode to a standby mode, which will be described later, two-phase excitation, 1-2 phase excitation (A Type), W1-2 phase excitation, 1-2 phase excitation (B type), 2W1-2 phase excitation, 4W1-2 phase excitation, and 8W1-2 phase excitation. The excitation mode setting circuit 402 also has a function of notifying the controller 401, the electrical angle monitoring circuit 403, and the step signal generation circuit 405 of the excitation mode set based on the excitation setting signal 0, the excitation setting signal 1, and the excitation setting signal 2. ing.

  The electrical angle monitoring circuit 403 is a circuit for monitoring the electrical angle of each reel stepping motor 307L, 307C, 307R. This electrical angle monitoring circuit 403 continuously outputs the electrical angle signal at High when current values having different intensities are applied to the A phase and the B phase, and the A phase and the B phase have the same intensity. When the current value is applied, the electrical angle signal Low is continuously output. As shown in FIG. 9, the case where the electrical angle signal is output at Low in this embodiment means that the motor drive circuit 85 is connected to the A phase and B phase of each reel stepping motor 307L, 307C, 307R. This is the case where a current value of 100% or 71% of the current supplied to 86, 87 is applied and when the electrical angle is 45 °.

  That is, in the electrical angle monitoring circuit 403 of this embodiment, the magnitudes of the current values applied to the A phase and the B phase are the same, and the current values applied to the A phase and the B phase are positive. By continuously outputting the electrical angle signal at Low during the period that is the value, it is shown that the rotors of the reel stepping motors 307L, 307C, and 307R are arranged in an electrically stable position, and the phase A If the magnitudes of the current values applied to the B and B phases are different, or the magnitudes of the current values applied to the A and B phases are the same, The rotor of each reel stepping motor 307L, 307C, 307R is arranged at an electrically stable position by continuously outputting the electrical angle signal at High during a period in which at least one of the current values is a negative value. The Is a circuit that shows that no. When the electrical angle signal is output at Low, the electrical angle is always 45 ° regardless of the excitation mode.

  Note that the electrical angle monitoring circuit 403 of the present embodiment exemplifies a form in which the output state of the electrical angle signal is changed based on the current value applied to the A phase and B phase in each reel stepping motor 307L, 307C, 307R. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the electrical angle monitoring circuit 403 controls the magnitude of the magnetic force generated in the A phase and the B phase in each reel stepping motor 307L, 307C, 307R, and the control. The output state of the electrical angle signal may be changed based on the clock signal for use. In the present embodiment, the electric angle signal can be output by providing the electric angle monitoring circuit 403 in the motor drive circuits 85, 86, 87, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, the motor drive circuits 85, 86, 87 may not output the electrical angle signal.

  The chopping signal generation circuit 404 is a circuit that generates a chopping signal by adjusting the triangular-wave driving pulse signal generated by the driving pulse generation circuit 410 described later into a rectangular wave. The chopping signal is a signal having 16 cycles of the rectangular wave as one cycle. The step signal generation circuit 405 is a circuit that generates a step signal based on the chopping signal generated by the chopping signal generation circuit 404 and the signal output from the controller 401 based on the control clock signal from the serial signal circuit 89.

  The overheat detection circuit 406 monitors the heat generation of the pulse output control circuit 412, and outputs the overheat detection signal to the controller 401 when the temperature of the pulse output control circuit 412 reaches a specified temperature, thereby controlling the pulse output. This is a circuit for notifying that the temperature of the circuit 412 has reached the specified temperature. The overcurrent detection circuit 407 is applied to the pulse output control circuit 412 by outputting an overcurrent detection signal to the controller 401 when the current applied to the pulse output control circuit 412 reaches a specified current. This is a circuit for notifying that the current that has reached the specified current has been reached. When the controller 401 receives the overheat detection signal or the overcurrent detection signal, the excitation mode is set to the standby mode to stop the driving of the stepping motors 307L, 307C, and 307R, and the temperature of the pulse output control circuit 412 changes. An abnormality detection signal indicating that the specified temperature has been reached and that the current applied to the pulse output control circuit 412 has reached the specified current is output to the effect control board 80 and the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  The internal drive power generation circuit 409 is a circuit for generating internal drive power used in the motor drive circuits 85, 86, 87 from the motor drive power, and the generated internal drive power is supplied to the controller 401 and the like. Is being supplied, and the controller 401 operates by the internal drive power. The motor drive power is supplied to a plurality of circuits such as the drive pulse generation circuit 410, and the plurality of circuits such as the drive pulse generation circuit 410 operate by the motor drive power. The power-on reset circuit 408 causes the motor drive circuits 85, 86, 87 to start normally when the motor drive circuits 85, 86, 87 are powered on (motor drive power). This is a circuit for resetting the states of 85, 86, and 87.

  The drive pulse generation circuit 410 is a circuit that generates a drive pulse signal that is a triangular wave based on a drive high frequency signal that is input from the outside. The generated drive pulse signal is adjusted into a rectangular wave in the chopping signal generation circuit 404 and used as a chopping signal, as described above. The drive current setting circuit 411 drives the stepping motors 307L, 307C, 307R based on the A-phase output setting signal and the B-phase output setting signal input from the effect control board 80 via the serial signal circuit 89. It is a circuit for setting a set current value (upper limit current value). The drive current setting circuit 411 has a function of notifying the drive current comparison circuits 413 and 414 of the current value based on the set current value set based on the A-phase output setting signal and the B-phase output setting signal. There is.

  The pulse output control circuit 412 is a circuit for controlling the current application timing from the output pulse generation circuits 415 and 416 to the reel stepping motors 307L, 307C and 307R. The output pulse generation circuits 415 and 416 are circuits for storing and discharging (outputting) a current to be applied to the A phase and the B phase under the control of the pulse output control circuit 412. In the present embodiment, the output pulse generation circuit 415 is a circuit for applying a current to the A phase in each reel stepping motor 307L, 307C, 307R, and the output pulse generation circuit 416 is each reel stepping motor 307L, It is a circuit for applying a current value to the B phase in 307C and 307R. Further, the output pulse generation circuit 415 has a function of notifying the stored current value to the drive current comparison circuit 413, and the output pulse generation circuit 416 outputs the stored current value to the drive current comparison circuit 414. It has a function to notify.

  The drive current comparison circuit 413 is a circuit for comparing the current value stored in the output pulse generation circuit 415 with the current value notified from the drive current setting circuit 411, and is capable of mutual communication with the pulse output control circuit 412. It is connected to the. The drive current comparison circuit 414 is a circuit for comparing the current value stored in the output pulse generation circuit 416 with the current value notified from the drive current setting circuit 411, and is capable of mutual communication with the pulse output control circuit 412. It is connected to the.

  Based on the control of the pulse output control circuit 412, the output pulse generation circuits 415 and 416 of the present embodiment each perform A phase / B of the reel stepping motors 307L, 307C, and 307R each time the clock signal is input once. It is a circuit that repeats storage and discharge (output) for applying current to the phases. When the clock signal is input, the pulse output control circuit 412 controls the output pulse generation circuits 415 and 416 to store electricity. At this time, the pulse output control circuit 412 communicates with the drive current comparison circuits 413 and 414 so that the current values stored in the output pulse generation circuits 415 and 416 reach the current values notified from the drive current setting circuit 411, respectively. It is monitored whether the current value stored in the output pulse generation circuits 415 and 416 has reached the current value notified from the drive current setting circuit 411. The output pulse generation circuits 415 and 416 are controlled to output pulse signals (discharge and apply current values) to the A and B phases of 307C and 307R.

  Here, signal conversion in the serial signal circuit 89 used in this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. As described above, the serial signal circuit 89 of the present embodiment is mounted on the reel drive control board 81 together with the motor drive circuits 85, 86, 87 and the reel light drive circuit 88.

  As described above, the serial signal circuit 89 is connected to the serial signal circuit on the production control board side mounted on the production control board 80 by a serial signal line, and is bidirectional serial with the production control board 80. Perform data communication.

  Although the serial signal circuit 89 of the present embodiment is configured to perform synchronous serial communication in which a clock signal for serial communication is transmitted together with a data signal, the present invention is not limited to this and, for example, A start-stop bit and a stop bit may be added before and after a predetermined length of data to perform asynchronous serial communication, and any of these serial communication methods may be used as long as serial communication is possible. May be used.

  As shown in FIG. 5, the serial signal circuit 89 receives the respective motor drive circuits 85, 86, 87 and, as described above, the control signals input to the motor drive circuits 85, 86, 87. Output control signal, electrical angle initialization signal, forward / reverse rotation signal, excitation setting signal 0, excitation setting signal 1, excitation setting signal 2, A phase output setting signal, B phase output setting signal, control clock signal It is connected by nine signal wirings for outputting each signal, and converts the serial data signal of the control instruction received from the performance control board 80 into each control signal described above and outputs it.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 6, from the effect control board 80, a predetermined header capable of specifying the type of data is added to the head, and the control data for the motor drive circuit 1 and the clock for the motor drive circuit 1 are added. Signal data, motor drive circuit 2 control data, motor drive circuit 2 clock signal data, motor drive circuit 3 control data, motor drive circuit 3 clock signal data, reel light drive circuit data, 1 unit of control instruction Is repeatedly sent as. It should be noted that, between the transmission of the control instruction of one unit and the transmission of the control instruction of one unit next, the first reel origin detection sensors 309a and 309b, the second reel origin detection sensors 309c and 309d, The detection serial data indicating the detection results of the three-reel origin detection sensors 309e and 309f is transmitted from the serial signal circuit 89 to the effect control board 80.

  The motor drive circuit 1 control data, motor drive circuit 2 control data, and motor drive circuit 3 control data include output control signals, electrical angle initialization signals, forward / reverse rotation signals, excitation setting signals 0, excitation setting signals. 1, the excitation setting signal 2, the A-phase output setting signal, and the B-phase output setting signal include instruction data indicating what kind of signal should be output, and the signals in the form instructed by these instruction data are Motor drive circuits 85 and 86 are used as output control signals, electrical angle initialization signals, forward / reverse rotation signals, excitation setting signals 0, excitation setting signals 1, excitation setting signals 2, A phase output setting signals, and B phase output setting signals. , 87. Therefore, even if the same type of control signal, for example, the same output control signal, the motor drive circuit 1 control data, the motor drive circuit 2 control data, and the motor drive circuit 3 control data are made different, the motor drive circuit is controlled. It is possible to individually output different forms of signals to the circuits 85, 86, 87.

  The motor drive circuit 1 clock signal data is serial data for outputting a control clock signal to the motor drive circuit 85, and the motor drive circuit 2 clock signal data is output to the motor drive circuit 86. The motor drive circuit 3 clock signal data is serial data for outputting a control clock signal, and the motor drive circuit 3 clock signal data is serial data for outputting a control clock signal to the motor drive circuit 87.

  As these clock signal data, as shown in FIG. 6, plural kinds of data corresponding to the form of the output control clock signal are set. Specifically, for example, if the clock signal data is the data of "010101 ...", the serial signal circuit 89 outputs the control clock signal (A) of the shortest cycle having the shortest cycle, and the clock signal data is " If the data is "00110011 ...", the serial signal circuit 89 outputs the control clock signal (B) having a double cycle of the shortest cycle. If the clock signal data is "000111000111 ...", the serial signal circuit 89 is output. Outputs a control clock signal having a different cycle corresponding to the clock signal data to the motor drive circuits 85, 86, 87 so as to output a control clock signal (C) having a cycle three times the shortest cycle.

  As the clock signal data, clock signal data for stopping the output of the control clock signal from the serial signal circuit 89 is set, and the clock signal data for stopping the output is transmitted, whereby the serial signal circuit 89 is transmitted. The output of the control clock signal to the motor drive circuits 85, 86 and 87 may be stopped to reduce noise due to these clock signals.

  In this way, by changing the cycle of the control clock signal input to each motor drive circuit 85, 86, 87, the first reel stepping motor 307L driven by the motor drive circuit 85, 86, 87, The drive speed and the like of the second reel stepping motor 307C and the third reel stepping motor 307R can be appropriately changed regardless of the electrical angle and the like.

  Further, since the control clock signal input to each motor drive circuit 85, 86, 87 is converted and output as the clock signal data transmitted from the performance control board 80, each motor drive circuit 85, 86, 87. It becomes possible for the production control board 80 to directly manage the control clock signal input to the board by the clock signal data. For example, the reel drive control board 81 is provided with an individual clock signal generation circuit, Compared with the case where the control clock signal generated by the clock signal generation circuit is input to each motor drive circuit 85, 86, 87, the cycle of the clock signal input from these individual clock signal generation circuits and serial data communication It is also possible to prevent improper drive control from being performed due to the difference with the cycle.

  In the present embodiment, on the production control board 80 side, a data string of clock signal data corresponding to each cycle is stored in a predetermined area of the ROM mounted in advance on the production control board 80. When transmitting the clock signal data, the effect control CPU mounted on the CPU reads the data sequence of the clock signal data corresponding to the cycle output from the serial signal circuit 89 from the ROM and uses the clock signal data. When transmitting, the clock signal data can be transmitted without executing the process of generating the data sequence of the clock signal data corresponding to the output cycle in sequence, and the processing load related to the transmission of these clock signal data is reduced. However, the present invention is not limited to this. To execute a clock signal data conversion process for converting the clock signal into a data string of clock signal data corresponding to a cycle output from the serial signal circuit 89 by calculation based on the clock signal input to the output control CPU. Thus, the data string of the clock signal data may be sequentially generated by conversion. In other words, the production control board 80 (production control CPU), which is production control means, uses serial clock data based on the operation clock generated by the operation clock generation circuit of the production control board 80 (production control CPU). It may be possible to generate and transmit certain clock signal data for the motor drive circuit 1, clock signal data for the motor drive circuit 2, and clock signal data for the motor drive circuit 3. In this way, by generating (converting) the clock signal data from the clock signal input to the effect control CPU in the clock signal data conversion processing, the processing load related to the transmission of the clock signal data increases, but the effect Since the synchronization with the operation cycle in the control CPU can be obtained, it is possible to further prevent inappropriate drive control from being performed due to the difference in cycle.

  Further, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 6, a form in which the effect control board 80 transmits a plurality of types of clock signal data corresponding to control clock signals having different cycles is illustrated, but the form is For example, when the number of cycles is small, it is good. However, when the number of cycles is large, the processing load of the effect control board 80 and the like increase, and the data capacity of the clock signal data also increases. Since the amount of data in serial communication increases, for example, when the number of cycles is n (division by n), as shown in FIG. 7, the serial signal circuit 89 and each motor drive circuit are A pulse counter 90, which serves as a frequency dividing unit, is provided between 85, 86, and 87, and a control clock signal serving as a reference, for example, the control clock having the shortest period described above, is provided from the effect control board 80. The clock signal data corresponding to the clock signal (A) and the frequency division control data corresponding to the frequency division control signal for controlling the frequency division output to the pulse counter 90 are transmitted. The serial signal circuit 89 that receives the frequency division control data outputs the pulse control signal (A) and the frequency division control signal of the shortest cycle, which are the reference control clock signals, to the pulse counter 90, thereby generating the pulse By causing the counter 90 to output the divided frequency (divided pulse) obtained by dividing the reference control clock signal to the cycle specified by the division control signal, to the motor drive circuits 85, 86, 87. It is also possible to suppress an increase in the processing load of the effect control board 80 due to an increase in the number of cycles and also an increase in the data amount of serial communication.

  As described above, the serial signal circuit 89 and the motor drive circuits 85, 86, 87 of this embodiment are configured. Next, the operation of driving each reel stepping motor 307L, 307C, 307R using these motor drive circuits 85, 86, 87 will be described.

  First, when the motor drive power is supplied to the motor drive circuits 85, 86, 87, the internal drive power generation circuit 409 uses the power-on reset circuit 408 so that the motor drive circuits 85, 86, 87 start up normally. Then, the states of the motor drive circuits 85, 86 and 87 are reset. Then, the supply of the motor drive power to the circuits such as the drive pulse generation circuit 410 is started, and the supply of the internal drive power to the controller 401 is started.

  Next, when the controller 401 starts up by being supplied with the internal drive power, the controller 401 receives and stores the notification of the excitation mode set from the excitation mode setting circuit 402. The electrical angle monitoring circuit 403 and the step signal generation circuit 405 also receive and store the notification of the excitation mode set from the excitation mode setting circuit 402. Further, the chopping signal generation circuit 404 adjusts the triangular-wave driving pulse signal generated from the driving high-frequency signal by the driving pulse generation circuit 410 into a rectangular wave to obtain a chopping signal, and outputs the chopping signal to the step signal generation circuit 405. To do.

  Then, when a signal such as a control clock signal and a forward / reverse rotation signal is input from the effect control board 80, the controller 401 forwards the reel stepping motors 307L, 307C, 307R to the step signal generation circuit 405. The direction indicated by the reverse signal is notified. At this time, the drive current setting circuit 411 receives the A-phase output setting signal and the B-phase output setting signal from the effect control board 80, and the drive current setting circuit 411 outputs an output pulse based on the A-phase output setting signal. The current value stored in the generation circuit 415 is notified to the drive current comparison circuit 413, and the current value stored in the output pulse generation circuit 416 is notified to the drive current comparison circuit 414 based on the B-phase output setting signal.

  Next, the step signal generation circuit 405 outputs the output pulse generation circuit 415 to the pulse output control circuit 412 based on the forward / reverse rotation signal input from the controller 401 and the chopping signal input from the chopping signal generation circuit 404. A step signal for instructing charge / discharge and a step signal for instructing charge / discharge of the output pulse generation circuit 416 are output. In addition, the step signal generation circuit 405 notifies the electrical angle monitoring circuit 403 of a signal capable of specifying the step angle according to the excitation mode each time these step signals are output.

  The pulse output control circuit 412 starts charging in the output pulse generation circuit 415 based on the input of the step signal from the step signal generation circuit 405. During the storage, the output pulse generation circuit 415 notifies the drive current comparison circuit 413 of the current value stored in the output pulse generation circuit 415. Further, the drive current comparison circuit 413 notifies the pulse output control circuit 412 that the current value stored in the output pulse generation circuit 415 has reached the current value notified from the drive current setting circuit 411. The output pulse generation circuit 415 is notified that the storage of the current having the current value notified from the drive current setting circuit 411 is completed.

  Then, the pulse output control circuit 412 determines that the output pulse generation circuit 415 has completed the storage of the current having the current value notified from the drive current setting circuit 411. The output pulse generation circuit 415 is controlled so as to discharge the 307C and 307R to the A phase (output the pulse signal).

  Similarly, the pulse output control circuit 412 starts charging in the output pulse generation circuit 416 based on the input of the step signal from the step signal generation circuit 405. During the storage, the output pulse generation circuit 416 notifies the drive current comparison circuit 414 of the current value stored in the output pulse generation circuit 416. Further, the drive current comparison circuit 414 notifies the pulse output control circuit 412 that the current value stored in the output pulse generation circuit 415 has reached the current value notified from the drive current setting circuit 411. The output pulse generation circuit 416 is notified that the storage of the current having the current value notified from the drive current setting circuit 411 is completed.

  Then, the pulse output control circuit 412 causes the output pulse generation circuits 415, 416 to output the reels based on the completion of the storage of the current having the current value notified from the drive current setting circuit 411. The output pulse generation circuits 415 and 416 are controlled so that the stepping motors 307L, 307C, and 307R are discharged to the B phase (output of pulse signals). As will be described later, the current value of the pulse signal output from the output pulse generation circuits 415 and 416 does not exceed the set current value, although it differs depending on the excitation mode.

  As described above, the current stored in the output pulse generation circuits 415 and 416 is discharged, and thus the A phase of each reel stepping motor 307L, 307C, and 307R is input to the drive current setting circuit 411. A current value based on the phase output setting signal is applied, and a current value based on the B phase output setting signal input to the drive current setting circuit 411 is applied to the B phase of each reel stepping motor 307L, 307C, 307R. It has become. Even when the reel stepping motors 307L, 307C, and 307R are being driven by the A-phase output setting signal and the B-phase output setting signal input from the performance control board 80 (production control CPU) to the drive current setting circuit 411. By changing the current value of the pulse signal output from each output pulse generation circuit 415, 416, it is possible to change the torque and heat generation amount of each reel stepping motor 307L, 307C, 307R. In each of the reel stepping motors 307L, 307C, and 307R in the present embodiment, the torque and heat generation amount are increased by increasing the current value applied to the A phase and the B phase, while the A phase and the B phase are increased. As the applied current value decreases, the torque and heat generation amount decrease.

  Next, the excitation modes that the excitation mode setting circuit 402 can set according to the combination of the excitation setting signal 0, the excitation setting signal 1, and the excitation setting signal 2 input from the effect control board 80 will be described. When the excitation setting signal 0, the excitation setting signal 1, and the excitation setting signal 2 in the excitation mode setting circuit 402 are all Low, the excitation mode is set to the standby mode. The standby mode is a mode in which generation of drive pulses and generation of pulse signals from the output pulse generation circuits 415 and 416 are stopped. When the excitation setting signal 0 and the excitation setting signal 1 are Low and the excitation setting signal 2 is High in the excitation mode setting circuit, the excitation mode is set to the 2-phase excitation setting, and the excitation setting signal 0 and the excitation setting signal are set. When 2 is Low and the excitation setting signal 1 is High, the excitation mode is set to 1-2 phase excitation (A type) setting, the excitation setting signal 0 is HIgh, and the excitation setting signal 1 and the excitation setting signal 2 are set. Is High, the excitation mode is set to W1-2 phase excitation setting. When the excitation setting signal 0 is High and the excitation setting signal 1 and the excitation setting signal 2 are Low, the excitation mode is 1-2 phase excitation. If the excitation setting signal 0 and the excitation setting signal 2 are High and the excitation setting signal 1 is Low, the excitation mode is set to 2W1-2 phase excitation setting and the When the setting signal 0 and the excitation setting signal 1 are High and the excitation setting signal 2 is Low, the excitation mode is set to 4W1-2 phase excitation setting, and when the excitation setting signals 0 to 2 are all High, the excitation mode Is set to 8W1-2 phase excitation setting.

  As shown in FIGS. 18 and 19, in the 2-phase excitation setting and the 1-2 layer excitation (A type) setting, the current values of 0%, + 100%, and −100% based on these excitation settings are set as the A phase. It is set to execute the full step drive for driving the first reel stepping motor 307L, the second reel stepping motor 307C, and the third reel stepping motor 307R by applying to the B phase. That is, as shown in FIGS. 16 to 19, in these full-step driving, the same current value is always applied to only the A phase or the B phase of the A phase and the B phase, and the A phase and the B phase. Since only the case where the same current value is applied to and is provided, the step angle is set large. Further, the full-step driving is provided in the case where the same current value is applied only to the A phase or only the B phase and the case where the same current value is applied to the A phase and the B phase. The reel stepping motor 307L, the second reel stepping motor 307C, and the third reel stepping motor 307R are driven by a constant current.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 20 and 21, 1-2 phase excitation (B type) setting, W1-2 phase excitation setting, 2W1-2 phase excitation setting, 4W1-2 phase excitation setting, 8W1-2 phase excitation setting In addition to the current values of 0%, + 100% and -100% based on each excitation setting, the more detailed current values of + 71%, + 38%, -38%, -71%, etc. By applying the voltage to the phase and the micro reel drive, the first reel stepping motor 307L, the second reel stepping motor 307C, and the third reel stepping motor 307R are driven more finely (smaller basic step angle) than full step driving. It is a setting. That is, in these micro-tip drive, as shown in FIGS. 16, 17, 20, and 21, the current value applied to the A-phase / B-phase is set more finely than the full-step drive, so The step angle is set smaller than that of step drive (1-2 phase excitation (B type) setting, W1-2 phase excitation setting, 2W1-2 phase excitation setting, 4W1-2 phase excitation setting, 8W1-2 phase excitation Basic step angle becomes smaller in the order of setting).

  In the setting for executing the micro step drive, unlike the setting for executing the full step drive, a current value of less than 100% may be applied to each phase, so the set current value set is the full step drive. When the settings for executing the above are the same, the current value applied to one phase becomes smaller than that in the case where the full step driving is executed. Therefore, in the setting for executing the micro-step driving of the present embodiment, the setting current value is set to be larger than the setting for executing the full-step driving so that the current value applied to one phase executes the full-step driving. Are set to be equivalent. That is, in the setting for executing the micro step drive, 1-2 phase excitation (B type) setting, W1-2 phase excitation setting, 2W1-2 phase excitation setting, 4W1-2 phase excitation setting, 8W1-2 phase excitation setting While the rotation of each reel stepping motor 307L, 307C, 307R becomes smoother, the power consumption increases and the rotation speed of each reel stepping motor 307L, 307C, 307R decreases. Further, different current values may be applied to the A-phase and the B-phase in these micro-step drives, and therefore, unlike the full-step drive, the first reel stepping motor 307L, the second reel stepping motor 307C, and the third reel stepping motor 307L. The reel stepping motor 307R is not driven by a constant current. Further, as shown in FIG. 17, in the micro step drive, a current value of 38% is applied to the A phase and a current value of 100% is applied to the B phase. The total current value applied becomes large, that is, the micro-step drive consumes more power than the full-step drive.

  In the present embodiment, when the effect control board 80 (effect control CPU mounted on the effect control board 80) changes the excitation mode, first, as shown in the excitation mode change process of FIG. The operation state of the stepping motors 307L, 307C, 307R (for example, driving or stopping, which excitation mode is set, etc.) is confirmed (S601). Then, the performance control board 80 specifies the output state of the electrical angle initialization signal for each motor drive circuit 85, 86, 87 (S602), and the electrical angle output from each motor drive circuit 85, 86, 87. It is determined whether the signal is Low (S603). When the electrical angle signal is not Low (S603; N), the processes of S602 and S603 are repeatedly executed, and when the electrical angle signal is Low (S603; Y), the changed excitation mode ( The excitation mode is changed in the excitation mode setting circuit 402 by changing the output of each excitation setting signal (excitation setting signal 0, excitation setting signal 1, excitation setting signal 2) according to (see FIG. 8) (S604).

  In the excitation mode changing process of the present embodiment, after confirming that the rotation of each reel stepping motor 307L, 307C, 307R is stopped (in a stopped state) (S601), the electrical angle initialization signal of the electrical angle initialization signal is output. An example is shown in which whether the output and the electrical angle signal are Low is repeatedly determined (S602 and S603), and the excitation mode is changed based on the electrical angle signal being Low (S604). The present invention is not limited to this, and when it is confirmed that the rotations of the reel stepping motors 307L, 307C, and 307R are stopped (stopped state), the electrical angle signal has already become Low. When the reel stepping motor 307L, the excitation mode may be changed without outputting the electrical angle initialization signal. While the 07C and 307R are rotating, it is confirmed that the electrical angle signal is Low, and the excitation mode is changed based on the electrical angle signal being Low. Also, the excitation mode may be changed.

  The first reel stepping motor 307L, the second reel stepping motor 307C, and the third reel stepping motor 307R connected to the motor drive circuits 85, 86, 87 (reel drive control board 81) configured as described above are shown in FIG. As shown in, the reels 301L, 301C, and 301L that rotate as variable display of effect symbols are driven to rotate. The first reel stepping motor 307L, the second reel stepping motor 307C, and the third reel stepping motor 307R are supplied with a current value I1 while being driven, thereby rotating the respective reels 301L, 301C, 301R. Rotate at V1. It should be noted that the current value I1 in the present embodiment is the first reel stepping motor 307L, the second reel stepping motor 307L, the second reel stepping motor 307C, the third reel stepping motor 307R at all rotation speeds. 307C and the third reel stepping motor 307R are current values outside the vibration region where vibration easily occurs.

  That is, when the first reel stepping motor 307L, the second reel stepping motor 307C, and the third reel stepping motor 307R are driven by applying the current value I1, the first reel stepping motor 307L and the second reel stepping motor Vibration is less likely to occur regardless of the rotation speeds of the 307C and the third reel stepping motor 307R. As described above, by driving the first reel stepping motor 307L, the second reel stepping motor 307C, and the third reel stepping motor 307R at the current value I1 that does not fall within the vibration region at all rotation speeds, the first reel stepping motor 307L It is possible to easily design a program for controlling the driving of the second reel stepping motor 307C and the third reel stepping motor 307R.

  In the present embodiment, the first reel stepping motor 307L, the second reel stepping motor 307C, and the third reel stepping motor 307R are driven by applying the current value I1, but the present invention is not limited to this. However, different current values may be applied to the first reel stepping motor 307L, the second reel stepping motor 307C, and the third reel stepping motor 307R depending on the driving speed. In this way, when different current values can be applied to the first reel stepping motor 307L, the second reel stepping motor 307C, and the third reel stepping motor 307R, the first reel stepping motor 307L and the second reel stepping motor By applying a current value different from the current value corresponding to the vibration area of the 307C and third reel stepping motor 307R, it is possible to prevent the reels 301L, 301C, and 301R from being visually recognized by the player as if they were vibrating. It is desirable to do.

  The first reel stepping motor 307L, the second reel stepping motor 307C, and the third reel stepping motor 307R have a current value I2 (I1> I2> 0) lower than the current value I1 of each reel stepping motor 307L, 307C, By being applied to the A and B phases of 307R, the A and B phases of the reel stepping motors 307L, 307C, and 307R are maintained even after the drive is stopped (rotational speed of the reels 301L, 301C, and 301R is 0). The reels 301L, 301C, and 301R are held by the magnetic force (the magnetic force having the same magnitude generated by the application of the same magnitude current value to the A phase and the B phase) generated in the above.

  As will be described later in detail, as shown in FIG. 22, each of the reel stepping motors 307L, 307C, and 307R in this embodiment may stop driving at the timing when the period T has elapsed from the start of driving. At this time, the current value applied to the first reel stepping motor 307L changes from I1 to I2 based on the lapse of the period T1 (for example, 100 ms) from the driving stop, and the second reel stepping motor 307C changes The current value applied changes from I1 to I2 based on the lapse of the period T2 (for example, 200 ms) from the stop of driving, and the third reel stepping motor 307R has the period T3 (for example, 150 ms) from the stop of driving. The applied current value changes from I1 to I2 based on the elapsed time. That is, the first reel stepping motor 307L, the second reel stepping motor 307C, and the third reel stepping motor 307R have different timings at which the current values change when the drive stop timings are the same in the variable display of the effect symbols. .

  Particularly, in the present embodiment, as described above, in the setting for executing the micro step drive, the set current value larger than that for the setting for executing the full step drive is set, so that the applied current value is changed. If the driving of the reel stepping motors 307L, 307C, 307R is stopped without doing so, the heat generated from these reel stepping motors 307L, 307C, 307R will become large, and malfunction of the motor drive circuits 85, 86, 87 (for example, motors The drive circuits 85, 86, 87 may be reset by mistake). Therefore, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 22, when the driving of the reel stepping motors 307L, 307C, 307R is stopped in the setting for executing the micro step driving, the reel stepping motors 307L, 307C, By changing the current value applied to 307R (decreasing from I1 to I2), heat generation of each reel stepping motor 307L, 307C, 307R is suppressed.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the motor drive power supply circuits 83 and 84 are shifted by shifting the change timings of the current values applied to the reel stepping motors 307L, 307C, and 307R during the variable display of the effect symbols. While reducing the load generated by the change in the amount of power supply, in order to start the rotation of each reel 301L, 301C, 301R as a variation display of the effect symbol, in each reel stepping motor 307L, 307C, 307R The applied current value changes from I2 to I1 and the driving timing is the same. However, the present invention is not limited to this, for example, when the variable display of one effect symbol is finished and the variable display of a new effect symbol is started, that is, each reel stepping motor 307L, 307C, 307R. When the reel stepping motors 307L, 307C, 307R are driven again while the driving of the reels is stopped, the timing of applying the current value I1 to the reel stepping motors 307L, 307C, 307R, that is, the reel stepping motor 307L , 307C, 307R may be driven at different timings to reduce the load generated by the change in the power supply amount in the motor drive power supply circuits 83, 84.

  Next, the production-use variable display unit 300 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to the drawings. FIG. 11 is a perspective view showing the production variable display unit. FIG. 12 is an exploded perspective view showing the internal structure of the production variable display unit of FIG. 11. FIG. 13 is a perspective view showing a state in which the reel is viewed obliquely from the front. FIG. 14 is an exploded perspective view showing the reel. FIG. 15 is a diagram showing a mounting structure of the reel holding frame and the reel stepping motor. In the following description, the vertical and horizontal directions when facing the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described as a reference.

  As shown in FIGS. 11 and 12, the production-use variable display unit 300 (production display device 9) includes a case body 302 having an open front surface, a transparent plate 303 closing the front opening of the case body 302, and a case body 302. It is mainly composed of reels 301L, 301C, and 301R arranged inside in the left-right direction. In addition, on the back surface of the transparent plate 303, a print sheet frame 304 for forming a see-through window 304a (see a halftone dot area in FIG. 11) that allows the variable display portions of the reels 301L, 301C, and 301R to be viewed is disposed. . The transparent plate 303 is formed in an arc shape in a side view so as to be along the peripheral surfaces of the reels 301L, 301C, and 301R.

  As shown in FIGS. 11 to 13, the reels 301L, 301C, and 301R are integrated in a state where they are juxtaposed in the left-right direction and are assembled to the case body 302 in the integrated state. Since the reels 301L, 301C, and 301R have the same configuration, the reel 301L will be described below as an example, and detailed description of the other reels 301C and 301R will be omitted.

  As shown in FIGS. 14 and 15, the reel 301L is rotatably supported by support plates 306L and 306C that are erected in the front-rear direction. Specifically, the reel 301L is assembled to the support plate 306C (see the chain double-dashed line in FIG. 11) of the adjacent reel 301C. Only the reel 301R on the right side is supported by a support plate 306S (see FIG. 13) standing upright on the right side.

  The reel 301L is fixed to a first reel stepping motor 307L, a reel seat 308 having a plurality of types of symbols arranged on the outer peripheral surface, and a rotation shaft (not shown) of the reel motor 307, and holds the reel seat 308 in a circular shape. And a reel holding frame 309 for Although not particularly shown in FIGS. 14 and 15, a first reel light 310a is arranged inside the reel holding frame 309 so that the reel 301L (reel sheet 308) can be irradiated with light. .

  The first reel stepping motor 307L includes a motor body 321 having the above-described rotor and stator therein, and a rotating plate 322 attached to a rotating shaft 323 extending from the motor body 321. There is. In the first reel stepping motor 307L, the motor body 321 is fixed to the left side surface of the support plate 306C in a state where the rotation shaft 323 faces the left-right direction, and the rotation plate 322 is arranged on the left side of the motor body 321. ing. The rotating plate 322 is connected to the reel holding frame 309 inside the reel holding frame 309. That is, the reel 301L is rotated by transmitting the driving force generated in the motor body 321 of the first reel stepping motor 307L to the rotating shaft 323, the rotating plate 322, and the reel holding frame 309. There is.

  Slits 322 a and 322 b are formed at the peripheral edge of the rotating plate 322 so as to be separated from each other along the rotation direction of the rotating plate 322. Further, first reel origin detection sensors 309a and 309b are arranged at the left end portion of the motor body 321, and slits 322a and 322b are arranged to be simultaneously detectable. In this embodiment, the position where the first reel origin detection sensor 309a detects the slit 322a and the first reel origin detection sensor 309b detects the slit 322b is the origin position (initial position) of the reel 301L.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 15, by providing two slits in the reel 301L and two first reel origin detection sensors for detecting the slits, the origin position of the reel 301L (initial position) ) Can be detected at two points inside the reel 301L, but the present invention is not limited to this, and one slit and one first reel origin detection sensor are provided inside the reel 301L. Thus, the origin position (initial position) of the reel 301L may be detected by only one point on the reel 301L. Further, by providing three or more slits and three or more first reel origin detection sensors in the reel 301L, the origin position (initial position) of the reel 301L may be detected at three or more points in the reel 301L.

  Next, the operation of the effect control board 80 will be described. FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing the effect control main processing executed by the effect control CPU (not shown) mounted on the effect control board 80. When the power is turned on, the effect control CPU starts execution of effect control main processing. In the effect control main process, first, a first initialization process (S50) for clearing the RAM area, setting various initial values, and initializing a timer for determining the effect control activation interval (for example, 2 ms). ), And a second initialization process for returning the reels 301L, 301C, and 301R to the origin position and confirming the operation (S51). After that, the effect control CPU shifts to the loop processing for monitoring the timer interrupt flag (S52). When the timer interrupt occurs, the effect control CPU sets the timer interrupt flag by the timer interrupt process. If the timer interrupt flag is set (ON) in the main process, the effect control CPU clears the flag (S53), and executes the following process.

  The effect control CPU first performs command analysis processing (S54). In the command analysis processing, the command (not shown) transmitted from the main board 31 stored in the received command buffer is analyzed. The effect control command transmitted from the main board 31 is received by the interrupt process based on the effect control INT signal and is stored in the buffer area formed in the RAM. And the process etc. which set the flag according to the received production control command are performed.

  Next, the effect control CPU performs a switch detection process (S55). In the switch detection processing, the detection statuses of the first reel origin detection sensors 309a and 309b, the second reel origin detection sensors 309c and 309d, the third reel origin detection sensors 309e and 309f, the abnormality detection signals from the motor drive circuits 85 to 87, The output statuses of the electrical angle signal, the A-phase current detection signal, and the B-phase current detection signal are specified. In particular, the detection status of the reel origin detection sensor and the output status of the electrical angle signal are determined and determined by the switch detection processing identifying the same output status (ON (Low) or OFF (High)) twice consecutively. The output state has changed based on the output state (ON (Low) to OFF (High), OFF (High) to ON (Low)), and the output state changes due to noise. Even if there is, a change in the output state will not be specified by mistake.

  Next, the effect control CPU performs effect control process processing (S56). In the production control process process, the process corresponding to the current control state (production control process flag) is selected from among the processes corresponding to the control state, and the display control of the production display device 9 is executed.

  Next, the effect control CPU performs effect random number updating processing (S57). In the random number updating process for effect, the random number counter used in various lottery performed by the effect control CPU is updated.

  24 and 25 are flowcharts showing the second initialization process (S51) of this embodiment. In the second initialization processing, the effect control CPU first identifies the movable accessory (reel 301L, 301C, 301R) to be operated first based on the setting data, and proceeds to S103 (S101). The setting data includes order data of the reels 301L, 301C, and 301R, and in this embodiment, the order of reel 301L → reel 301C → reel 301R is preset as the order. Therefore, when S101 is first executed, the reel 301L is specified as the target reel.

  In S103, the effect control CPU specifies the detection state of the origin detection sensor corresponding to the operation target reel, and whether or not the two origin detection sensors are in the detection state, that is, the operation target reel is at the origin position (initial position). It is determined whether or not it is located at (S104). That is, in S103 and S104, when the operation target reel is the first reel 301L, it is determined whether or not the first reel origin detection sensors 309a and 309b detect the slits 322a and 322b, respectively, and the operation target is determined. When the reel is the second reel 301C, it is determined whether or not the second reel origin detection sensors 309c and 309d detect the slits 322a and 322b, respectively, and when the operation target reel is the third reel 301R. It is determined whether or not the third reel origin detection sensors 309e and 309f detect the slits 322a and 322b.

  If it is not located at the origin position (initial position) (S104; N), the process proceeds to S105, and 0 is set to the non-detection operation number counter for counting the number of executions of non-detection operation control ( S105). Then, the effect control CPU causes the corresponding motor drive circuit to drive the reel stepping motor corresponding to the operation target reel (for example, the first reel stepping motor 307L if the operation target reel is the reel 301L). By changing the output state of the forward / reverse rotation signal, the output control signal, the A phase output setting signal, the B phase output setting signal, etc. It is set to the lowest speed (see FIGS. 26 and 27) in (long initialization operation control) (S106).

  Then, the effect control CPU starts the operation (rotation) toward the origin position of the operation target reel by outputting the above-mentioned output control signal and the like to the motor drive circuit (S107), and does not detect it. The timer count of the hour operation period timer is started (S108). The timer count of the non-detection operation period timer may be performed, for example, by counting the number of signals output from the CTC initialized in the first initialization process at regular intervals. .

  Then, a transition is made to a monitoring state for monitoring whether or not the two origin detection sensors are in the detection state and whether or not the non-detection operation period timer has a value corresponding to the upper limit time (S109, S110).

  When the reel stepping motor of the operation target reel is driven in the origin position direction to position the operation target reel at the origin position (initial position) and the two origin detection sensors are in the detection state (S109; Y), The effect control CPU stops the drive of the reel stepping motor corresponding to the operation target reel by changing the output status of the signal output to the motor drive circuit such as the output control signal, and proceeds to S130. At this time, as shown in FIG. 26, in the motor drive circuit (electrical angle monitoring circuit 403) that drives the reel stepping motor corresponding to the operation target reel, the operation target reel is positioned at the origin position (initial position). Based on this, the output of the electrical angle signal is started at Low. On the other hand, when the non-detection operation period timer reaches a value corresponding to the upper limit time, that is, when the operation target reel is not located at the origin position (initial position) even after the upper limit time has elapsed (S110; Y). In step S112, 1 is added to the non-detection operation number counter (S112), and the value of the non-detection operation number counter after the addition reaches the operation error determination number (for example, 3). It is determined whether or not (S113).

  When the value of the non-detection operation number counter reaches the operation error determination number in S113 (S113: Y), the effect control CPU outputs the signal output to the motor drive circuit such as the output control signal. By changing the situation, the driving of the reel stepping motor corresponding to the operation target reel is stopped, the origin return error of the operation target reel is stored (S114), and the process proceeds to S130. That is, when the operation target reel is not located at the origin position (initial position) in the non-detection operation control, the actual operation confirmation operation control to be described later is not executed for the operation target reel (the operation target The origin return error is stored to set the reel to the dead end state, and the process proceeds to S130.

  In this embodiment, when the value of the non-detection operation number counter reaches the operation error determination number in S113, the reel to be operated is in the dead end state, but the present invention is not limited to this. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the value of the non-detection operation count counter reaches the operation error determination count in S113, the error processing is started and the second initialization processing is executed by executing the error processing. By being interrupted, the effect control main process may be interrupted without proceeding to S52, and the effect control board 80 (effect control CPU) may be in a non-starting state (dead end state).

  Also, when the operation target reel is in a dead end state, the effect control board 80 (CPU for effect control etc.) is activated, but, for example, the effect control CPU displays variable display of special symbols from the game control microcomputer 156. It is preferable to execute processing such that the reels 301L, 301C, and 301R are not operated (rotated) even when the signal indicating the start is received.

  On the other hand, when the value of the non-detection operation number counter does not reach the number of operation error determinations, the output status of the signal output to the motor drive circuit such as the output control signal is changed to correspond to the operation target reel. Stop the driving of the reel stepping motor, return to S106, and perform the processing of S106 to S108 again to set the target reel of the operation target reel at the lowest speed in the operation control for actual operation confirmation (long initialization operation control). The operation of rotating toward the position (operation control during non-detection) is started, and the state shifts to the monitoring state of S109 and S110 described above.

  Therefore, even if it is determined in S110 that the error determination time has elapsed, the operation (non-detection operation control) of rotating the reel to be repeatedly operated toward the origin position (initial position) until the operation error determination count is reached. If the operation target reel is detected at the origin position (initial position) during the execution, the process proceeds to S130 without proceeding to S114.

  On the other hand, if it is determined to be "Y" in S104 and the process proceeds to S120, after setting the detection operation count counter to 0, the detection operation process data is set (S121a), and the detection operation process timer is set. The timer count of is started (S121b). The timer count of the detection time operation process timer is the same as the timer count of the non-detection time operation period timer described above, and includes the signal output from the CTC initialized in the first initialization process at regular intervals. It may be performed by counting the number. Further, in the detection operation process data of the present embodiment, the minimum speed (FIG. 26, FIG. 27) in the actual operation confirmation operation control (long initialization operation control) described later is set as the control speed for operating the operation target reel. The minimum control speed for operating the target reel at the same operation speed as the reference speed is described (set).

  Next, the effect control CPU causes the corresponding motor drive circuit to drive the reel stepping motor corresponding to the operation target reel (for example, the first reel stepping motor 307L if the operation target reel is the reel 301L). By changing the output state of the forward / reverse rotation signal, output control signal, A-phase output setting signal, B-phase output setting signal, etc. The lowest speed (see FIG. 26, FIG. 27) in (long initialization operation control) is set, and the operation target reel is operated (rotated) (S122).

  Next, the effect control CPU determines whether or not the process data has been completed (S123). If the process data has not been completed, the process returns to S122, and the operation target reel is set to the detection-time operation process data. It operates based on the minimum control speed.

  As described above, in the detection operation control, the minimum speed based on the minimum control speed set in the detection operation process data, that is, the operation control for actual operation confirmation (long initial operation) is performed until the detection operation process data is completed. The operation of rotating (revolving) the reel to be operated from the origin position (initial position) at the lowest speed in the activating operation control), and returning it from the origin position (initial position) to the origin position (initial position). (See FIG. 26). The position away from the origin position is a position in the vicinity of the origin position, that is, a position where the detected portions (slits 322a, 322b) of each reel stepping motor cannot be detected by each origin detection sensor.

  In the determination of S123, when it is determined that the set operation process data at the time of detection is completed, the output status of the signal output to the motor drive circuit such as the output control signal is changed to change the output target signal to the operation target reel. The drive of the corresponding reel stepping motor is stopped, and the process proceeds to S124 to determine whether or not the two origin detection sensors are in the detection state, that is, whether or not the operation target reel is located at the origin position (initial position). Is determined (confirmed).

  If the two origin detection sensors are in the detection state, that is, if the operation target reel is located at the origin position (initial position), the process proceeds to S130. At this time, as shown in FIG. 26, in the motor drive circuit (electrical angle monitoring circuit 403) that drives the reel stepping motor corresponding to the operation target reel, the operation target reel is positioned at the origin position (initial position). Based on this, the output of the electrical angle signal is started at Low.

  On the other hand, when the origin detection sensor is not in the detection state, that is, when the operation target reel is not located at the origin position (initial position), 1 is added to the detection time operation number counter (S126), It is determined whether or not the value of the detection operation number counter after the addition has reached the operation error determination number (for example, 3) (S127). When the value of the detection operation number counter reaches the operation error determination number, the process proceeds to S128, the origin return error of the operation target reel is stored (S128), and the process proceeds to S130. That is, when the operation target reel is not located at the origin position (initial position) in the operation control during detection, the actual operation confirmation operation control described below is not executed for the operation target reel (the operation target combination). The origin return error is stored in order to put the object in a dead end state), and the process proceeds to S130.

  In the present embodiment, when the value of the detection operation number counter reaches the operation error determination number in S127, the operation target accessory is put into the dead end state, but the present invention is not limited to this. However, the present invention is not limited to this. When the value of the operation count counter during detection reaches the operation error determination count in S113, error processing is started and the second initialization processing is interrupted by executing the error processing. By doing so, the effect control main process may be interrupted without proceeding to S52, and the effect control board 80 may be brought into a state where it is not activated (dead end state).

  Also, when the operation target reel is in a dead end state, the effect control board 80 (CPU for effect control etc.) is activated, but, for example, the effect control CPU displays variable display of special symbols from the game control microcomputer 156. It is preferable to execute processing such that the reels 301L, 301C, and 301R are not operated (rotated) even when the signal indicating the start is received.

  In S130, which is executed when it is determined as "N" in S102, when determined as "Y" in S109, or when determined as "Y" in S124, the operation target of the reels 301C and 301R is not yet reached. It is determined whether or not there are remaining reels that have not been processed. If there are no remaining reels to be operated, the process proceeds to the process (process after S200) for performing the operation control for actual operation confirmation shown in FIG. On the other hand, if there are remaining operation target reels, the process proceeds to S131, the reel to be operated next is specified, and then the process returns to S102, and the specified reel (operation target reel) is described above after S102. The process is executed similarly.

  Next, the process shown in FIG. 25 will be described. In S200 shown in FIG. 25, the effect control CPU first identifies the reel (confirmation target reel) to be first confirmed for operation based on the setting data, as in S101 described above. (S200). Next, it is determined whether or not the origin return error of the confirmation target reel is stored (S201).

  When the origin return error of the confirmation target reel is stored, the process proceeds to S220 without executing the processes of S202a to S213. By doing so, in the present embodiment, the actual operation confirmation operation control is not performed for the reels 301L, 301C, and 301R that are determined to be the origin return error in these non-detection operation control and detection operation control. It has become.

  On the other hand, if the origin return error of the confirmation target reel is not stored, the process proceeds to S202a to set the actual operation confirmation process data corresponding to the confirmation target reel. That is, if the confirmation target reel is the reel 301L, the actual operation confirmation process data of the reel 301L is set, and if the confirmation target reel is the reel 301C, the actual operation confirmation process data of the reel 301C is set and the confirmation target reel is set. If the reel is the reel 301R, the process data for confirming the actual operation of the reel 301R is set. In each actual operation confirmation process data, the control speed and the like are described (set) so that the reels 301L, 301C, and 301R perform the same operation as the actual operation as a variation display of the effect symbol. .

  Then, the actual operation confirmation process timer starts counting (S202b). The timer count of the process timer for confirming the actual operation is the signal output from the CTC initialized in the first initialization process at regular intervals, like the timer count of the non-detection operation period timer described above. It may be performed by counting the number of.

  Then, the effect control CPU, via the serial signal circuit 89, forward / reverse rotation signals, output control signals, A-phase output setting signals, B-phase output setting signals, etc. for the motor drive circuit corresponding to the confirmation target reel. By changing the output state of the confirmation target reel, the confirmation target reel is operated at the control speed set corresponding to the timer count value of the actual operation confirmation process timer in the set actual operation confirmation process data (S203). ), It is determined whether or not the process data is completed (S204), and if the process data is not completed, the process returns to S203, and the reel to be confirmed is the timer count value of the actual operation confirmation process timer at that time. Operates based on the control speed that is set for.

  In this way, until the actual operation confirmation process data is completed, the confirmation target reel is operated at the control speed set in the actual operation confirmation process data corresponding to the timer count value of the actual operation confirmation process timer. As a result, the control speed of the confirmation target reel is sequentially changed in time series, and the same acceleration or deceleration as the control speed set when the reels 301L, 301C, and 301R are actually operated during the variable display of the effect symbols. It can be performed.

  Then, in the determination of S204, when it is determined that the set process data for confirming the actual operation is completed, the effect control CPU causes the motor drive circuit such as the output control signal via the serial signal circuit 89. By changing the output status of the signal being output, the drive of the reel stepping motor corresponding to the confirmation target reel is stopped, and it is determined whether or not the two origin detection sensors are in the detection state. It is determined (confirmed) whether or not it is located at the position (initial position) (S205).

  If the two origin detection sensors are in the detection state, that is, if the confirmation target reel is located at the origin position (initial position), the process proceeds to S220. At this time, as shown in FIG. 26, in the motor drive circuit (electrical angle monitoring circuit 403) that drives the reel stepping motor corresponding to the operation target reel, the operation target reel is positioned at the origin position (initial position). Based on this, the output of the electrical angle signal is started at Low. On the other hand, when the two origin detection sensors are not in the detection state, that is, when the reel to be checked is not located at the origin position (initial position), the non-detection operation control described above is performed (see FIG. 26). And the processing of S206 to S213 is performed in order to position the confirmation target reel object at the origin position (initial position).

  Specifically, after setting a non-detection operation number counter for counting the number of executions of non-detection operation control to 0 (S206), a reel stepping motor corresponding to the confirmation target reel (for example, the confirmation target reel is In the case of the reel 301L, in order to drive the first reel stepping motor 307L), a forward / reverse rotation signal, an output control signal, an A phase output setting signal, a B phase output setting signal, etc. are sent to the corresponding motor drive circuit 85. The control speed for operating the reel to be checked by outputting the signal of No. 2 through the serial signal circuit 89 is the minimum speed in the actual operation check operation control (long initialization operation control) (see FIGS. 26 and 27). And the reel to be checked is operated (rotated) toward the origin position (S208). Further, the count of the non-detection operation period timer is started (S209).

  Then, a transition is made to a monitoring state for monitoring whether or not the two origin detection sensors are in the detection state and whether or not the non-detection operation period timer has a value corresponding to the upper limit time (S210, S211).

  If the two origin detection sensors are in the detection state, that is, if the confirmation target reel is located at the origin position (initial position), the process proceeds to S220. On the other hand, when the origin detection sensor is not in the detection state, that is, when the reel to be confirmed is not located at the origin position (initial position), the non-detection operation control described above (see FIG. 26) is performed. In order to position the confirmation target reel at the origin position (initial position), the processing of S206 to S213 is performed.

  Specifically, after setting 0 in the non-detection operation number counter for counting the number of executions of non-detection operation control (S206), the reel stepping motor (for example, the operation target reel In the case of the reel 301L, in order to drive the first reel stepping motor 307L), a forward / reverse rotation signal, an output control signal, an A-phase output is output to the corresponding motor drive circuit 85 via the serial signal circuit 89. By changing the output state of the setting signal, the B-phase output setting signal, etc., the control speed for operating the target reel is set to the minimum speed in the actual operation confirmation operation control (long initialization operation control) described later (FIG. 26, 27 (see FIG. 27) (S207).

  Then, the effect control CPU starts the operation (rotation) toward the origin position of the confirmation target reel by outputting the above-described output control signal and the like to the motor drive circuit via the serial signal circuit 89. At the same time (S208), the timer count of the non-detection operation period timer is started (S209). The timer count of the non-detection operation period timer may be performed, for example, by counting the number of signals output from the CTC initialized in the first initialization process at regular intervals. .

  Then, a transition is made to a monitoring state for monitoring whether or not the two origin detection sensors are in the detection state and whether or not the non-detection operation period timer has a value corresponding to the upper limit time (S210, S211).

  When the confirmation target reel is positioned at the origin position (initial position) by driving the confirmation target reel toward the origin position (initial position) and the two origin detection sensors are in the detection state, in S210, “ It is determined to be "Y" and the process proceeds to S220. On the other hand, if the non-detection operation period timer reaches a value corresponding to the upper limit time, that is, if the confirmation target reel is not located at the origin position (initial position) even after the upper limit time elapses, the process proceeds to S212. Then, 1 is added to the non-detection operation number counter (S212), and it is determined whether or not the value of the non-detection operation number counter after the addition has reached the operation error determination number (for example, 3). (S213).

  When the value of the non-detection operation number counter reaches the operation error determination number, the process proceeds to S220. In this embodiment, when the value of the non-detection operation number counter reaches the operation error determination number in S213, the operation target accessory is put into the dead end state, but the present invention is not limited to this. However, when the value of the non-detection operation number counter reaches the operation error determination number in S213, the origin return error of the operation target accessory is stored, and the operation target accessory will be described below. May not execute the actual operation. Alternatively, by starting the error processing and executing the error processing, the second initialization processing is interrupted, the effect control main processing is interrupted without proceeding to S52, and the effect control board 80 is not activated. (Dead end state) may be set.

  Further, when the confirmation target reel is in a dead end state, the effect control board 80 (CPU for effect control or the like) is activated, but, for example, the effect control CPU displays a variable display of a special symbol from the game control microcomputer 156. It is preferable to execute processing such that the reels 301L, 301C, and 301R are not operated (rotated) even when the signal indicating the start is received.

  On the other hand, when the value of the non-detection operation number counter does not reach the number of operation error determinations, the process returns to S207 and the processes of S207, S208, and S209 are performed again, so that the confirmation target reel is confirmed for actual operation confirmation. The operation of moving to the origin position (initial position) at the lowest speed in the operation control (long initialization operation control) (operation upon returning to the origin) is started, and the process shifts to the monitoring state of S210 and S211 described above.

  Therefore, even if it is determined in S211 that the error determination time has elapsed, the operation (non-detection operation control) of repeatedly moving the target accessory to the origin position (initial position) is executed until the number of operation error determinations is reached. If the target accessory is detected at the origin position (initial position) during this, the process proceeds to S220.

  In S220, which is executed when it is determined to be "Y" in S201, "N" in S204a, "Y" in S205, or "Y" in S210. Of the reels 301L, 301C, 301R, there is a remaining reel 301L, 301C, 301R that has not yet been checked for operation confirmation. If there is no remaining reel 301L, 301C, 301R, , The record of the error stored in S114 or S128 is cleared (S222), and the process ends, while if there are remaining reels 301L, 301C, and 301R, the process proceeds to S221 to check the operation next. After identifying the reels 301L, 301C, 301R, the process returns to S201, and the identified reels 301L, 301C, 3 For 1R, executes similarly processing after S201 described above.

  As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the electric angle signals of the reels 301L, 301C, and 301R are executed by executing the second initialization process when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered on. Is moved to the origin position (initial position) output at Low. Then, after each reel 301L, 301C, 301R moves to the origin position (initial position), each reel 301L, 301C, 301R reciprocates (rotates) between the origin position (initial position) and a predetermined position. By doing so, each reel 301L, 301C, 301R is stopped at the origin position (initial position), and the electrical angle signal is output at Low. That is, each reel 301L, 301C, 301R in this embodiment, when the second initialization process is executed by turning on the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1, reel stepping corresponding to each reel 301L, 301RC, 301R Current values of the same strength are applied to the A phase and B phase of the motor, and the electrical angle becomes 45 °.

  Here, an operation mode and control contents of the reels 301L, 301C, and 301R by executing the second initialization processing shown in FIGS. 24 and 25 will be described with reference to FIGS. 26 and 27. FIG. 26 is a schematic explanatory diagram showing operation modes of non-detection operation control, detection operation operation control, and actual operation confirmation operation control performed by the effect control CPU. 27A is an explanatory diagram showing the control speed in the actual operation confirmation operation control, FIG. 27B is an explanatory view showing the control speed in the detection-time operation control, and FIG. 27C is a control speed in the non-detection-time operation control. FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 26, the reels 301L, 301C, and 301R are reciprocally provided between an origin position (initial position) and a predetermined position rotated from the origin position (initial position) by a predetermined amount. The forward operation from the origin position to the predetermined position and the returning operation from the predetermined position to the origin position are actual operations that are actually performed as variable display of effect symbols.

  If the two origin detection sensors are not in the detection state when the second initialization process is executed, that is, the reels 301L, 301C, and 301R have some reason (for example, the origin at the time of transportation or installation on the game island). If it has been moved from the position, or if the origin could not be returned during the previous operation (for example, during execution of the production, it is possible to confirm the origin return of the reels 301L, 301C, 301R due to step-out, failure, catching, etc. of the motor. If there is a role object error (abnormal operation) such as not working or unable to operate, etc.), or if it moves from the origin position due to vibration of the gaming machine, etc.) Executes non-detection operation control. When this non-detection operation control is executed, since each reel 301L, 301C, 301R is located at a position away from the origin position, the only operation is to move each reel 301L, 301C, 301R in the origin position direction. ing.

  Further, the effect control CPU executes the detection operation control when the two origin detection sensors are in the detection state when the second initialization process is executed.

  For example, the slits 322a and 322b formed on the rotating plate 322 of each reel stepping motor 307L, 307C, and 307R have two origin detection sensors (first reel origin detection sensors 309a and 309b, second reel origin detection sensors 309c and 309d). , The operation of each reel 301L, 301C, 301R in the direction of the origin position from the time when the slits 322a, 322b are detected by the two origin detection sensors so as to be reliably detected by the third reel origin detection sensors 309e, 309f). When a predetermined operable range (for example, play) is set before is regulated, the position is deviated from the position (origin position) detected by the two origin detection sensors after returning to the origin. May stop at. Therefore, even when the slits 322a and 322b are detected by the two origin detection sensors, the detection-time operation control for returning the reels 301L, 301C, and 301R to the more accurate origin position is performed.

  This detection time operation control is performed by rotating each reel 301L, 301C, 301R from the origin position toward a predetermined position and then returning to the origin position in order to temporarily release the detection state of the slits 322a, 322b by the two origin detection sensors. Since it is necessary to move the reels 301L, 301C, and 301R to the predetermined position, the reels 301L, 301C, and 301R are moved from the origin position to the detection operation position near the origin position and then returned to the origin position. That is, the reciprocating operation is performed at a shorter distance than the actual operation.

  In addition, the effect control CPU executes the actual operation confirmation operation control after executing the non-detection operation control or the detection operation control in the second initialization processing. The operation control for actual operation confirmation is the same operation as the actual operation actually performed by the reels 301L, 301C, and 301R as the variable display of the effect symbols.

  Next, the control speeds set when the effect control CPU executes the non-detection operation control, the detection operation control, and the actual operation confirmation operation control will be compared. The speeds shown in FIGS. 27A, 27B, and 27C are control speeds set by the effect control CPU to operate the reels 301L, 301C, and 301R. The actual operating speed of each reel 301L, 301C, 301R is different. That is, for example, in the case of operating a predetermined reel, even when the same control speed is set in one movement section and another movement section between the origin position and the predetermined position, one movement section and another movement are set. The operation speed when each reel 301L, 301C, 301R is actually operated in the case where the mode is different depending on the section or when the reels 301L, 301C, 301R are rotated in the normal direction and the reverse direction even in the same movement section May be different from the control speed. Even if the same control speed is set for each reel 301L, 301C, 301R, if the reels 301L, 301C, 301R are different in size, weight, operating mode, operating distance, drive mechanism, etc. The actual operating speeds of the reels 301L, 301C, and 301R are not necessarily the same. When operating a plurality of reels 301L, 301C, 301R by reel stepping motors having the same performance, even if the same control speed is set for each reel 301L, 301C, 301R, the size of each reel 301L, 301C, 301R However, if there are differences in weight, operation mode, operation distance, drive mechanism, etc., the actual operation speeds of the reels 301L, 301C, and 301R are not necessarily the same.

  As shown in FIG. 27A, when the effect control CPU executes the actual operation check operation control, the effect control CPU corresponds to the timer count value of the actual operation check process timer in the set actual operation check process data. The confirmation target reel is operated based on the set control speed. Specifically, control is performed to accelerate from the origin position and then decelerate and stop at a predetermined position, and to accelerate from the origin position and then decelerate and stop at the origin position. That is, in the actual operation confirmation operation control for confirming that each reel 301L, 301C, 301R can operate normally, the control speed of each reel 301L, 301C, 301R is between the origin position and the predetermined position. Change in the order of low speed → high speed → low speed. In other words, when the reels 301L, 301C, and 301R are rotated as variable display of the effect symbols, the effect control CPU causes the lowest speed (low speed) that is the first speed and the highest speed as the second speed that is faster than the lowest speed. Since the reels 301L, 301C, and 301R are controlled to operate at speeds within the range of (high speed), even when the actual operation confirmation operation control is executed, the first speed is the minimum speed (low speed). The reels 301L, 301C, and 301R are controlled to operate at a speed within the range of the maximum speed (high speed) as the second speed higher than the minimum speed.

  That is, the minimum speed as the first speed and the maximum speed as the second speed are the actual operating speeds of the reels 301L, 301C, and 301R, and are set to the minimum speed and the maximum speed as the operating speeds. The control speed will be set. In the following, when each reel 301L, 301C, 301R is operated based on the lowest control speed, it operates at the lowest speed, and when each reel 301L, 301C, 301R is operated based on the highest control speed. Will operate at maximum speed.

  Here, the control speed is set so that the operation speed of each of the reels 301L, 301C, and 301R during acceleration and deceleration becomes the minimum speed in the actual operation confirmation operation control. Further, when returning to the origin position after moving to a predetermined position, by controlling the speed to be the lowest speed in the actual operation confirmation operation control for a longer time than when stopping at the predetermined position, each reel 301L, The slits 322a and 322b are detected by the two origin detection sensors after surely decelerating 301C and 301R.

  As shown in FIG. 27B, when performing the detection operation control, the effect control CPU always confirms the actual operation during the period from the origin position to the predetermined position and the period from the predetermined position to the origin position. The reels 301L, 301C, and 301R are controlled to operate at the lowest speed (first speed) in the operation control for use. That is, the effect control CPU causes the maximum speed in the detection-time operation control as the first operation control to be equal to or lower than the minimum speed in the actual operation confirmation operation control as the second operation control (in the present embodiment, the actual operation confirmation is performed). Control for operating each reel 301L, 301C, 301R based on the lowest minimum control speed among the control speeds set in the actual operation confirmation operation control, so that the same speed as the minimum speed in the operation control I do.

  Further, in the detection operation control, since the operation distance of each reel 301L, 301C, 301R is shorter than that in the actual operation confirmation operation control, the operation speed at the time of acceleration in the actual operation confirmation operation control, that is, the operation speed is high. If this is done, the slits 322a and 322b may not be reliably detected by the two origin detection sensors, so control is performed so that the slits 322a and 322b operate at the lowest speed in the actual operation confirmation operation control.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 27C, when performing the non-detection operation control, the effect control CPU always moves from an arbitrary position between the origin position and a predetermined position to the origin position. It is controlled so that it operates at the lowest speed (first speed) in the actual operation confirmation operation control. In other words, the effect control CPU causes the maximum speed (maximum operation speed) in the non-detection operation control as the first operation control to be equal to or lower than the minimum speed in the actual operation confirmation operation control as the second operation control (this embodiment). In the example, each reel 301L, 301C is always based on the lowest minimum control speed among the control speeds set in the actual operation confirmation operation control so that the reels 301L and 301C have the same speed as the minimum speed in the actual operation confirmation operation control). , 301R is operated.

  In this case, since it is unknown how far each reel 301L, 301C, 301R is from the origin position, it is not possible to confirm the actual operation when each reel 301L, 301C, 301R is located near the origin position. If the reels 301L, 301C, and 301R are returned to their original positions, the slits 322a and 322b may not be reliably detected when the reels 301L, 301C, and 301R are returned to their original positions if they are operated at the control speed at the time of acceleration in the operation control. Therefore, it is controlled to operate at the lowest speed in the operation control for actual operation confirmation.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when performing the non-detection time operation control or the detection time operation control as the first operation control, the effect control CPU sets the minimum control speed set in the actual operation confirmation operation control. Based on the control, the reels 301L, 301C, and 301R are controlled so that they always operate at a single (constant) operation speed.
In this embodiment, the non-detection operation control, the detection operation operation control, and the actual operation confirmation operation control are executed when the power is turned on. When the confirmation operation control is being executed, that is, when the start prize is generated during the non-detection operation, the detection operation, or the actual operation confirmation operation, the variable display is based on the occurrence of the start prize. The command for instructing the start of is sent from the main board 31 to the effect control board 80. During the non-detection operation, the detection operation, and the actual operation confirmation operation, the first reel stepping motor 307L, When the variable display operation is started while the 2-reel stepping motor 307C and the third reel stepping motor 307R are operating, the first reel stepping motor 3 7L, the second reel stepping motor 307C, the third reel stepping motor 307R step out, the reels 301L, 301C, 301R will stop due to an unintended combination of symbols, and the stop display of the lost symbols will stop the jackpot symbols. When the first reel stepping motor 307L, the second reel stepping motor 307C, and the third reel stepping motor 307R are already operating in this way, an operation different from the operation may be performed. When the command to be sent is transmitted from the main board 31, the command is ignored and the operation already in operation is continued, or the operation control corresponding to the command is reserved and is already being executed. Timing at which the operation can be changed, for example, the first reel stepping motor 307L, the second reel Stepping motors 307C, when the third reel stepping motor 307R is in a state of being stopped, may be started to hold and have operational control. That is, when the first reel stepping motor 307L, the second reel stepping motor 307C, and the third reel stepping motor 307R, which are the driving means, are operating and the excitation mode, the step rate, etc. cannot be changed. When the command instructing the operation change accompanied by these changes is received from the main board 31, the effect control board 80 ignores or reserves these commands and continues the operation that is already operating. However, in the case of ignoring these commands or retaining the operation control corresponding to the commands, in addition to the first reel stepping motor 307L, the second reel stepping motor 307C, and the third reel stepping motor 307R, a variable display of special symbols When a display device of a special symbol (for example, a so-called fourth symbol or the like) indicating that is being executed is provided, variable display of these special symbols is not ignored or reserved, and a command is received. The special symbols may be variably displayed accordingly.

  FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing the effect control process process (S56) in the effect control main process. In the effect control process processing, the effect control CPU first updates the hold storage display in the first hold storage display section 9a and the second hold storage display section 9b to a display according to the storage content of the effect control buffer setting section. Suspended display update processing is executed (S72).

  After that, the effect control CPU performs any one of S73 to S79 according to the value of the effect control process flag. In each process, the following process is executed.

  Variation pattern designation command reception waiting process (S73): It is confirmed whether or not a command (variation pattern designation command) capable of specifying a variation pattern is received from the main board 31. Specifically, it is confirmed in the command analysis process whether or not the variation pattern designation command is received. If the variation pattern designation command is received, the value of the effect control process flag is changed to the value corresponding to the effect symbol variation start processing (S74).

  Production symbol variation start processing (S74): control is performed so that variation of the production symbol (rotation of each reel 301L, 301C, 301R) is started. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect during the process of changing the effect symbol (S75).

  Processing during production symbol variation (S75): While controlling the rotation of each reel 301L, 301C, 301R, the end of the variation time is monitored. Then, when the variation time ends, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the effect symbol variation stop processing (S76).

  Production symbol fluctuation stop process (S76): Based on the reception of the production control command (symbol confirmation command) for instructing the stop of all reels 301L, 301C, 301R, the variation of the production symbol (each reel 301L, 301C, 301R Rotation) is stopped and the display result (stop pattern) is derived and displayed. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the big hit display process (S77) or the variation pattern designation command reception waiting process (S73).

  Big hit display processing (S77): After the variation time ends, control is performed to display a screen for notifying the occurrence of big hit on the effect display device 9. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the big hit game process (S78).

  Big hit game processing (S78): The big hit game is controlled. For example, a special winning prize opening device designation command that can specify that the special variable winning ball device 20 is open or a special winning prize opening device designation command that can specify that the special variable winning ball device 20 is closed are received. Then, the display control of the number of rounds in the effect display device 9 is performed. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the big hit ending effect process (S79).

  Big hit end production process (S79): In the production display device 9, display control is performed to notify the player that the big hit game state has ended. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the variation pattern designation command reception waiting process (S73).

  FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing the effect of the effect of changing the effect design (S75) in the effect control process. In the effect symbol variation process, the effect control CPU decrements the values of the process timer and the variation time timer by -1 (S301, S302).

  Then, the effect control CPU confirms whether or not the process timer has timed out (S303). If the process timer has timed out, the process data is switched (S304), and the process timer setting value set next in the process table is set in the process timer to restart the process timer (S305). , The control of the production device (production parts) is executed according to the contents of the process data (LED control execution data, sound control execution data, operation unit control data, etc.) corresponding to the process timer (S307), and further corresponds to the process timer. In accordance with the contents of the process data (reel control execution data), reel variation processing 1 for performing variation control of the reel 301L, reel variation processing 2 for performing variation control of the reel 301C, and reel variation processing 3 for performing variation control of the reel 301R are executed ( S308-S310). On the other hand, if the process timer has not timed out, the process proceeds to S307, the effect device control is executed (S307), and the reel variation processes 1 to 3 are executed (S308 to S310).

  In the processing of S308 to S310 in the present embodiment, by setting an excitation pattern to be described later based on the reel control execution data, the output interval of the control clock signal to the motor drive circuits 85 to 87 is changed and the normal rotation. By changing the output state of the reverse rotation signal, it is possible to execute control for changing the rotation speed and the rotation direction of each reel stepping motor 307L, 307C, 307R. In the actual operation confirmation operation control based on the actual operation confirmation process data and the detection-time operation control, the speed control is executed based on the reel control execution data as in the reel variation processing based on the process data.

  After the reel change processes 1 to 3 in S308 to S310, it is confirmed whether or not the change time timer has timed out (S311). If the variation time timer is timer out, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value according to the effect symbol variation stop process (S76), and the effect symbol varying process is ended (S313). Even if the variation time timer has not timed out, if the confirmation command reception flag indicating that the command (designation confirmation designation command) that can specify that the variable display of the effect symbol is finished is received is set (S312; Y), the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value according to the effect symbol variation stop process (S76), and the effect symbol variation process is ended (S313). Even if the fluctuation time timer has not timed out, it shifts to control to stop fluctuations when it receives a symbol confirmation designation command, so, for example, a fluctuation pattern designation command indicating a long fluctuation time due to noise between boards Even when it is received, it is possible to end the variation of the effect symbol when the regular variation time has elapsed (when the variation of the special symbol ends).

  In the process table used for the effect pattern variation control (rotation of each reel 301L, 301C, 301R), process data during rotation of the reels 301L, 301C, 301R is set. That is, the sum of the process timer set values of the process data 1 to n in the process table corresponds to the rotation time (variation time) of the performance reels 301L, 301C, 301R. Therefore, when the process timer of the last process data n has timed out in the process of S304, there is no process data to be switched (reel control execution data, LED control execution data, etc.), and effect control of effect symbols based on the process table (each) The fluctuation control of the reels 301L, 301C, 301R) ends.

  30 to 32 are flowcharts showing the reel variation process 1 (S308) in the symbol variation process. In the reel change process 2 (S309) and the reel change process 3 (S310), the same process is performed except that the target reel is different. Further, hereinafter, the reels 301L, 301C, and 301R may be simply referred to as reels, the reel stepping motors 307L, 307C, and 307R may be simply referred to as reel stepping motors, and the reel origin detection sensors 309a-f may be simply referred to as reel origins. It may be called a detection sensor, and the motor drive circuits 85 to 87 may be simply called a motor drive circuit.

  In the reel variation process 1, the effect control CPU determines whether or not the corresponding reel is stopped (S401). Whether or not the corresponding reel is stopped is determined by whether or not "stop" is set as the status flag indicating the reel variation control status of the corresponding reel. Which state is the state flag set to have each value corresponding to each state (“origin check 1”, “origin check 2”, “origin check 3” ... “stop”) described later? It is state specifying data that can specify

  When it is determined in S401 that the corresponding reel is stopped, the process data (reel control execution data) is referred to and it is determined whether it is the rotation start time of the corresponding reel (S402), and the rotation of the corresponding reel is started. If it is not time, the process returns to the process during symbol fluctuation.

  When it is determined in S401 that the corresponding reel is not stopped, the value of the step rate counter for measuring the step rate of the corresponding reel stepping motor is decremented by 1 (S411), and whether the value of the step rate counter is 0 or not. That is, it is determined whether or not the period corresponding to the step rate has elapsed (S412), and if the value of the step rate counter is not 0, the process returns to the symbol changing process.

  If the step rate counter is 0 in S412, the control clock signal is output to the corresponding motor drive circuit via the serial signal circuit 89 (S413). Along with this, steps proceed in the motor drive circuit.

  Next, the value of the excitation pattern switching counter for measuring the period until the excitation pattern is switched is decremented by 1 (S414), and it is determined whether the value of the excitation pattern switching counter is 0, that is, whether the excitation pattern switching timing is reached. (S415), if the value of the excitation pattern switching counter is not 0, the process proceeds to S434.

  If it is determined in S402 that it is the rotation start timing of the corresponding reel, or if it is determined in S415 that the value of the excitation pattern switching counter is 0, the process data (reel control execution data) is referred to, and The excitation pattern to be applied at the timing is set (S416), the total number of steps of the set excitation pattern is set in the excitation pattern switching counter (S417), and the step counter for counting the number of steps after the excitation pattern is changed is initialized. And sets 0 (S418).

  The excitation pattern is data in which the content of excitation of the reel stepping motor is set according to the reel fluctuation state, and as shown in FIG. 33, the excitation mode and step rate applied for each number of steps are set. .

  The excitation pattern includes an excitation pattern for rotating at a constant speed, an excitation pattern for accelerating, and an excitation pattern for decelerating. The excitation pattern for rotating at a constant speed includes excitation patterns of different excitation modes, and by using the excitation patterns of different excitation modes, different rotation speeds can be controlled. Further, even if the excitation patterns are the same, the excitation patterns having different step rates are included, and by using the excitation patterns having different step rates, it is possible to control the rotation speeds to be different even if the excitation modes are the same. The excitation pattern for accelerating is the excitation pattern for shifting from the stopped state to the constant-speed rotation excitation pattern or the excitation pattern for shifting the slow-speed excitation pattern to the high-speed excitation pattern, and decelerating. Is an excitation pattern for shifting from an excitation pattern having a high rotation speed to an excitation pattern having a low rotation speed. The excitation pattern used for these accelerations or decelerations is the excitation pattern before the change when the rotation is started or the excitation pattern is changed by changing the rotation speed by gradually changing the step rate. Is an excitation pattern for smoothly shifting from to the changed excitation pattern. The excitation pattern used for acceleration or deceleration includes a plurality of excitation patterns according to the difference in speed before and after the change and the difference in excitation mode.

  In this embodiment, the excitation mode applied to one excitation pattern is always the same, and the excitation mode is changed only at the timing when the excitation pattern is changed, but it is applied to one excitation pattern. The reels may be accelerated or decelerated by switching a plurality of excitation modes as the excitation mode.

  Then, it is determined whether or not the acceleration or deceleration changes to the constant speed due to the change of the excitation pattern (S419), and if the acceleration or deceleration changes to the constant speed, the state flag is changed to "standby" (S420). ), The number of standby steps is set (S421), and the process proceeds to S431.

  The number of standby steps is a value for measuring the standby period until the rotation of the reel stabilizes after acceleration or deceleration, and it includes the excitation mode before and after the change, the magnitude of the speed change, and whether it is acceleration or deceleration. Accordingly, the period required until the rotation of the reel stabilizes is different, and therefore, in S421, a value that is an optimal period according to the situation of speed change is set as the number of waiting steps from a plurality of periods.

  When the acceleration or deceleration does not change to the constant speed in S419, it is determined whether the stop or constant speed has changed to the acceleration or deceleration due to the change of the excitation pattern (S422), and the stop or the constant speed accelerates or If it has not changed to deceleration, the process proceeds to S431, and if it has changed from stop or constant speed to acceleration or deceleration, the state flag is changed to "acceleration" or "deceleration" (S423), and the process proceeds to S431.

  In S431, the excitation mode according to the changed excitation pattern is set, and it is determined whether the excitation mode has been changed by changing the excitation pattern (S432). If the excitation mode has not been changed, the process proceeds to S434. If the excitation mode has been changed, the excitation mode changing process (see FIG. 10) is executed (S433), the excitation mode setting of the corresponding reel stepping motor is changed, and the process proceeds to S434.

  In S434, the value of the step counter of the corresponding reel is incremented by 1, the step rate corresponding to the step counter value in the current excitation pattern is set in the step rate counter (S435), and the process proceeds to S441.

  In S441, it is determined whether the corresponding reel is accelerating or decelerating by referring to the state flag, and if it is accelerating or decelerating, the process returns to the effect symbol changing process, and if it is not accelerating or decelerating, acceleration or It is determined whether or not the vehicle is on standby after the deceleration is changed to the constant speed (S442).

  If it is in standby in S442, the number of standby steps is decremented by 1 (S443), and it is determined whether or not the number of standby steps is 0, that is, whether or not the standby period until the rotation of the reel stabilizes has elapsed (S444). ), If the number of waiting steps is not 0, the process returns to the process during production symbol variation, and if the number of standby steps is 0, the state flag is changed to "origin confirmation 1" (S445) and returns to the process during production symbol variation. To do.

  If it is not in the standby state in S442, it is determined whether or not the state of the corresponding reel is “origin confirmation 1” indicating the origin confirmation start waiting by referring to the state flag (S446). It is determined whether or not the origin position of the corresponding reel is detected by the corresponding reel origin detection sensor (S447). When the origin position of the corresponding reel is detected, the electrical angle signal of the corresponding reel stepping motor is further detected. It is determined whether or not it is Low, that is, whether or not the same phase current is applied to the A phase and the B phase of the corresponding reel stepping motor (S448), and the electrical angle signal of the corresponding reel stepping motor is Low. If so, it is determined that the origin position has passed, and the step number counter that counts the number of steps from the origin position of the corresponding reel is initialized and set to 0. S449), the status flag is changed to "home check 2" indicating that the home check (S451), to return into the performance symbol variation processing.

  If the origin position of the corresponding reel is not detected in S447, and if the electrical angle signal of the corresponding reel stepping motor is not Low in S448, the process returns to the effect symbol variation process.

  If it is not "origin confirmation 1" in S446, it is determined whether or not it is "origin confirmation 2" (S452). If "origin confirmation 2", the step number counter of the corresponding reel is incremented by 1 (S453), It is determined whether or not the origin position of the corresponding reel is detected by the corresponding reel origin detection sensor (S454), and when the origin position of the corresponding reel is detected, the electrical angle signal of the corresponding reel stepping motor is further detected. It is determined whether or not it is Low (S455).

  If the electrical angle signal of the corresponding reel stepping motor is Low in S455, it is determined that the origin position has passed, and the value of the step number counter, that is, the number of steps from the origin position detected in S447 and S448 corresponds to one reel revolution. If the value of the step number counter matches the number of steps for one round of the reel, the status flag is set to "origin confirmation 3" indicating that the origin is being confirmed. The change is made (S458), and the process is returned to the process during effect symbol variation.

  If the electrical angle signal of the corresponding reel stepping motor is not Low in S455, or if the value of the step number counter does not match the step number for one revolution of the reel in S456, that is, if the origin position is shifted, the process proceeds to S445. By changing the status flag to "origin check 1", the origin check is performed again from the beginning.

  When the origin position of the corresponding reel is not detected in S454, the process returns to the effect during the effect of design symbol variation.

  If it is not "origin confirmation 2" in S452, it is determined whether it is "origin confirmation 3" (S459), and if it is "origin confirmation 3", the step number counter of the corresponding reel is incremented by 1 (S460), It is determined whether or not the origin position of the corresponding reel is detected by the corresponding reel origin detection sensor (S461), and when the origin position of the corresponding reel is detected, the electrical angle signal of the corresponding reel stepping motor is further detected. It is determined whether or not it is Low (S467).

  If the electrical angle signal of the corresponding reel stepping motor is Low in S467, it is determined that the origin position has passed, and the value of the step number counter, that is, the number of steps from the origin position detected in S447 and S448 is equivalent to two reel revolutions. Is determined (S468). If the value of the step number counter matches the number of steps for two reels, it is determined that the detection of the origin position is normal and the state flag is set to "fixed". It changes to "speed" (S470), and returns to the effect symbol variation process.

  If the electrical angle signal of the corresponding reel stepping motor is not Low in S467, or if the value of the step number counter does not match the step number for two rounds of the reel in S468, that is, if the origin position is shifted, the process proceeds to S445. By changing the status flag to "origin check 1", the origin check is performed again from the beginning.

  When the origin position of the corresponding reel is not detected in S461, the process returns to the effect during the effect of design effect variation.

  If it is not "origin confirmation 3" in S459, that is, if the corresponding reel is rotating at a constant speed, the step number counter of the corresponding reel is incremented by 1 (S479), and the corresponding reel origin detection sensor detects the corresponding reel. It is determined whether or not the origin position of is detected (S480), and when the origin position of the corresponding reel is not detected, the process is returned to the effect during the production symbol variation.

  When the origin position of the corresponding reel is detected in S480, it is further determined whether or not the electrical angle signal of the corresponding reel stepping motor is Low (S481).

  If the electrical angle signal of the corresponding reel stepping motor is not Low in S481, that is, if the origin position is deviated, the process proceeds to S445, where "origin confirmation 1" is set in the status flag, and origin confirmation is performed again from the beginning. .

  If the electrical angle signal of the corresponding reel stepping motor is Low in S481, it is determined that the origin position has passed, the step number counter of the corresponding reel is initialized and set to 0 (S482), and the corresponding reel stepping motor To the position where the electrical angle is 45 ° (see FIG. 16C), that is, to the position where the same phase current is applied to the A phase and the B phase in the corresponding reel stepping motor (see FIG. 9) It is determined whether or not the electrical angle correction flag indicating that the reel is rotating is set (S483). If the electrical angle correction flag is not set, it is further determined whether or not the stop timing of the corresponding reel has passed (S484).

  When the stop timing of the corresponding reel has passed in S484, the set process data is referred to, and it is determined whether or not the step number counter of the corresponding reel has reached the step number of the stop position (S485). . If the stop timing of the corresponding reel has not elapsed in S484, and if the step number counter of the corresponding reel has not reached the step number of the stop position in S485, the process returns to the effect symbol variation process.

  When the step number counter of the corresponding reel reaches the number of steps at the stop position in S485, whether or not the output state of the electrical angle signal output from the motor drive circuit is Low, that is, the corresponding reel stepping It is determined whether the same phase current is applied to the A phase and the B phase of the motor (S487). If the output state of the electrical angle signal is High in S487, the effect control CPU outputs the electrical angle initialization signal to the corresponding motor drive circuit, thereby causing the motor drive circuit to initially drive the reel stepping motor. The control for driving to the corner is started (S488). Then, the electric angle correction flag of the corresponding reel stepping motor is set (S489), and the process is returned to the process during effect symbol variation.

  When the output state of the electrical angle signal is Low in S487, it is assumed that the same phase currents are applied to the A phase and the B phase of the corresponding reel stepping motor, and the reel stepping motor of the corresponding motor drive circuit is driven. An output control signal for instructing stop is output through the serial signal circuit 89 (S496) to stop the reel stepping motor, and at the same time, output an A-phase output setting signal and a B-phase output setting signal according to the applied phase current. By changing the current value supplied to the corresponding reel stepping motor by outputting the current value for stop (S497), the reel stop control is executed, and the status flag is set to "stop" indicating the reel stop status. The change is made (S499), and the process is returned to the process during effect symbol variation.

  If the electrical angle correction flag is set in S483, it is determined whether or not the output state of the electrical angle signal output from the motor drive circuit is Low (S494). If the output state of the electrical angle signal is High in S494, the process returns to the effect symbol variation process. If the output state of the electrical angle signal is Low in S494, it is determined that the same phase current is applied to the A phase and the B phase of the reel stepping motor, and the corresponding electrical angle correction flag of the reel stepping motor is cleared. (S495), the aforementioned reel stop control (S496, S497) is executed, the state flag is changed to "stop" indicating the stopped state of the reel (S499), and the process is returned to the effect symbol variation process.

  In this way, in the reel changing process, the rotation speed of the reel is changed by changing the current excitation pattern to an excitation pattern with a different excitation mode, an excitation pattern with a different step rate, or an excitation pattern with different excitation modes and step rates. Can be changed. When changing the rotation speed of the reel, for example, as shown in FIG. 34, when changing from the constant speed pattern of speed 1 to the constant speed pattern of speed 2 which is faster than speed 1, the constant speed of 1 is set. The reel stepping motor is controlled based on the acceleration pattern for accelerating the rotation speed between the speed pattern and the constant speed pattern of speed 2. On the other hand, when changing from the constant speed pattern of speed 2 to the constant speed pattern of speed 2 which is slower in rotation speed than speed 2, the rotation speed is set between the constant speed pattern of speed 2 and the constant speed pattern of speed 2. The reel stepping motor is controlled based on the deceleration pattern for deceleration.

  In the reel variation process, the reel origin position is detected based on the detection status of the reel origin detection sensor and the output status of the electrical angle signal from the motor drive circuit, and the reel position is determined by the number of steps counted from the origin position. It is possible to perform the position specifying control that specifies and changes the reel based on the specified position. In the reel changing process, the stop control for stopping the reel at the position specified as the position specifying control is illustrated, but as the position specifying control, for example, the rotation speed is changed when the reel reaches the specified position. You may perform the control which makes the positional relationship with other reels into a specific positional relationship (control which aligns the same symbols on a straight line, etc.).

  Further, when accelerating or decelerating the rotation speed of the reel as described above, the reel cannot follow the change of the step rate and the change of the excitation mode, and the reel position specified by the production control CPU is specified. However, as shown in FIG. 34, in the period in which the acceleration pattern or the deceleration pattern is set as the excitation pattern, that is, in the period in which the reel rotation speed is changed, Does not perform position identification control.

  Further, even after the excitation pattern is changed from the acceleration pattern or the deceleration pattern to the constant speed pattern, that is, even after the period of changing the rotation speed of the reel ends, the rotation speed of the reel is not stable and the effect control CPU Since there is a possibility that the reel position specified by No. and the actual reel position may not match, as shown in FIG. 34, after the excitation pattern is changed from the acceleration pattern or the deceleration pattern to the constant speed pattern. The position specifying control is not performed even during the waiting period and the origin confirmation period.

  The waiting period is a period of waiting for the rotation speed of the reel to stabilize after acceleration or deceleration of the reel, depending on the excitation mode before and after the change, the magnitude of the speed change, and whether acceleration or deceleration. Since the period required until the rotation of the reel stabilizes is different, the reel fluctuation process described above is optimal for a plurality of preset periods (for example, 40, 80, 160, 240 steps) according to the situation of speed change. Different periods are to be selected. Specifically, the excitation mode before the change changes from 8W1-2 phase (microstep) to 4W1-2 phase (microstep), to 8W1-2 phase (microstep) to 2W1-2 (microstep). When changing to a phase or when changing from a 4W1-2 phase (micro step) to a 1-2 phase (full step) than when changing from a W1-2 phase (micro step), that is, the excitation modes before and after the change The larger the change in the number of steps in, the longer the period selected. Further, even if the speed change is not accompanied by the change of the excitation mode, a longer period is selected when the magnitude of the speed change is large, that is, the degree of change of the step rate is large. Further, since a relatively larger amount of force is required for deceleration (stop) than for acceleration, a long period is selected. Therefore, for example, in the case of a large change in the number of steps in the excitation mode before and after the change, a large degree of change in the step rate, and a speed change that is deceleration, the relatively longest period is selected, and conversely, When the change in the number of steps in the excitation mode before and after the change is small (or no change), the degree of change in the step rate is small, and the speed change is the speed increase, the relatively shortest period is selected.

  Regarding the change of the excitation mode, instead of shifting from one excitation mode to all the other excitation modes, an excitation mode that allows stable transition from the excitation mode is set for each excitation mode in advance. In other words, by restricting (prohibiting) the transition to the non-shiftable excitation mode that is not set, it is possible to prevent the standby period from being inappropriately lengthened.

  The origin confirmation period is a period for confirming whether or not the origin position is normally detected. In the reel variation process, steps from when the origin position is detected after the waiting period elapses until the origin position is detected twice. The number is determined to be normal, and control is performed during the origin confirmation period until it is determined that the origin position is normally detected.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the effect control CPU changes the rotation speed of the reel, the rotation speed is changed by using the acceleration pattern or the deceleration pattern as the excitation pattern of the reel stepping motor. During the period when the acceleration pattern or deceleration pattern is set, that is, when the reel rotation speed is being changed, the reel position is specified by the number of steps counted from the origin position, and the reel is changed based on the specified position. The position specifying control is not performed.

  Therefore, when accelerating or decelerating the rotation speed of the reel, the reel cannot follow the change of the step rate and the change of the excitation mode, and the reel position specified by the effect control CPU and the actual reel. However, since the position identification control is not performed during the period in which the rotation speed of the reel is being changed, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest due to a malfunction of the reel.

  That is, in this embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a gaming machine that can be played, and reels 301L, 301C and 301R that are movable bodies that are operably provided, and reels 301L and 301C that are movable bodies, Reel stepping motors 307L, 307C, 307R, which are stepping motors that generate driving force for operating 301R, and control to operate the reels 301L, 301C, 301R by driving the reel stepping motors 307L, 307C, 307R Effect control CPU, which is a control means capable of controlling, and an origin position detection signal, which is detection information capable of specifying whether or not the reels 301L, 301C, and 301R are located at the origin position, which is a predetermined position. Origin detection sensor 3 which is a detection means capable of outputting to the CPU for use 9a to f, the production control CPU can perform control to operate the reels 301L, 301C, and 301R at different speeds of speed 1 and speed 2, and the reels 301L, 301C, and 301R. It is characterized in that the position specifying control, which is the control of the movable body, is performed based on the detection signal of the origin position which is the detection information during the period in which the operation speed is not changed and is controlled by the constant speed pattern. As a result, the reels 301L, 301C, 301R are not controlled based on the detection information during the period in which the operation speed of the reels 301L, 301C, 301R, which are movable bodies, is changed, so that the reels 301L, 301C, 301R malfunction. It is possible to prevent a decrease in interest.

  Further, in this embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine 1 which is a gaming machine capable of playing a game is operated by the reels 301L, 301C and 301R and the reels 301L, 301C and 301R which are movable bodies operably provided. For driving the reel stepping motors 307L, 307C, 307R, which are stepping motors that generate driving force for driving, and a drive control means, which is a drive control means capable of executing drive control of at least a microstep excitation method for the reel stepping motors 307L, 307C, 307R. Circuits 85 to 87, and a production control CPU that is a control unit capable of controlling the operation of the reels 301L, 301C, and 301R by controlling the drive control of the reel stepping motors 307L, 307C, and 307R by the motor drive circuits 85 to 87. , Equipped with a motor drive circuit 5 to 87 are specific information that can specify that the same phase current is applied to the adjacent excitation phases A and B among the plurality of excitation phases of the reel stepping motors 307L, 307C, and 307R. Is output to the effect control CPU, and the effect control CPU can operate the reels 301L, 301C, and 301R at different speeds of speed 1 and speed 2, Position specifying control of the reels 301L, 301C, and 301R is performed based on Low of the electrical angle signal during a period in which the operation speed of the reels 301L, 301C, and 301R is not changed and is controlled by a constant speed pattern. According to this, since the reels 301L, 301C, and 301R are not controlled based on the low of the electrical angle signal during the period in which the operation speed of the reels 301L, 301C, and 301R, which are movable bodies, is changed, the reels 301L, 301L, It is possible to prevent a decrease in interest due to malfunction of 301C and 301R.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the effect control CPU, which is the control means, changes the step rate of the reel stepping motors 307L, 307C, 307R, which are stepping motors, and thereby the operating speed of the reels 301L, 301C, 301R, which are movable bodies. Change. As a result, even if a situation occurs in which the operation of the reels 301L, 301C, 301R cannot follow the change in the step rate of the stepping motor, it is possible to prevent malfunction of the reels 301L, 301C, 301R.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the effect control CPU, which is the control means, changes the excitation mode of the reel stepping motors 307L, 307C, 307R, which are stepping motors, and thereby the operating speed of the reels 301L, 301C, 301R, which are movable bodies. Change. As a result, even if a situation occurs in which the operation of the reels 301L, 301C, and 301R cannot follow the change in the excitation mode of the stepping motor, it is possible to prevent malfunction of the movable body.

  In the present embodiment, the number of steps after the origin position is detected is counted, the reel position is specified according to the count value, and the position specifying control is performed based on the specified reel position. However, even in a configuration in which the number of times the electrical angle signal becomes Low after the origin position is detected, the reel position is specified according to the count value, and the position specifying control is performed based on the specified reel position. Good.

  Further, in the present embodiment, after the excitation pattern is changed from the acceleration pattern or the deceleration pattern to the constant speed pattern, the position specifying control is not performed until the waiting period required for the rotation speed of the reel to stabilize. Therefore, even after the excitation pattern is changed from the acceleration pattern or the deceleration pattern to the constant speed pattern, that is, even after the period in which the reel rotation speed is changed, the reel rotation speed is not stable and Even when the position of the reel specified by the CPU does not match the actual position of the reel, the position specifying control is not performed during that period, so that the malfunction of the reel can be more reliably prevented.

  In other words, in the present embodiment, the effect control CPU, which is the control means, continues even after the period in which the operating speed of the reels 301L, 301C, and 301R, which are movable bodies, is changed and the operating speed becomes constant. The position identification control of the reels 301L, 301C, and 301R based on the detection signal of the origin position, which is the detection information, is not performed until the waiting period, which is a predetermined period, elapses. As a result, malfunction can be prevented more reliably.

  In this embodiment, the period required for the rotation of the reel to stabilize differs depending on the excitation mode before and after the change, the magnitude of the speed change, and whether the speed is acceleration or deceleration. The optimum period according to the change situation is selected as the waiting period, and it is preferable because the period until the position specifying control can be performed after the rotation speed of the reel is stabilized can be shortened as much as possible. However, depending on the speed change situation, the longest period required for the rotation of the reel to stabilize may be always applied as the standby period. It is possible to reduce the data capacity required for the operation.

  Further, in this embodiment, after the excitation pattern is changed from the acceleration pattern or the deceleration pattern to the constant speed pattern, the position specifying control is not performed until the origin confirmation period for confirming whether the origin position is normally detected has elapsed. Even after the excitation pattern is changed from the acceleration pattern or the deceleration pattern to the constant speed pattern, that is, after the period of changing the reel rotation speed ends, the reel rotation speed is not stable and Even when the reel position specified by the control CPU does not match the actual reel position, the specific position control is not performed until it is determined that the origin position is normally detected. It is possible to more reliably prevent malfunction of the reel.

  Further, in this embodiment, after the excitation pattern is changed from the acceleration pattern or the deceleration pattern to the constant speed pattern, it is determined that the number of steps from the detection of the origin position to the detection of the origin position twice is normal. That is, when the origin position is detected normally multiple times, it is judged that the origin position is detected normally, and the specific position control is performed even if the origin position is not detected normally. And the malfunction of the reel can be more reliably prevented.

  That is, in the present embodiment, the effect control CPU, which is the control means, after the period in which the operating speed of the reels 301L, 301C, and 301R, which are movable bodies, is being changed ends and the operating speed becomes constant, When the detection signal of the origin position, which is the detection information, is confirmed a plurality of times, the positions of the reels 301L, 301C, and 301R based on the detection signals of the origin position are specified as correct positions. As a result, malfunction can be prevented more reliably.

  In this embodiment, after the excitation pattern is changed from the acceleration pattern or deceleration pattern to the constant speed pattern, it is determined that the number of steps from the detection of the origin position to the detection of the origin position twice is normal. With this configuration, it is possible to perform the specific position control by deciding that the origin position has been detected normally, but after changing the excitation pattern from the acceleration pattern or deceleration pattern to the constant speed pattern, the origin position It is also possible to initialize the value of the step number counter only when is detected, start counting the step number counter, and perform specific position control from the time when the origin position is detected. With such a configuration, the control for enabling the specific position control can be simplified. Also, after the excitation pattern is changed from the acceleration pattern or deceleration pattern to the constant speed pattern, the value of the step number counter is initialized when the origin position is detected twice or more times, and the step number counter starts counting. In addition, the configuration may be such that specific position control can be performed after the origin position has been detected a specified number of times.By using such a configuration, it is possible to specify the origin position even if the origin position is not detected normally. The position control is not performed, and the control for enabling the specific position control can be simplified while more reliably preventing the malfunction of the reel.

  Further, as described above, if the configuration is such that the number of times the electrical angle signal becomes Low after the origin position is detected and the reel position is specified according to the count value, the excitation pattern and the deceleration pattern are After the pattern is changed to the constant speed pattern, the count value of the number of times the electrical angle signal has become Low is initialized only by detecting the origin position, and counting of the number of times the electrical angle signal has become Low is started. At the same time, the specific position control may be performed when the origin position is detected, or the origin position may be changed twice or more after the excitation pattern or deceleration pattern is changed to the constant speed pattern. The count value of the number of times the electrical angle signal becomes Low by being detected the specified number of times is started, and the counting of the number of times the electrical angle signal becomes Low is started and the origin position is set to the specified number of times. It may be possible to become configured to perform a specific position control when issued.

  Further, in this embodiment, after the excitation pattern is changed from the acceleration pattern or the deceleration pattern to the constant speed pattern, it is confirmed whether the origin position is normally detected or not and the origin position is normally detected. Although the position specification control is not performed until both of the origin confirmation periods have passed, after the excitation pattern is changed from the acceleration pattern or deceleration pattern to the constant speed pattern, the position identification control is performed until only the waiting period elapses. Alternatively, the position identification control may not be performed until only the origin confirmation period elapses after the excitation pattern is changed from the acceleration pattern or the deceleration pattern to the constant speed pattern. With the configuration in which the position identification control is not performed until the waiting period elapses after the excitation pattern is changed from the acceleration pattern or deceleration pattern to the constant speed pattern, it is sufficient to measure the waiting period according to the excitation pattern. The control for enabling position control can be simplified. On the other hand, in the configuration where the position identification control is not performed until the origin confirmation period elapses after the excitation pattern is changed from the acceleration pattern or deceleration pattern to the constant speed pattern, the specific position control is performed after the origin position is judged to be normal. Since it can be performed, it is possible to reliably prevent the specific position control from being performed even when the origin position is not normally detected. It should be noted that the standby period and the origin confirmation period may not be provided.

  In addition, in the present embodiment, the production control CPU indirectly outputs the control clock signal, the output control signal, the excitation setting signal, and the like to the motor drive circuit via the serial signal circuit 89 to indirectly drive the reel stepping motor. Although the control is performed, the effect control CPU may directly control the reel stepping motor.

  In this embodiment, the reel stepping motor is driven by the micro step drive, and different phase currents may be applied to the A phase and the B phase of the reel stepping motor depending on the step. In such a situation, It is more unstable than the situation where different phase currents are applied to the A-phase and B-phase of the reel stepping motor, and the position is set starting from the step where different phase currents are applied to the A-phase and B-phase of the reel stepping motor. If the specific control is performed, the operation becomes unstable. Therefore, when performing the position specifying control, the effect control CPU determines not only the position of the reel specified by the number of steps counted from the origin position but also the same A phase and B phase of the reel stepping motor from the motor drive circuit. The position specifying control is performed on the basis of the fact that the Low electrical angle signal indicating that the phase current is being applied is detected. As described above, when accelerating or decelerating the rotation speed of the reel, the reel may not be able to follow the change of the step rate or the change of the excitation mode, and the Low of the electrical angle signal is detected, and the reel stepping is detected. Even if it is specified that the same phase current is applied to the A phase and B phase of the motor, it is possible that different phase currents are actually applied to the A phase and B phase, In the present embodiment, the position based on the fact that Low of the electrical angle signal indicating that the same phase current is applied to the A phase and the B phase is detected during the period when the rotation speed of the reel is being changed. Since no specific control is performed, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest due to a malfunction of the reel.

  Incidentally, in the present embodiment, during the period in which the rotation speed of the reel is being changed, the low of the electrical angle signal indicating that the same phase current is applied to the A phase and the B phase is detected. Although the original position specifying control is not performed, a low electrical angle signal indicating that the same phase current is applied to the A phase and the B phase is detected during the period in which the rotation speed of the reel is changed. Other control based on the above, for example, a configuration in which control for changing the excitation pattern or the excitation mode is not performed may be performed. Even in such a configuration, Low of the electrical angle signal is detected and the reel stepping motor Even though it is specified that the same phase current is applied to the A phase and the B phase, the excitation mode is actually changed in the state where different phase currents are applied to the A phase and the B phase. Control is done Without thereby, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest due to a malfunction of the reel even in such a configuration.

  Further, in the present embodiment, after the excitation pattern is changed from the acceleration pattern or the deceleration pattern to the constant speed pattern, the A phase and the B phase are the same until the waiting period required for the rotation speed of the reel to stabilize. The position specifying control based on the detection of Low of the electrical angle signal indicating that the phase current is applied is not performed, and the excitation pattern is changed from the acceleration pattern or the deceleration pattern to the constant speed pattern. After that, that is, even after the period of changing the rotation speed of the reel ends, the rotation speed of the reel is not stable, the Low of the electrical angle signal is detected, and the same phase as the A phase and the B phase of the reel stepping motor is detected. Although it is specified that the phase current is applied to the A phase, even if different phase currents are actually applied to the A phase and the B phase, the position is not changed during that period. Since not performed constant control, it is possible to prevent malfunction of the reel more reliably. After the excitation pattern is changed from the acceleration pattern or the deceleration pattern to the constant speed pattern, the same phase current is applied to the A phase and the B phase until the waiting period required for the rotation speed of the reel to stabilize. The same effect can be obtained even when the other control based on the detection of the low electric angle signal indicating the effect is not performed.

  Further, in the present embodiment, in the switch detection processing performed by the effect control CPU, the output status of the electrical angle signal output from the motor drive circuit is specified twice the same output status (Low or High) consecutively. The output state is changed (low to high, high to low) based on the confirmed output state. Even if the output state changes due to noise, the output state is erroneous. Of the electrical angle signal is not accidentally detected. Therefore, the position identification control or the electrical angle signal Low is detected by detecting the incorrect electrical angle signal. It is possible to surely prevent the malfunction of the reel without performing other control based on the fact that is detected.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the first reel stepping motor 307L and the second reel stepping motor 307C are stopped at the same time during the change of the effect symbol, it is applied to the first reel stepping motor 307L. The current value applied to the first reel stepping motor 307L changes due to the difference in the timing at which the current value applied changes from the timing at which the current value applied to the second reel stepping motor 307C changes. Compared with the case where the timing and the timing at which the current value applied to the second reel stepping motor 307C changes are the same, the amount of power supplied to the first reel stepping motor 307L and the 23rd reel stepping motor 307C is Motor drive by changing Since it is possible to reduce the load on use power supply circuit 83, it is possible to reduce the cost or the like for providing the protection circuit to the reel drive control board 81.

  In particular, when the first reel stepping motor 307L and the second reel stepping motor 307C stop at the same time while the first reel stepping motor 307L and the second reel stepping motor 307C are simultaneously driving, the motor driving power source When an inrush current or a regenerative current is generated in the circuit 83, the internal drive power generation circuit 409 in the motor drive circuits 85 and 86 has an overcurrent protection function, and the power supply to the motor drive circuits 85 and 86 is cut off. It As a result, the motor drive circuits 85 and 86 whose power supply is cut off are reset, and a malfunction occurs in which the first reel stepping motor 307L and the second reel stepping motor 307C move to a position where the initial electrical angle (45 °) is reached. However, according to the present invention, it is possible to prevent the current values applied to the first reel stepping motor 307L and the second reel stepping motor 307C from being stopped at the same time. Therefore, the first reel stepping motor 307L and the second reel stepping motor It is also possible to avoid the occurrence of a malfunction in which 307C moves to a position where the initial electrical angle (45 °) is reached.

  Further, while the effect symbol is changing, the first reel stepping motor 307L and the third reel stepping motor 307R may be stopped at the same time, but the first reel stepping motor 307L is supplied with power from the motor driving power supply circuit 83. While receiving the electric power, the third reel stepping motor 307R is supplied with electric power from the motor driving power supply circuit 84, that is, the electric power used is likely to change when the driving is stopped simultaneously with the first reel stepping motor 307L. The three-reel stepping motor 307R is supplied with electric power from the individual motor drive power supply circuits, so that the load on the motor drive power supply circuits 83, 84 due to the simultaneous increase in the change in the power consumption can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to reduce costs for providing a protection circuit and the like.

  In this embodiment, the current value applied to the first reel stepping motor 307L connected to one motor drive power supply circuit 83 is reduced in order to reduce the load on the motor drive power supply circuits 83 and 84. Differentiating the changing timing from the changing timing of the current value applied to the second reel stepping motor 307C, and the first reel stepping motor 307L and the third reel stepping motor 307R that may stop driving at the same time. By connecting two different power supply circuits for motor drive, load of motor drive power circuits 83, 84 from both the control surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the structure surface of the reel drive control board 81. However, the present invention is not limited to this. To reduce the load of 83 and 84, it may be executed only one of these two measures. It should be noted that if only the timing at which the current value applied to the first reel stepping motor 307L changes and the timing at which the current value applied to the second reel stepping motor 307C changes are different, each reel stepping motor 307L, 307C, and 307R may be driven by the supply of electric power from the same motor drive power source circuit 83.

  In addition, in the present embodiment, the form in which the movable body in the present invention is three reels 301L, 301C, 301R is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the number of movable bodies in the present invention is not limited thereto. May be 2 or less or 4 or more.

  The first reel stepping motor 307L is a motor that drives the reel 301L to rotate, and the second reel stepping motor 307C is a motor that drives the reel 301C to rotate. 307L and the second reel stepping motor 307C can rotate different reels 301L and 301C, and even when different reels 301L and 301C are rotated, it is possible to reduce costs for providing a protection circuit and the like. it can.

  In this embodiment, the reels 301L and 301C that are different from each other are rotated by the first reel stepping motor 307L and the second reel stepping motor 307C, which are supplied with electric power from the motor driving power supply circuit 83. The present invention is not limited to this, and one reel may be rotated by the first reel stepping motor 307L and the second reel stepping motor 307C, or the first reel stepping motor 307L and the second reel stepping motor 307L. A movable body different from the reel may be individually operated by the reel stepping motor 307C. Further, one movable body different from the reel may be operated by the first reel stepping motor 307L and the second reel stepping motor 307C. In addition, when operating one movable body by the first reel stepping motor 307L and the second reel stepping motor 307C in this way, for example, it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the movable body by driving the first reel stepping motor 307L. Between the retreat position and an effect position which is easier to see than the retreat position, and the second reel stepping motor 307C drives the movable body to rotate, expand, contract, separate, etc., the first reel. An operation different from the driving of the stepping motor 307L may be performed.

  Further, the movable body of the present invention is provided on the front frame 101 and the glass door frame 102 in addition to those provided near the center of the game area 7 like the reels 301L, 301C and 301R shown in this embodiment. May be.

  Further, the motor driving power supply circuits 83 and 84 are supplied with electric power from the power supply board 82 via the effect control board 80, and the first reel stepping motor 307L, the second reel stepping motor 307C, and the third reel stepping. Motor drive circuits 85, 86, 87 for generating electric power for driving the motor 307R and driving the generated electric power for the first reel stepping motor 307L, the second reel stepping motor 307C, and the third reel stepping motor 307R. Since it is supplied to the pachinko gaming machine 1, the wiring of the power supply in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be simplified. Further, since the motor drive power supply circuits 83, 84 are provided between the effect control board 80 and the motor drive circuits 85, 86, 87, it is possible to suppress the loss of the power supplied from the power supply board 82 due to the power transmission. .

  In this embodiment, in the motor drive power supply circuits 83 and 84, the first reel stepping motor 307L, the second reel stepping motor 307C, and the third reel stepping motor 307R are driven by the electric power supplied from the power supply board 82. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the electric power supplied from the power supply substrate 82 can be supplied to the motor without passing through the motor drive power supply circuits 83 and 84. The first reel stepping motor 307L, the second reel stepping motor 307C, and the third reel stepping motor 307R may be driven by directly supplying to the drive circuits 85, 86, 87.

  The power supply board 82 of this embodiment is a power supply board provided on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and is a common power supply board used regardless of the model of the pachinko gaming machine 1. Therefore, since the power supply board 82 is commonly used regardless of the model unless the specifications of the outer frame 100 and the front frame 101 change, as shown in the present embodiment, depending on the model of the pachinko gaming machine 1. By providing a power supply board (power supply circuit) for supplying electric power for operating the movable bodies (reel 301L, 301C, 301R of this embodiment) provided separately from the power supply board 82, It is possible to prevent the specification change from occurring and reduce the machine cost of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  In addition, the current values applied to the first reel stepping motor 307L, the second reel stepping motor 307C, and the third reel stepping motor 307R are set to those of the first reel stepping motor 307L, the second reel stepping motor 307C, and the third reel stepping motor 307R. The first reel stepping motor 307L, the second reel stepping motor 307C, and the third reel stepping motor 307R can be stably operated at each rotation speed by making the rotation speed different depending on the rotation speed.

  Further, when the reel stepping motors 307L, 307C, 307R are driven while the drive of the reel stepping motors 307L, 307C, 307R is stopped, they are applied to the reel stepping motors 307L, 307C, 307R. By changing the timing of changing the current value, it is possible to further reduce the load generated by the change in the power supply amount in the motor drive power supply circuits 83 and 84, and reduce the cost for providing the protection circuit and the like. it can.

  In the present embodiment, when the variable display of the effect symbol is started and when the variable display of the effect symbol is ended, the change timing and the drive stop of the current value associated with the drive start of each reel stepping motor 307L, 307C, 307R. Although the form in which the change timing of the accompanying current value is made different has been illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and it is possible to execute an effect that changes the rotation speed of each reel 301L, 301C, 301R as a variable display of effect symbols. In this case, the timing at which the current value applied to each reel stepping motor 307L, 307C, 307R changes may be different even during the variable display of the effect symbol.

  Further, in the movable body according to the present invention, a plurality of types of effect symbols are displayed on the outer peripheral surface and the reels 301L, 301C, 301R are rotatable along the outer peripheral surface, so that the motor drive power supply circuits 83, 84 are provided. By reducing the load on the reel 301L, 301C, 301R, it is possible to operate stably, reel 301L, 301C, 301R is unstable operation due to unstable operation display , In particular, let the player think that the effect symbol is derived and displayed in a combination indicating a big hit, even if the variable display result is out of order, and that the reels 301L, 301C, and 301R are some indication. It is possible to prevent things such as being stolen.

  Further, during the change of the effect symbol, as shown in FIGS. 29 to 32, when the stop timing of each reel 301L, 301C, 301R has elapsed, the electrical angle signal corresponding to each reel 301L, 301C, 301R The output becomes Low, that is, the current values of the same strength are applied to the A phase and the B phase in the first reel stepping motor 307L, the second reel stepping motor 307C, and the third reel stepping motor 307R. Based on this, the drive of the first reel stepping motor 307L, the second reel stepping motor 307C, and the third reel stepping motor 307R is stopped, and the rotation of each reel 301L, 301C, 301R is stopped. , 301R rotation start, fluctuation display result It is inappropriate that the effect symbol is derived and displayed in a combination showing a big hit despite the fact that it is out of the way, or that the player thinks that the rotation of the reels 301L, 301C, 301R is some suggestion. It is possible to prevent the operation from occurring.

  In addition, in the present embodiment, when the second initialization process is executed by executing the second initialization process when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered on, the reels 301L, 301RC, and 301R are supported. A current value of the same strength is applied to the A phase and the B phase of the reel stepping motor, and the electrical angle becomes 45 °, that is, the electrical angle monitoring circuit 403 of each motor drive circuit 85, 86, 87 Since the angle signal is output at Low, even if the reels 301L, 301RC, and 301R are stopped while the reels 301L, 301RC, and 301R are not rotating, the reels 301L, 301RC, and 301R are set to the origin position ( It is possible to prevent an unnatural operation such as rotation toward the initial position) from occurring.

  In this embodiment, the second initialization process is executed when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, so that each reel 301L, 301RC, 301R is output at the origin position where the electrical angle signal is low ( Although an example in which the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on and stopped, the present invention is not limited to this, and the second initialization process is performed when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered on. You don't have to.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 29 to 32, when the effect control CPU stops the rotation of each reel 301L, 301C, 301R while the effect symbol is changing, the electrical angle signal is Low and each reel 301L. , 301C, 301R, if the reel detection sensor is in a detection state, the rotation of each reel 301L, 301C, 301R is stopped, while the electrical angle signal is High, or each reel 301L, 301C, 301R is supported. If at least one reel detection sensor is not in the detection state, after rotating each reel to a position where the electrical angle signal is Low and the reel detection sensors corresponding to the reels 301L, 301C, and 301R are not in the detection state, Since it is stopped, improper rotation of each reel 301L, 301C, 301R will continue. It is possible to prevent.

  Incidentally, in the present embodiment, during the fluctuation of the effect symbol, the reels 301L, 301C, 301R are stopped in accordance with the electrical angle corresponding to the reels 301L, 301C, 301R as the movable body in the present invention and the detection state of the reel detection sensor. Although the form for correcting the position is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the movable body according to the present invention can be operated at a timing other than during the fluctuation of the effect symbol other than the reels 301L, 301C, and 301R. In the case of a movable body, the timing for correcting the stop position of the movable body according to the electric angle corresponding to the movable body and the detection state of the reel detection sensor is a timing other than during the fluctuation of the effect symbol (for example, pachinko It may be when the game machine 1 is powered on or during a big hit game).

  Further, in the motor drive circuits 85, 86, 87 in this embodiment, electric power (internal drive power) for operating the motor drive circuits 85, 86, 87 is generated from the motor drive power supplied from the power supply board 82. Since the internal drive power generation circuit 409 is provided for this purpose, when the motor drive power is supplied to the motor drive circuits 85, 86, 87, the internal drive power generation circuit 409 generates the motor drive power from the motor drive power. Since the motor drive circuits 85, 86, 87 are also operated by the internal drive power, unstable operation power is supplied to the motor drive circuits 85, 86, 87 even though the motor drive power is supplied. Can be prevented.

  The motor drive circuits 85, 86, 87 of the present embodiment drive the motor drive power supplied from the power supply board 82 by the internal drive power generation circuit 409 built in the motor drive circuits 85, 86, 87. Although the mode for generating the internal drive power for operating the circuits 85, 86, 87 is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the internal drive power can be supplied separately from the power supply board 82. It is also possible to provide a different power supply board and supply the internal drive power to the motor drive circuits 85, 86, 87 from the power supply board. Incidentally, when the motor drive circuits 85, 86, 87 are supplied with the internal drive power from the power supply board different from the power supply board 82 in this way, the other power mounted on the reel drive control board 81 by the power supply board. By supplying drive power to the circuit as well, the operation of the circuit mounted on the reel drive control board 81 can be stabilized.

  In addition, the motor drive circuits 85, 86, 87 of the present embodiment, based on the A-phase output setting signal and the B-phase output setting signal input to the drive current setting circuit 411, output the pulse pulse from the output pulse generation circuit 415 to the reel stepping circuits. The current value of the pulse signal output to the A phase of the motors 307L, 307C, 307R and the current value of the pulse signal output to the B phase of each reel stepping motor 307L, 307C, 307R from the output pulse generation circuit 416 are changed. Therefore, an appropriate pulse signal can be output according to the operating state of each reel stepping motor 307L, 307C, 307R, and the output of each reel stepping motor 307L, 307C, 307R can be stabilized.

  Further, in the variable display of the effect symbols, the stop position of each reel 301L, 301C, 301R is fixed by virtue of the continuous application of the phase current to each reel stepping motor 307L, 307C, 307R when the drive is stopped, and the vibration As a result, although the reels 301L, 301C, and 301R have a variation display result of “out”, an operation defect such as deriving and displaying an effect symbol with a combination of “big hit” is prevented.

  In particular, as shown in FIG. 22, since the current value I2 lower than the current value I1 at the time of driving stop is applied to the reel stepping motors 307L, 307C, 307R at the time of driving stop, each reel stepping motor 307L, It is possible to suppress heat generation in each of the reel stepping motors 307L, 307C, and 307R when the driving of the 307C and 307R is stopped.

  In this embodiment, heat is generated in each reel stepping motor 307L, 307C, 307R by applying a current value I2 lower than the driving current value I1 to each reel stepping motor 307L, 307C, 307R when driving is stopped. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Each reel stepping motor 307L is configured so that no current is applied to each reel stepping motor 307L, 307C, 307R when driving is stopped. , 307C, 307R and the respective motor drive circuits 85, 86, 87 may be suppressed from generating heat. Further, when the heat generated when a current is applied to the reel stepping motors 307L, 307C, and 307R is sufficiently small, or in a reel stepping motor that can operate normally even if heat is generated, the current value I1 when driving is stopped when driving is stopped. The reels 301L, 301C, and 301R may be strongly held at the stop position by applying a larger current value I3.

  In the present embodiment, a current value I2 lower than the current value I1 at the time of motion stop is applied to each reel stepping motor 307L, 307C, 307R for rotating each reel 301L, 301C, 301R during drive stop. Thus, the form in which the heat generation of the reel stepping motors 307L, 307C, 307R is suppressed is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a movable body other than each reel 301L, 301C, 301R is provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In this case, heat generation of the motor for operating the movable body may be suppressed by applying a lower current value than when the drive is stopped.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 10, the production control board 80 (production control CPU) changes the excitation mode of each reel stepping motor 307L, 307C, 307R in a state where each reel stepping motor 307L, 307C, 307R is stopped. In doing so, by outputting the electrical angle initialization signal, the current value applied to the A phase of each reel stepping motor 307L, 307C, 307R and the current value applied to the B phase are balanced. The excitation mode is changed based on the fact that the current value applied to the A phase and the current value applied to the B phase are balanced when the output state of the electrical angle signal becomes Low. The current values applied to the A and B phases are not balanced (the magnetic forces generated in the A and B phases are not balanced). It is possible to prevent the occurrence of a problem due to the excitation mode is changed by the state. Further, in the present embodiment, the excitation mode changing process is executed in the processes of S307 and S308 of FIG. 29, and the current value applied to each phase is also switched. Therefore, in S307 and S308, the electrical angle signal is output even when the reel stepping motors 307L, 307C, and 307R are driven, as when the reel stepping motors 307L, 307C, and 307R are stopped. By changing the excitation mode of each reel stepping motor 307L, 307C, 307R based on the state becoming Low, each reel stepping motor 307L, 307C, 307R has a problem such as overshoot or undershoot. It can prevent the occurrence.

  In particular, the motor drive circuits 85, 86, and 87 of this embodiment are located at a position where the output state of the electrical angle signal is Low as compared with the conventional motor drive circuit (for example, Microstep motor driver TB62209 manufactured by Toshiba). Since it overlaps with the phase excitation position, it is possible to easily switch the excitation mode (see FIG. 10).

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the rotation of each reel 301L, 301C, 301R is stopped during the variable display of the effect symbols, when the output state of the corresponding electrical angle signal is Low, that is, the corresponding Only when the current values applied to the A phase and B phase of the reel stepping motor are balanced, the electric angle signals corresponding to the reels 301L, 301C, and 301R at the next start of fluctuation of the effect design Since it is only necessary to create a program for performing variable display of effect symbols so as to start the rotation of each reel 301L, 301C, 301R in a state where the output state of is low, the program can be simplified.

  Further, in this embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine 1 which is a gaming machine capable of playing a game is operated by the reels 301L, 301C and 301R and the reels 301L, 301C and 301R which are movable bodies operably provided. Drive control of the reel stepping motors 307L, 307C, 307R, which is a drive unit that generates a drive force for driving, and the reel stepping motors 307L, 307C, 307R, which are a drive unit, are different from the control clock signal that is a clock signal. For inputting output control signals that are control signals, electrical angle initialization signals, forward / reverse rotation signals, excitation setting signal 0, excitation setting signal 1, excitation setting signal 2, A phase output setting signal, B phase output setting signal Motor drive circuits 85, 86 and 87, which are drive control means that can be executed based on the original, and reels 301L, 301C and 301 Production control board 80 (production control CPU) which is production control means for controlling production (variation display production) by variable display of production design which is a movable body production accompanied by the operation of production control board 80 (production control). (CPU) control data for motor drive circuit 1, control data for motor drive circuit 2 and control data for motor drive circuit 3 which are serial control data by serial signals transmitted from the CPU) are output control signals which are a plurality of different control signals, electrical control signals. Converted to angle initialization signal, forward / reverse rotation signal, excitation setting signal 0, excitation setting signal 1, excitation setting signal 2, A-phase output setting signal, B-phase output setting signal, and then the motor drive circuits 85, 86, 87 A clock for the motor drive circuit 1 that can be output and is serial clock data based on a serial signal transmitted from the production control board 80 (production control CPU). A serial signal circuit serving as signal converting means capable of converting the control signal, the clock signal data for the motor drive circuit 2 and the clock signal data for the motor drive circuit 3 into a control clock signal and outputting them to the motor drive circuits 85, 86, 87. 89 and. As a result, the production control board 80 (production control CPU), which is the production control means, outputs the control clock signal input to the motor drive circuits 85, 86, 87, which is the drive control means, to the motor drive which is serial clock data. The clock signal data for the circuit 1, the clock signal data for the motor drive circuit 2, and the clock signal data for the motor drive circuit 3 can be directly managed by being transmitted to the serial signal circuit 89, and can also be controlled from individual clock signal generation circuits. It is possible to prevent inappropriate drive control from being performed by inputting an inappropriate clock signal that is not synchronized with the serial data signal to the drive control means.

  Since the production control means of the present invention is a means for controlling the movable body production accompanied by the operation of the movable body, a single production control CPU mounted on the production control board 80 constitutes the production control means. It can be seen that the effect control board 80 as a whole constitutes effect control means. Further, the production control means is configured to include a serial signal circuit 89, a pulse counter 90, and a serial signal circuit 89 'that output a control signal to the drive control means that controls the operation of the drive means that operates the movable body. It can also be seen as doing. In this case, the serial signal circuit 89, the pulse counter 90, and the serial signal circuit 89 'constitute both effect control means and signal conversion means.

  In addition, in the present embodiment, the effect control board 80, the data string of "00110011 ..." corresponding to the control clock signal (A) of the shortest cycle having the shortest cycle, and the control clock signal of the double cycle of the shortest cycle ( B), a data string of "00110011 ...", a data string of "000111000111 ..." Corresponding to the control clock signal (C) having a triple cycle of the shortest cycle, and the like are stored. The substrate 80 can read the data string stored in the ROM and transmit the motor drive circuit 1 clock signal data, the motor drive circuit 2 clock signal data, and the motor drive circuit 3 clock signal data. With this, it is not necessary to generate a data string to be transmitted each time the motor drive circuit 1 clock signal data, the motor drive circuit 2 clock signal data, and the motor drive circuit 3 clock signal data are transmitted. It is possible to reduce the processing load on the effect control board 80 side associated with transmission.

  Further, in the modification shown in FIG. 7, the control clock signal (A) having the shortest cycle, which is the reference control clock signal output from the serial signal circuit 89 serving as the signal conversion means, has a different cycle due to frequency division. A pulse counter 90 is provided which serves as a frequency dividing means which can convert the divided clock signal into a reference wave, a divided wave frequency, a divided wave frequency, a divided wave frequency n, and outputs the divided frequency wave to the motor drive circuits 85, 86 and 87. According to this, it is possible to output the divided clock signals with different cycles to the motor drive circuits 85, 86, 87 while suppressing an increase in the processing load of the effect control board 80 (effect control CPU).

  Although the embodiments of the present invention have been described above with reference to the drawings, the specific configurations are not limited to these embodiments, and any modifications or additions within the scope of the present invention are included in the present invention. Be done.

  For example, in the above-described embodiment, a mode in which a stepping motor is used as the drive means for operating the reels 301L, 301C, 301R that are movable bodies is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this. As the driving means, a motor of another drive system, for example, as shown in FIG. 36, a brushless motor (first reel brushless motor BLM1, second reel brushless motor BLM2, third reel brushless motor BLM3) may be used. . As described above, when the brushless motor is used, the motor drive circuit for controlling the drive of the brushless motor is generally provided inside the brushless motor. , The first reel brushless motor BLM1, the second reel brushless motor BLM2, and the third reel brushless motor BLM3 are directly connected to the first reel brushless motor BLM1, the second reel brushless motor BLM2, and the third reel brushless motor BLM3. As shown in FIG. 36, the STEP signal (speed pulse signal) corresponding to the control clock signal in the stepping motor, the CW / CCW signal (forward / reverse rotation), the STEP signal and the CW / CCW signal START signal that specifies input availability and motor operation Four signals with REST signal specifying whether, that is, the first clock signal and the three control signals, converts the serial data received from the performance control board 80 (effect control CPU). Therefore, the motor drive circuit which is the drive control means in the present invention may be provided inside the motor which is the drive means, outside the motor, or inside the motor and outside the motor. May be provided dispersedly in both.

  Although FIG. 36 shows an example in which the pulse counter is not provided, as described above with reference to FIG. 7, the pulse counter 90 includes the serial signal circuit 89 ′, the first reel brushless motor BLM1, and the second reel brushless motor BLM1. Provided between the reel brushless motor BLM2 and the third reel brushless motor BLM3, the divided STEP signal (speed pulse signal) is supplied to the first reel brushless motor BLM1, the second reel brushless motor BLM2, and the third reel brushless motor BLM3. May be input to.

  Further, in the above embodiment, the movable body is exemplified as the reels 301L, 301C, 301R for executing the variable display effect, but the present invention is not limited to this, and these movable bodies are It may operate at a specific timing during the period in which the variable display is being executed, for example, in a variation pattern of super reach in which there is a high probability that the big hit symbols will be aligned, at the timing of development of super reach. Alternatively, it may be a movable body that is not related to the variable display, for example, a gimmick (a movable movable body) of a character that operates during a big hit game. It is preferable to use a brushless motor when the movable body requires a high operation speed, a large operation torque, or a continuous operation.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, as the actual operation confirmation operation control, the reels 301L, 301C, 301R are reciprocated between the origin position and the predetermined position (the reels 301L, 301C, 301R are normally rotated from the origin position to the predetermined position). After that, the embodiment in which the predetermined position is reversed to the origin position) is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and as shown in FIG. The 301L, 301C, and 301R may be rotated once from the origin position.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the form in which the plurality of movable bodies in the present invention are the reels 301L, 301C, and 301R has been illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the plurality of movable bodies are the reels 301L. , 301C and 301R may be executed. In particular, as a second modification, a plurality of movable bodies according to the present invention may interfere with each other by operating together. In this way, when a plurality of movable bodies according to the present invention are those which interfere with each other by operating together, it is unlikely that the plurality of movable bodies operate simultaneously in actual operation. However, when a plurality of movable bodies are operated together, excessive electric power is consumed when the plurality of movable bodies are simultaneously operated, and as a result, a load is applied to the motor drive circuits 85, 86, 87, etc. Problems such as resetting of the power supply circuits 83 and 84 may occur. Therefore, by operating a plurality of movable bodies in the present invention so as to interfere with each other, it is possible to drive the motor by excessive power consumption. It is possible to prevent a defect from occurring in the power supply circuits 83 and 84. Further, since the plurality of movable bodies according to the present invention are operated together so as to interfere with each other, the supply of electric power is stabilized, so that the operations of the plurality of movable bodies become unstable and the mutual interference is caused. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, when the rotation of each reel 301L, 301C, 301R is stopped during the variable display of the effect symbol, when the output state of the corresponding electrical angle signal is Low, that is, the corresponding The mode in which the current values applied to the A phase and the B phase of the reel stepping motor are balanced has been illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, for example, during the fluctuation of the effect symbol. When it is possible to execute an effect (for example, pseudo continuous effect) in which the rotation of at least one of the reels 301L, 301C, and 301R is temporarily stopped (temporarily stopped) and then re-rotated, the electrical angle signal The reels 301L, 301C, and 301R may be temporarily stopped when the output state is not Low (High). In this way, when temporary stop and re-rotation of the reels 301L, 301C, 301R are executed during the variable display of 1, the reels 301L, 301C, 301R are dealt with only when the variable display of the effect symbols is finished. Since it is only necessary to determine whether the output state of the electrical angle signal is Low and stop the rotation of each reel 301L, 301C, 301R based on the determination result, each reel 301L, 301C, 301R is temporarily Even if the stopped position is a position where the electrical angle signal output state is not Low, the reels 301L, 301C, and 301R rotate as determined in advance according to the process data without determining the electrical angle signal output state. Since it is only necessary to control, it becomes easy to create a program for performing variable display of effect symbols.

  Further, in the above embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine is applied as an example of the gaming machine, but the game can be started by setting a predetermined number of bets for one game using the gaming value, for example. At the same time, one game is completed by deriving the variable display result to the effect display device capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of symbols that can be identified, and winning according to the variable display result derived to the effect display device. It can also be applied to a slot machine in which is possible. When the present invention is applied to such a slot machine, the movable body may be a reel of the slot machine. Further, when the present invention is applied to the slot machine as described above, the reel as the movable body is rotated only in the two-phase excitation mode of the stepping motor, so that the reel is used when performing an effect such as a pseudo game. Can be controlled like a production reel.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the initial position of each reel 301L, 301C, 301R is set to the position where the electrical angle signal is output at Low, that is, the current applied to the corresponding A phase and B phase of the reel stepping motor. Although the form in which the positions are balanced (positions where the electrical angle is 45 °) has been illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the initial positions of the reels 301L, 301C, and 301R are, for example, It may be a position where the current value is applied to only one of the A phase and the B phase of the corresponding reel stepping motor (see FIG. 16A).

  Further, in the above-mentioned embodiment, a mode is shown in which the non-detection operation control, the detection operation control and the actual operation confirmation operation control are executed for each reel 301L, 301C, 301R, but the present invention is not limited to this. However, when a movable body is provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in addition to the reels 301L, 301C, and 301R, the non-detection operation control, the detection operation control, and the actual operation targeting the movable body. The confirmation operation control may be executed, or the non-detection operation control, the detection operation control, and the actual operation confirmation operation control may be performed in order on each reel 301L, 301C, 301R and a movable body other than these reels 301L, 301C, 301R. May be executed.

  In the above embodiment, the motor drive power supply circuit 83 for supplying electric power for driving the first reel stepping motor 307L and the second reel stepping motor 307C and the third reel stepping motor 307R are driven. Although the motor drive power supply circuit 84 for supplying electric power and two motor drive power supply circuits are provided on the reel drive control board 81 as an example, the present invention is not limited to this. Only one motor driving power supply circuit is provided on the control board 81, and electric power for driving the first reel stepping motor 307L, the second reel stepping motor 307C, and the third reel stepping motor 307R is supplied from the motor driving power supply circuit. You may do it.

  Further, in the above embodiment, the production control board 80 (production control CPU) corresponds to the A-phase output setting signal, the B-phase output setting signal, the electrical angle initialization signal, etc. to the respective motor drive circuits 85, 86, 87. Although the example in which the reel stepping motors 307L, 307C, and 307R are driven by transmitting the command to perform is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the production control board 80 (production control CPU) is used. Driving each reel stepping motor 307L, 307C, 307R by transmitting a signal corresponding to an A phase output setting signal, a B phase output setting signal, an electrical angle initialization signal, etc. to each motor drive circuit 85, 86, 87. You may.

  The present invention is not limited to what has been described above. Further, the specific configuration is included in the present invention even if there are changes and additions within the scope not departing from the gist of the present invention, in addition to the above-described embodiment and other examples of the later-described embodiments.

  In addition, all or part of the configurations shown in the above-described embodiment and each modification and the configurations shown in the below-described embodiment and each modification may be arbitrarily combined.

  It should be considered that the above-described embodiments and the embodiments described below disclosed this time are exemplifications in all points and not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is shown not by the above description and the following description but by the claims, and is intended to include meanings equivalent to the claims and all modifications within the scope.

  In addition, as the gaming machine of the present invention, a gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of playing a game, and a movable body (for example, reels 301L, 301C, 301R) operably provided, Driving means (for example, reel stepping motors 307L, 307C, and 307R) that generates driving force for operating the movable body, and drive control of the driving means are controlled by a clock signal (for example, a control clock signal) and a plurality of signals. Different control signals (for example, output control signal, electrical angle initialization signal, forward / reverse rotation signal, excitation setting signal 0, excitation setting signal 1, excitation setting signal 2, A phase output setting signal, B phase output setting signal) Drive control means (for example, motor drive circuits 85, 86, 87) that can be executed based on the input of, and control of a movable body effect (for example, variable display effect) accompanying the operation of the movable body. Performance control means (for example, performance control board 80) to perform, and serial control data (for example, motor drive circuit 1 control data, motor drive circuit 2 control data, motor drive circuit) by serial signals transmitted from the performance control means. 3 control data) can be converted into a plurality of different control signals and output to the drive control means, and serial clock data (for example, a motor drive circuit 1 clock signal) by a serial signal transmitted from the effect control means. A signal converting means (for example, a serial signal circuit 89) capable of converting data, the clock signal data for the motor drive circuit 2, and the clock signal data for the motor drive circuit 3 into a clock signal for output to the drive control means. ) And an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player (for example, a big hit game state) Suggestion effect execution means (for example, CPU 90120 for effect control) capable of executing a suggestion effect (for example, reach effect) that suggests that, and title notification means (for example, CPU 90120 for effect control) capable of notifying a title corresponding to the suggestion effect. And the title notifying unit can notify the title corresponding to the suggested effect when a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the suggested effect (for example, FIG. 44-2 (D) or FIG. 44-2 ( F)), a portion for displaying the title of the reach effect), and the suggestive effect execution means, as the suggestive effect, at least a first suggestive effect (for example, reach effect of super reach A or super reach B) and a second suggestive effect. (For example, reach effect of super reach D or super reach E) can be executed, and the title notification means is In the suggestion effect, the title corresponding to the second suggestion effect is notified from the start of the second suggestion effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 44-2, from the start of the reach effect of super reach D to the super reach D). The part that displays the title 31AK007 corresponding to the reach effect of the game machine.

  With such a configuration, the clock signal input to the drive control means can be directly managed by the production control means by the serial clock data, and the clock signal not synchronized with the serial signal from the individual clock signal generation circuit can be obtained. It is possible to prevent inappropriate drive control from being performed by inputting an appropriate clock signal to the drive control means. Moreover, since the notification of the title according to the suggestive effect can be executed, the effect of the effect is improved.

Furthermore, it is possible to prevent improper drive control from being performed, and as an example of the form of the gaming machine that improves the effect, control to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player (for example, a jackpot gaming state). A possible game machine (for example, a pachinko game machine 901) that can execute a suggestion effect (for example, reach effect) that suggests that the game machine is controlled to the advantageous state (for example, effect control CPU 90120). And a title notifying unit capable of notifying a title corresponding to the suggestive effect (for example, effect control CPU 90120), and the title notifying unit provides the suggestive effect when a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the suggestive effect. A corresponding title can be notified (for example, a reach effect title is displayed as shown in FIGS. 44-2D and 44-2F). ), The suggestive effect execution means, as the suggestive effect, at least a first suggestive effect (eg, reach effect of super reach A or super reach B) and a second suggestive effect (eg, reach effect of super reach D or super reach E). In the second suggestion effect, the title notifying unit notifies the title corresponding to the second suggestion effect from the start of the second suggestion effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 44-2). As described above, a portion which displays the title 31AK007 corresponding to the reach effect of the super reach D from the start of the reach effect of the super reach D) gaming machine. Hereinafter, an example of a form example of this gaming machine will be described as another form example.
(Other form examples)
Hereinafter, another embodiment will be described.

(Structure of pachinko gaming machine 901, etc.)
FIG. 37 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 901 and shows an arrangement layout of main members. The pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 901 is roughly divided into a gaming board (gauge board) 902 that constitutes a gaming board surface, and a gaming machine frame (underframe) 903 that supports and fixes the gaming board 902. A game area is formed on the game board 902, and a game ball serving as a game medium is launched into the game area from a predetermined hitting ball launching device.

  At a predetermined position of the game board 902 (on the right side of the game area in the example shown in FIG. 37), a variable display (also called a special drawing game) of special symbols (also called a special drawing) as a plurality of types of special identification information. There is provided a first special symbol display device 904A and a second special symbol display device 904B. Each of these consists of a 7-segment LED or the like. The special symbol is represented by a number indicating "0" to "9" or a lighting pattern such as "-". The special pattern may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off.

  The “variable display” of the special symbol is, for example, variably displaying a plurality of types of special symbols (the same applies to other symbols described later). The change includes update display of a plurality of symbols, scroll display of a plurality of symbols, deformation of one or more symbols, enlargement / reduction of one or more symbols, and the like. In the variation of the special symbol and the normal symbol described later, a plurality of types of special symbols or normal symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of the decorative pattern, which will be described later, a plurality of types of decorative patterns are scroll-displayed or updated and one or more decorative patterns are deformed or enlarged / reduced. The variation includes a mode in which a certain symbol is displayed in a blinking manner. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped and displayed (also referred to as derived or derived display) as a display result (the same applies to variable display of other symbols described later). The variable display may be referred to as a variable display or a variation.

  The special symbols variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 904A are also referred to as “first special symbols”, and the special symbols variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 904B are also referred to as “second special symbols”. Further, a special figure game using the first special figure is referred to as a “first special figure game”, and a special figure game using the second special figure is also referred to as a “second special figure game”. The special symbol display device that performs variable display of the special symbol may be one type.

  An image display device 905 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 902. The image display device 905 includes, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display device), an organic EL (Electro Luminescence), and the like, and displays various effect images. The image display device 905 may include a projector and a screen. Various effect images are displayed on the image display device 905.

  For example, on the screen of the image display device 905, in synchronization with the first special drawing game and the second special drawing game, a decorative pattern as a plurality of types of decorative identification information different from the special pattern (a pattern showing numbers, etc.) Variable display is performed. Here, in synchronization with the first special drawing game or the second special drawing game, the decorative pattern is variably displayed (for example, up and down) in each of the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 905L, 905C, 905R. Direction scroll display or update display). Note that the special figure game and the variable display of the decorative design which are executed in synchronization are collectively referred to as simply variable display.

  On the screen of the image display device 905, a display area may be provided for displaying a pending display corresponding to a variable display in which execution is suspended and an active display corresponding to a variable display in execution. The hold display and the active display are collectively referred to as a variable display corresponding display corresponding to the variable display.

  The number of variable displays that are being held is also called the number of held storages. The number of reserved memories corresponding to the first special figure game is also called a first reserved memory number, and the number of reserved memories corresponding to the second special figure game is also called a second reserved memory number. Further, the total of the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number is also referred to as the total reserved storage number.

  In addition, at a predetermined position of the game board 902, a first hold indicator 9025A and a second hold indicator 9025B configured to include a plurality of LEDs are provided, and the first hold indicator 9025A is the number of LEDs to be turned on. To display the first number of reserved memories, and the second reserved indicator 9025B displays the number of second reserved memories according to the number of lit LEDs.

  Below the image display device 905, a winning ball device 906A and a variable winning ball device 906B are provided.

  The winning ball device 906A forms, for example, a first starting winning port which is always kept in a fixed open state through which a game ball can enter by a predetermined ball receiving member. When the game balls enter the first start winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, 3) of prize balls can be paid out and the first special figure game can be started.

  The variable winning ball device 906B (normal electric accessory) forms a second starting winning opening that changes between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 9081 (see FIG. 38). The variable winning ball device 906B includes, for example, an electric tulip type accessory having a pair of movable wing pieces, and when the solenoid 9081 is in the off state, the movable wing pieces are in the vertical position, so that the tip of the movable wing piece. Is close to the winning ball apparatus 906A, and the game ball does not enter the second starting winning opening (the second starting winning opening is also closed). On the other hand, when the solenoid 9081 is in the ON state, the variable winning ball device 906B is in the open state in which the game ball can enter the second starting winning opening (second starting). It is also said that the winning opening will be open.) When the game balls enter the second start winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls are paid out and the second special figure game can be started. Note that the variable winning ball device 906B is not limited to the device including the electric tulip type accessory as long as it can change between the closed state and the open state.

  At predetermined positions of the game board 902 (in the example shown in FIG. 37, four places on the lower left and right sides of the game area), general winning openings 9010 that are always kept open by predetermined ball receiving members are provided. In this case, when one of the general winning openings 9010 is entered, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

  A special variable winning ball device 907 having a special winning opening is provided below the winning ball device 906A and the variable winning ball device 906B. The special variable winning ball device 907 includes a special winning opening door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 9082 (see FIG. 38), and the special winning opening door serves as a special winning opening as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state. Form.

  As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 907, when the solenoid 9082 for the special winning opening door (for special electric accessory) is in the off state, the big winning opening door closes the big winning opening, and the game ball is large. You will not be able to enter (pass) the winning hole. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 907, when the solenoid 9082 for the special winning opening door is in the on state, the special winning opening door opens the special winning opening, and the game ball easily enters the special winning opening. Become.

  When the game balls enter the special winning opening, a predetermined number (eg, 14) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. When the game balls enter the big winning opening, more prize balls are paid out than when the game balls enter the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening and the general winning opening 9010, for example.

  The entry of a game ball into each winning opening including the general winning opening 9010 is also referred to as “winning”. In particular, winning at the starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening and starting opening) is also referred to as a starting winning.

  At a predetermined position of the game board 902 (in the example shown in FIG. 37, on the left side of the game area), a normal symbol display 9020 is provided. As an example, the normal symbol display 9020 is composed of a 7-segment LED or the like, and performs a variable display of a normal symbol as a plurality of types of normal identification information different from the special symbol. Ordinary symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9" or lighting patterns such as "-". The normal pattern may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off. Such variable display of ordinary symbols is also called a universal figure game.

  On the left side of the image display device 905, a passage gate 9041 through which game balls can pass is provided. Based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 9041, the universal figure game is executed.

  Above the normal symbol display 9020, a universal figure hold display 9025C is provided. The universal figure hold indicator 9025C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the number of stored universal figure reserves, which is the number of regular figure games pending for execution, by the number of lit LEDs.

  In addition to the above configuration, the surface of the game board 902 is provided with a windmill and a large number of obstacle nails that change the flow direction and speed of the game ball. At the lowermost part of the game area, there is provided an outlet for taking in the game balls that have not entered any of the winning openings.

  Speakers 908L and 908R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at upper left and right positions of the gaming machine frame 903, and a game effect lamp 909 for game effect is provided in the periphery of the game area. ing. The game effect lamp 909 is configured to include an LED.

  At a predetermined position (not shown in FIG. 37) of the game board 902, a movable body 9032 that operates according to the effect is provided.

  At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 903, there is provided a hit ball operation handle (operation knob) 9030 operated by a player or the like to shoot a game ball toward a game area by a hit ball launching device.

  At a predetermined position of the game machine frame 903 below the game area, a game ball paid out as a prize ball or a game ball rented out by a predetermined ball lending machine is held (stored) so that it can be supplied to the ball striking device. A ball hitting plate (upper plate) is provided. Below the upper plate, there is provided a hit ball supply plate (lower plate) from which prize balls are paid out when the upper plate is full.

  At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 903 below the game area, a stick controller 9031A that can be held by a player and tilted is attached. The stick controller 9031A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed by the player. The operation on the stick controller 9031A is detected by the controller sensor unit 9035A (see FIG. 38).

  At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 903 below the game area, a push button 9031B that allows the player to perform a predetermined instruction operation by a pressing operation or the like is provided. The operation on the push button 9031B is detected by the push sensor 9035B (see FIG. 38).

  In the pachinko gaming machine 901, a stick controller 9031A and a push button 9031B are provided as detection means for detecting the operation (operation etc.) of the player, but other detection means may be provided.

(Outline of game progression)
A game ball is launched toward the game area by the player's rotation operation on the ball hitting operation handle 9030 provided in the pachinko gaming machine 901. When the game ball passes through the passage gate 9041, the normal figure game by the normal symbol display 9020 is started. In addition, when the game ball passes through the passage gate 9041 during the previous execution period of the general education game (when the game ball passes through the passage gate 9041 but cannot immediately execute the general education game based on the passage) , The universal figure game based on the passage is suspended until a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

  In this public figure game, if a specific ordinary symbol (a symbol for a regular symbol) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the ordinary symbol is "per ordinary symbol". On the other hand, as a fixed ordinary symbol, if a normal symbol other than the regular symbol (normal symbol lost symbol) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the ordinary symbol becomes "normal symbol lost". When the "universal figure hit" is reached, opening control is performed to open the variable winning ball device 906B for a predetermined period (the second start winning port is opened).

  When the game ball enters the first start winning hole formed in the winning ball device 906A, the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 904A is started.

  When the game ball enters the second start winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 906B, the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 904B is started.

  In addition, when the game ball enters into the starting winning opening (winning prize) while the special drawing game is being executed, or during the period when it is controlled to the big hitting game state or the small hitting game state which will be described later (starting winning occurs, If the special drawing game based on the starting prize cannot be executed immediately), the execution of the special drawing game based on the entry is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

  In the special figure game, if a specific special symbol (big hit symbol, for example, "7", the actual symbol differs depending on the jackpot type described later.) Is displayed as a stop special symbol, it becomes a "big hit" symbol and a big hit symbol. If a predetermined special symbol different from (a small hit symbol, for example, “2”) is stopped and displayed, it is a “small hit”. Further, if a special symbol different from the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol (missing symbol, for example, "-") is stopped and displayed, "missing" will occur.

  After the display result in the special figure game is "big hit", the big hit game state is controlled as an advantageous state advantageous to the player. After the display result in the special figure game is "small hit", the small hit game state is controlled.

  In the big hit game state, the player can obtain the prize ball by entering the game ball into the special winning opening. Therefore, the big hit game state is an advantageous state for the player. The larger the number of rounds in the big hit game state, and the longer the open upper limit period, the more advantageous for the player.

  The type of big hit is set in "big hit". For example, multiple types of opening modes (number of rounds and maximum open period) of the special winning opening, and game states after the big-hit game state (described later, normal state, time saving state, probability variation state, etc.) are prepared. The type is set. As the big hit type, a big hit type that can obtain many prize balls or a big hit type that has few prize balls or hardly obtain prize balls may be provided.

  In the small hitting game state, the special winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 907 is opened in a predetermined opening manner. For example, in the small hit game state, the same opening mode as in the big hit game state in the case of some big hit types (the number of times of opening the special winning opening is the same as the number of rounds described above, and the closing timing of the special winning opening is also the same. Etc.), the special winning opening is opened. As with the big hit type, a small hit type may be provided for the "small hit".

  After the big hit game state is finished, it may be controlled to a time saving state or a probability changing state according to the big hit type.

  In the time-saving state, control (time-saving control) that shortens the average special figure variation time (period during which the special figure varies) compared to the normal state is executed. In the time-saving state, by reducing the average figure change time (the period during which the figure changes) from the normal state, or by improving the probability of being "Public hit" in the figure game from the normal state, The control (high opening control, high base control) that makes it easier for the game ball to enter the second start winning opening is also executed. The time saving state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbol (particularly the second special symbol) is improved, which is an advantageous state for the player.

  In the probability variation state (probability variation state), in addition to the time saving control, the probability variation control in which the probability that the display result is "big hit" is higher than in the normal state is executed. The probability variation state is a state that is more advantageous to the player because it is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbol is improved and a "big hit" is likely to occur.

  The time saving state and the probability changing state are continued until one of the ending conditions such as that the special figure game has been executed a predetermined number of times and the next big hit game state has been started. The condition that the ending condition is that the special figure game is executed a predetermined number of times is also referred to as the number of times cut (shortening of times of times cut, probability change of times of cut etc.).

  The normal state is a game state other than special states such as a big hit game state, which is advantageous for the player, a time saving state, a probability variation state, etc., and the display result in the figure game is "universal figure win". Probability and probability that the display result in the special figure game is “big hit”, etc., the pachinko gaming machine 901 returns to a predetermined state after the power is turned on, such as when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is initially set (for example, when the system is reset). The state is controlled in the same way as when the processing is not executed).

  A state in which the probability variation control is executed is also referred to as a high accuracy state, and a state in which the probability variation control is not executed is also referred to as a low accuracy state. A state in which the time saving control is executed is also referred to as a high base state, and a state in which the time saving control is not executed is also referred to as a low base state. By combining these, it is said that the time saving state is a low accurate high base state, the definite change state is a high accurate high base state, and the normal state is a low accurate low base state. The highly accurate state and the low base state are also referred to as the highly accurate low base state.

  After the small hit game state is finished, the game state is not changed, and the game state before the special figure game display result is "small hit" is continuously controlled (however, "small hit" occurs If the special figure game at that time is the predetermined number of special figure games in the above-mentioned number of times cutting, the game state is naturally changed). It should be noted that “small hit” may not be provided as the display result of the special figure game.

  The gaming state may change based on that the game ball has passed a specific area (for example, a specific area in the special winning opening) during the big hit gaming state. For example, when the game ball passes through a specific area, it may be controlled to be in a certain change state after the big hit game state.

(Progress, etc.)
In the pachinko gaming machine 901, various effects (notification of the progress status of the game and excitement of the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The effect will be described below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 905, but in addition to or in place of the display, audio output from the speakers 908L and 908R and / or the game effect lamp 909. May be performed by turning on / off the light, the operation of the movable body 9032, or the like.

  As effects to be executed according to the progress of the game, in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative pattern display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R, the first special figure game or the first special figure game is displayed. In response to the start of the 2 special drawing game, the variable display of the decorative design is started. At the timing when the display result (also referred to as a fixed special symbol) is stopped and displayed in the first special figure game and the second special figure game, the fixed decorative symbol (combination of three decorative symbols) becomes the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol. ) Is also stopped (displayed).

  In the period from the start to the end of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the variable display mode of the decorative pattern may be a predetermined reach mode (reach is established). Here, with the reach mode, when the decorative design stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 905 constitutes a part of the jackpot combination described later, the decorative design which is not yet stopped and displayed is variably displayed. Is an aspect in which

  In addition, the reach effect is executed in response to the above-mentioned reach mode during the variable display of the decorative pattern. In the pachinko gaming machine 901, the ratio of the display result (the display result of the special drawing game or the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern) being a “big hit” (also called the big hit reliability or the big hit expectation degree) according to the effect mode. A plurality of different reach effects are executed. Reach productions include, for example, normal reach and super-reach, which has higher jackpot reliability than normal reach.

  When the display result of the special figure game is "big hit", a fixed decorative pattern which is a predetermined big hit combination is derived as a display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern on the screen of the image display device 905 (decoration. The display result of the variable display of the design is "big hit"). As an example, the same decorative pattern (for example, "7") is stopped and displayed together on a predetermined effective line in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 905L, 905C, 905R. .

  In the case of "probability variation big hit" which is controlled to the probability variation state after the end of the big jackpot game state, an odd number of decorative patterns (for example, "7" etc.) are stopped and displayed together, and after the end of the big jackpot game state, the probability variation state. In the case of "non-probability variation big hit (normal big hit)" that is not controlled, an even number of decorative symbols (for example, "6" etc.) may be stopped and displayed together. In this case, the odd decorative pattern is also referred to as a probability variation design, and the even decoration pattern is also referred to as a non-probability variation design (normal design). After reaching the reach mode with the non-probabilistic variation pattern, the promotion effect that finally becomes the “probability variation big hit” may be executed.

  When the display result of the special figure game is “small hit”, as a display result of the variable display of the decorative design on the screen of the image display device 905, a fixed decorative design (for example, ““ 1 3 5 ”) is derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is“ small hit ”). As an example, the decorative patterns forming the chance eyes are stopped and displayed on the predetermined effective lines in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative pattern display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R. It should be noted that the display result of the special figure game is "big hit" of some big hit types (big hit type of big hit game state of a mode similar to small hit game state) and when it is "small hit" , A common fixed decorative pattern may be derived and displayed.

  When the display result of the special drawing game is “miss”, the variable display mode of the decorative design is not the reach mode, and the fixed decorative pattern of the non-reach combination is displayed as the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (“ (Also referred to as "non-reach-miss") may be stopped (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes "non-reach-miss"). Further, when the display result is "miss", after the variable display mode of the decorative pattern becomes the reach mode, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is a predetermined reach combination other than the jackpot combination ("reach miss"). (Also referred to as) the fixed decorative pattern may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is "reach lost").

  The effects that can be executed by the pachinko gaming machine 901 include displaying the variable display corresponding display (hold display or active display). Further, as another effect, for example, a notice effect for giving a notice of the jackpot reliability is executed during the variable display of the decorative pattern. The notice production includes a notice production that gives a notice of the jackpot reliability in the variable display being executed and a look-ahead notice production that gives a notice of the jackpot reliability in the variable display before the execution (variable display in which execution is suspended). As the look-ahead notice effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the variable display corresponding display (hold display or active display) to a mode different from the normal mode may be executed.

  Further, in the image display device 905, the variable display is temporarily stopped during the variable display of the decorative pattern and then the variable display is resumed, so that one variable display can be seen as a pseudo multiple variable display. You may make it perform a pseudo continuous production.

  Even during the big hit game state, a big hit mid-game production for notifying the big hit game state is executed. As the big hit medium effect, an effect for notifying the number of rounds or a promotion effect indicating that the value of the big hit game state is improved may be executed. In addition, during the small hitting game state, the small hitting medium production which notifies the small hitting game state is executed. In addition, during the small hitting game state, in some big hitting type (the big hitting type of the big hitting game state of the mode which is similar to the small hitting game state, for example, the big hitting type which makes the following gaming state high accuracy state) By executing a common effect with the state, the player may not be able to know whether the present is in the small hitting game state or the big hitting game state. In such a case, it is not possible to distinguish between the high-accuracy state and the low-accuracy state by executing a common effect after the small hit game state and after the large hit game state. May be.

  Further, for example, when the special drawing game or the like is not executed, a demo (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 905 (customer waiting demonstration effect is executed).

(Substrate configuration)
The pachinko gaming machine 901 is equipped with, for example, a main board 9011, an effect control board 9012, a voice control board 9013, a lamp control board 9014, a relay board 9015, etc. as shown in FIG. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, and a power supply board are arranged on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 901.

  The main board 9011 is a control board on the main side, and progresses in the above-mentioned game in the pachinko gaming machine 901 (execution of special figure game (including hold management), execution of general figure game (including hold management), big hit It has a function of controlling the gaming state, the small hitting gaming state, the gaming state, etc.). The main board 9011 has a game control microcomputer 90100, a switch circuit 90110, a solenoid circuit 90111, and the like.

  The game control microcomputer 90100 mounted on the main board 9011 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 90101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 90102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 90103. , A random number circuit 90104 and an I / O (Input / Output port) 90105.

  The CPU 90103 executes a program stored in the ROM 90101 to perform a process of controlling the progress of the game (a process of realizing the function of the main board 9011). At this time, various data stored in the ROM 90101 (variation patterns described below, effect control commands described below, data such as various tables referred to when making various determinations described below) are used, and the RAM 90102 is used as a main memory. . The RAM 90102 is a backup RAM in which the stored contents are saved for a predetermined period even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 901 is partially or entirely stopped. Note that all or part of the program stored in the ROM 90101 may be expanded in the RAM 90102 and executed on the RAM 90102.

  The random number circuit 90104 counts updatable numerical value data indicating various random number values (game random numbers) used when controlling the progress of the game. The game random number may be updated by the CPU 90103 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

  I / O 90105 is, for example, an input port to which various signals (detection signals described later) are input, and various signals (first special symbol display device 904A, second special symbol display device 904B, normal symbol display 9020, first hold) An output port for transmitting a signal for controlling (driving) the display 9025A, the second hold indicator 9025B, the universal figure hold indicator 9025C, and the like, and an output port for transmitting the signal.

  The switch circuit 90110 is a detection signal from a variety of switches for detecting game balls (gate switch 9021, starting opening switch (first starting opening switch 9022A and second starting opening switch 9022B), count switch 9023) (a game ball passes or A detection signal indicating that a switch has been turned on when the vehicle has entered is taken in and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 90100. By the transmission of the detection signal, the passage or entry of the game ball is detected.

  The solenoid circuit 90111 sends a solenoid drive signal (for example, a signal for turning on the solenoid 9081 or the solenoid 9082) from the game control microcomputer 90100 to the solenoid 9081 for the ordinary electric auditors or the solenoid 9082 for the special winning opening door. To transmit.

  The main board 9011 (game control microcomputer 90100) is, as a part of the control of the progress of the game, a performance control command (command for designating (notifying) the progress of the game etc.) according to the progress of the game. 9012. The effect control command output from the main board 9011 is relayed by the relay board 9015 and supplied to the effect control board 9012. The effect control command includes, for example, various determination results on the main board 9011 (for example, a display result of the special figure game (including a big hit type), and a variation pattern used when executing the special figure game (details will be described later). )), The status of the game (for example, start and end of variable display, status of opening big winning opening, occurrence of winnings, number of held storages, game status), command for designating error, and the like.

  The effect control board 9012 is a sub-side control board that is independent of the main board 9011, receives an effect control command, and effects based on the received effect control command (various effects according to the progress of the game, It has a function of executing various notifications such as driving of the movable body 9032, error notification, and notification of power failure recovery.

  An effect control CPU 90120, a ROM 90121, a RAM 90122, a display control section 90123, a random number circuit 90124, and an I / O 90125 are mounted on the effect control board 9012.

  The effect control CPU 90120 executes a program stored in the ROM 90121 to execute a process together with the display control unit 90123 (a process for realizing the above function of the effect control board 9012, and an effect to be executed). (Including the determination of)). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 90121 is used, and the RAM 90122 is used as a main memory.

  The effect control CPU 90120 displays the execution of effect based on a detection signal from the controller sensor unit 9035A or the push sensor 9035B (a signal that is output when an operation by the player is detected, and a signal that appropriately indicates the operation content). It may instruct the control unit 90123.

  The display control unit 90123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), and the like, and executes an effect based on an effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 90120.

  The display control unit 90123 displays the effect image on the image display device 905 by supplying the image display device 905 with a video signal corresponding to the effect to be executed based on the effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 90120. The display control unit 90123 further supplies a sound designating signal (a signal designating a sound to be output) to the sound control board 9013 in order to perform sound output synchronized with the display of the effect image and turn on / off the game effect lamp 909. Alternatively, a lamp signal (a signal that specifies the lighting / extinguishing state of the lamp) is supplied to the lamp control board 9014. In addition, the display controller 90123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 9032 to the movable body 9032 or a driver circuit for driving the movable body 9032.

  The voice control board 9013 is equipped with various circuits for driving the speakers 908L and 908R, drives the speakers 908L and 908R based on the sound designating signal, and outputs the sound designated by the sound designating signal from the speakers 908L and 908R. Let

  The lamp control board 9014 is equipped with various circuits for driving the game effect lamp 909, drives the game effect lamp 909 based on the lamp signal, and turns on / off the game effect lamp 909 in a mode designated by the lamp signal. To do. In this way, the display control unit 90123 controls the audio output and the lighting / extinguishing of the lamp.

  The output control CPU 90120 executes audio output, control for turning on / off the lamp (supply of a sound designation signal or lamp signal, etc.) and control of the movable body 9032 (supply of a signal for operating the movable body 9032, etc.). You may do it.

  The random number circuit 90124 counts updatable the numerical data indicating various random number values (random numbers for effect) used for executing various effects. The effect random number may be updated by the effect control CPU 90120 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

  The I / O 90125 mounted on the production control board 9012 transmits, for example, an input port for capturing the production control command transmitted from the main board 9011 and the like and various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal). And an output port of.

  Substrates other than the main substrate 9011 such as the effect control substrate 9012, the sound control substrate 9013, and the lamp control substrate 9014 are also referred to as sub substrates. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function like the pachinko gaming machine 901, or one sub-board may have a plurality of functions.

(motion)
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 901 will be described.

(Main operation of main board 9011)
First, the main operation of the main board 9011 will be described. When power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 901 is started, the game control microcomputer 90100 is activated, and the CPU 90103 executes the game control main processing. FIG. 39 is a flow chart showing the game control main processing executed by the CPU 90103 on the main board 9011.

  In the game control main processing shown in FIG. 39, the CPU 90103 first sets interruption prohibition (step S901). Then, necessary initial setting is performed (step S902). The initial settings include stack pointer settings, internal device (CTC (counter / timer circuit), parallel input / output port, etc.) register settings, RAM 90102 accessible settings, and the like.

  Next, it is determined whether the output signal from the clear switch is on (step S903). The clear switch is mounted on the power supply board, for example. When the power is turned on with the clear switch turned on, an output signal (clear signal) is input to the game control microcomputer 90100 via the input port. If the output signal from the clear switch is on (step S903; Yes), the initialization process (step S908) is executed. In the initialization process, the CPU 90103 performs a RAM clear process for clearing the flag, counter, and buffer stored in the RAM 90102, and sets an initial value in the work area.

  Further, the CPU 90103 transmits an effect control command instructing initialization to the effect control board 9012 (step S909). When the production control CPU 90120 receives the production control command, for example, the image display device 905 displays a screen for notifying that the control of the gaming machine has been initialized.

  When the output signal from the clear switch is not on (step S903; No), it is determined whether backup data is stored in the RAM 90102 (backup RAM) (step S904). When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 901 is stopped due to an unexpected power failure or the like (power cut), the CPU 90103 executes the power supply stop processing immediately before the pachinko gaming machine 901 stops operating due to the stop of the power supply. In this power supply stop process, a process of turning on a backup flag indicating that data is backed up in the RAM 90102, a data protection process of the RAM 90102, and the like are executed. The data protection processing includes processing for adding an error detection code (checksum, parity bit, etc.) and backing up various data. The data to be backed up includes various data (including various flags, various timer states, etc.) for advancing the game, the state of the backup flag and an error detection code. In step S904, it is determined whether the backup flag is on. When the backup flag is off and the backup data is not stored in the RAM 90102 (step S904; No), the initialization process (step S908) is executed.

  When backup data is stored in the RAM 90102 (step S904; Yes), the CPU 90103 performs a data check on the backed up data (performed using an error detection code) and determines whether the data is normal (step S904). S905). In step S905, it is determined whether or not the data in the RAM 90102 matches the data at the time when the power supply is stopped, for example, based on the parity bit and the checksum. When it is determined that these match, it is determined that the data in the RAM 90102 is normal.

  If it is determined that the data in the RAM 90102 is not normal (step S905; No), the internal state cannot be returned to the state when the power supply was stopped, and therefore the initialization process (step S908) is executed.

  When it is determined that the data in the RAM 90102 is normal (step S905; Yes), the CPU 90103 performs a recovery process (step S906) for returning the internal state of the main board 9011 to the state when the power supply was stopped. In the recovery processing, the CPU 90103 sets the work area based on the storage content of the RAM 90102 (contents of backed up data). As a result, the game state is restored when the power supply is stopped, and if the special symbol is changing, the variation of the special symbol is restarted from the state before the restoration by executing the game control timer interrupt process described later. Will be.

  Then, the CPU 90103 transmits an effect control command for instructing recovery from power interruption to the effect control board 9012 (step S907). Along with this, a production control command for designating a backed-up game state before power interruption, and a production control for designating a display result of the special figure game being executed when the special figure game is being executed. You may make it transmit a command. For these commands, the same commands as the commands set for transmission in the special symbol process processing described later can be used. When the production control CPU 90120 receives the production control command that specifies the time of recovery from power failure, for example, the image display device 905 informs that recovery from power failure has been performed or is being recovered from power failure. The screen is displayed to The effect control CPU 90120 may display an appropriate screen based on the effect control command.

  After finishing the restoration process or the initialization process and transmitting the production control command to the production control board 9012, the CPU 90103 executes a random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 90104 (step S9010). Then, the CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 90100 is set so that a timer interrupt is taken at regular intervals (eg, 2 ms) (step S9011), and interrupts are permitted (step S9012). ). After that, the loop processing is started. Thereafter, the interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 90103 every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 90103 can periodically execute the timer interrupt process.

  Upon receiving the interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepting the interrupt request, the CPU 90103 that has executed the game control main process executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 40 is started, the CPU 90103 first executes a predetermined switch process to cause the gate switch 9021, the first start port switch 9022A, and the second start port via the switch circuit 90110. Whether or not a detection signal is received from various switches such as the switch 9022B and the count switch 9023 is determined (step S9021). Then, by executing a predetermined main side error processing, an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 901 is performed, and a warning can be issued if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S9022). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, jackpot information (information indicating the number of occurrences of jackpots) supplied to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 901, start information (starting). Data such as the number of times of winning) and probability variation information (information indicating the number of times of probability change) are output (step S9023).

  Following the information output process, a game random number updating process for updating at least a part of the game random numbers used on the main board 9011 side by software is executed (step S9024). After this, the CPU 90103 executes special symbol process processing (step S9025). The CPU 90103 executes the special symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, whereby the execution and suspension of the special symbol game, the control of the big hit game state and the small hit game state, the control of the game state, etc. are realized. See below).

  Following the special symbol process process, a normal symbol process process is executed (step S9026). The CPU 90103 executes the normal symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, and based on the detection signal from the gate switch 9021 (based on the passage of the game ball through the passage gate 9041) management of execution and suspension of the game, It is possible to control the opening of the variable winning ball device 906B based on the "universal figure hit". The execution of the general figure game is performed by driving the normal pattern display 9020, and the number of general figure reservations is displayed by turning on the general figure reservation display 9025C.

  After the normal symbol process process is executed, as a part of the game control timer interrupt process, a process when power failure occurs, a process for paying out a prize ball, etc. may be performed. After that, the CPU 90103 executes command control processing (step S9027). The CPU 90103 may set the transmission of the effect control command in each of the above processes. In the command control process of step S9027, a process of transmitting the effect control command set for transmission to the sub-side control board such as the effect control board 9012 is performed. After executing the command control process, the interrupt is permitted, and then the game control timer interrupt process is ended.

  FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S9025 shown in FIG. 40 as the special symbol process process. In this special symbol process process, the CPU 90103 first executes a start winning determination process (step S90101).

  In the start winning determination process, the process of detecting the occurrence of a start winning, storing the holding information in a predetermined area of the RAM 90102, and updating the number of holding storages is executed. When the start winning occurs, a random number value for determining the display result (including the big hit type) and the variation pattern is extracted and stored as holding information. Further, a process of pre-reading a display result or a variation pattern may be executed based on the extracted random number value. After storing the holding information and the number of holding memories, the transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command for designating the determination result such as the occurrence of the start winning, the number of holding memories, and the look-ahead determination is performed on the effect control board 9012. . The effect control command at the time of the winning winning set to be transmitted in this way is, for example, after the special symbol process process is completed, the command control process of step S9027 shown in FIG. Is transmitted to.

  After executing the start winning determination process in S90101, the CPU 90103 selects and executes any of the processes of steps S90110 to S90120 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the RAM 90102. In each process of the special symbol process process (steps S90110 to S90120), a transmission setting for transmitting an effect control command corresponding to each process to the effect control board 9012 is performed.

  The special symbol normal process of step S90110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "0" (initial value). In this special symbol normal process, it is determined whether or not to start the first special figure game or the second special figure game based on the presence or absence of the hold information. Also, in the special symbol normal process, based on the random number value for determining the display result, whether or not the display result of the special symbol or the decorative pattern is "big hit" or "small hit" and "big hit" type Is determined (predetermined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Furthermore, in the special symbol normal process, a fixed special symbol (either a big hit symbol, a small hit symbol, or a lost symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set corresponding to the determined display result. After that, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1", and the special symbol normal process ends. The special figure game using the second special figure may be executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure (also called special figure 2 priority digestion). Further, the winning order of the game balls to the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening may be stored, and the conditions for starting the special drawing game may be established in the winning order (also referred to as winning order winning).

  When making various determinations based on random number values, various tables stored in the ROM 90101 (a table in which a determination value to be compared with a random number value is assigned to the determination result) are referenced. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 9011 and various decisions on the effect control board 9012. In the effect control board 9012, various tables are stored in the ROM 90121.

  The fluctuation pattern setting process of step S90111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "1". This fluctuation pattern setting process uses a random value for fluctuation pattern determination to select one of a plurality of fluctuation patterns, based on the result of pre-determination of whether or not to display "big hit" or "small hit". It includes the processing to determine. In the fluctuation pattern setting process, when the fluctuation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the fluctuation pattern setting process ends.

  The fluctuation pattern is the execution time of the special drawing game (special drawing change time) (also the execution time of variable display of the decorative pattern), the mode of variable display of the decorative pattern (whether or not reach etc.), and the variable display of the decorative pattern. Is specified, and is also called a variable display pattern.

  The special symbol variation process of step S90112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "2". In this special symbol variation process, the setting process for changing the special symbol in the first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol display device 904B, and the elapsed time after the special symbol starts varying It includes the process of measuring. Further, it is also determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the variation of the special symbol reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3", and the special symbol variation process ends.

  The special symbol stop process of step S90113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "3". In this special symbol stop processing, the first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol display device 904B stop the fluctuation of the special symbol, and stop display (derive) the confirmed special symbol that is the display result of the special symbol. It includes a process to set up for. When the display result is "big hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off and the display result is "small hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "8". If the display result is "miss", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0". When the display result is "Small hit" or "Loss", the game state is updated when the time cut state or the probability variation state is controlled and the cut-out is completed. When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the special symbol stop processing ends.

  The jackpot opening preprocessing in step S90114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "4". This big hit opening pre-processing includes processing for starting the execution of the round in the big hit game state and setting the big winning opening in the open state based on the fact that the display result is "big hit". Has been. When the special winning opening is opened, a process of supplying a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 9082 for the special winning opening door is executed. At this time, for example, an open upper limit period for opening the special winning opening and an upper limit number of executions of the round are set according to which the big hit type is. When these settings are completed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and the big hit opening preprocessing is completed.

  The big hit opening process in step S90115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "5". In this big hit opening process, the process of measuring the elapsed time after opening the special winning opening and the big winning opening based on the measured elapsed time and the number of game balls detected by the count switch 9023 It includes a process of determining whether it is time to return the open state from the open state to the closed state. Then, when returning the special winning opening to the closed state, after performing a process of stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 9082 for the special winning opening door, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6", The big hit opening process is terminated.

  The jackpot opening post-processing of step S90116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "6". This big jackpot post-processing, processing to determine whether the number of executions of the round to open the special winning opening has reached the set upper limit number of executions, when the maximum number of executions has been reached, the jackpot gaming state It includes the process of setting to terminate the. When the round execution count has not reached the upper limit execution count, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", while when the round execution count reaches the upper limit execution number, the special figure process flag The value is updated to "7". After the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the jackpot release post-processing is ended.

  The big hit ending process of step S90117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "7". This big hit end processing, waiting processing until the waiting time corresponding to the period during which the ending effect as the effect operation for notifying the end of the big hit game state is executed, and the probability change corresponding to the end of the big hit game state It includes processing for performing various settings for starting control and time saving control. When such a setting is made, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot ending process ends.

  The small hit opening pre-processing of step S90118 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "8". This small hit opening pre-processing includes processing for setting the big winning opening in the small hit game state based on the display result of "small hit". At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "9", and the small hit opening preprocessing is ended.

  The small hitting open process in step S90119 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "9". This small hit opening process is the process of measuring the elapsed time after opening the big winning opening and the timing to return the big winning opening from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time etc. A process for determining whether or not it is included. When the timing for ending the small hitting game state is reached by returning the special winning opening to the closed state, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "10", and the processing for opening the small hitting ends.

  The small hit ending process of step S90120 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "10". The small hitting end process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period during which the effect operation for notifying the end of the small hitting game state is executed. Here, when the small hit game state ends, the game state in the pachinko gaming machine 901 before the small hit game state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small hitting game state has elapsed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the small hitting end processing ends.

(Main operation of production control board 9012)
Next, the main operation of the effect control board 9012 will be described. In the effect control board 9012, when the power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 90120 is activated to execute effect control main processing as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 42. When the effect control main process shown in FIG. 42 is started, the effect control CPU 90120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S9071) to clear the RAM 90122 and set various initial values, and to the effect control board 9012. Register settings of the installed CTC (counter / timer circuit) are performed. Also, the initial operation control process is executed (step S9072). In the initial operation control process, control for performing an initial operation of the movable body 9032 such as control for driving the movable body 9032 to return to the initial position and control for confirming a predetermined operation are executed.

  After that, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is turned on (step S9073). The timer interrupt flag is set to the ON state each time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses based on, for example, the CTC register setting. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S9073; No), the process of step S9073 is repeatedly executed and stands by.

  In addition, on the side of the effect control board 9012, an interrupt for receiving the effect control command from the main board 9011 is generated in addition to the timer interrupt that is generated each time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is, for example, an interrupt generated when the effect control INT signal from the main board 9011 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the effect control INT signal being turned on, the effect control CPU 90120 automatically sets the interrupt disable, but if a CPU that does not automatically enter the interrupt disable state is used, an interrupt occurs. It is desirable to issue a prohibition instruction (DI instruction). The effect control CPU 90120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, a performance control command is fetched from a predetermined input port of the input ports included in the I / O 90125 that receives the control signal transmitted from the main substrate 9011 via the relay substrate 9015. The effect control command fetched at this time is stored in, for example, the effect control command receiving buffer provided in the RAM 90122. After that, the production control CPU 90120 sets the interrupt permission, and then ends the command reception interrupt process.

  If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S9073 (step S9073; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared to the off state (step S9074), and the command analysis process is executed (step S9075). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various effect control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 90100 of the main board 9011 and stored in the effect control command receiving buffer, the read effect control commands are read. Corresponding settings and controls are performed. For example, the read effect control command is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 90122 or the RAM 90122 is stored in the RAM 90122 so that the effect control command received, the content specified by the effect control command, and the like can be confirmed by the effect control process processing. The reception flag provided is turned on. Further, when the effect control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 90123 may be instructed to display a background according to the game state.

  After executing the command analysis process in step S9075, the effect control process process is executed (step S9076). In the effect control process processing, for example, an effect image display operation in the display area of the image display device 905, a sound output operation from the speakers 908L and 908R, a lighting effect in a decorative light-emitting body such as a game effect lamp 909 and a decorative LED, and a movable body 9032. The control for operating various effect devices, such as the driving operation of, is performed. Further, with respect to the control contents of the effect operation using various effect devices, determination, determination, setting, etc. are performed in accordance with the effect control command transmitted from the main board 9011.

  Following the effect control process processing of step S9076, effect random number updating processing is executed (step S9077), and at least a part of the effect random numbers used on the effect control board 9012 side is updated by software. Then, the process returns to step S9073. Other processing may be performed before returning to the processing of step S9073.

  43 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S9076 of FIG. 42 as the effect control process process. In the effect control process processing shown in FIG. 43, the effect control CPU 90120 first executes prefetching advance notice setting processing (step S90161). In the pre-reading notice setting process, for example, determination, determination, setting, etc. for executing the pre-reading notice production are performed based on the effect control command at the time of start winning transmitted from the main board 9011. Further, a process for displaying the hold display is executed based on the number of hold memories specified by the effect control command.

  After executing the process of step S90161, the effect control CPU 90120 selects and executes any of the following processes of steps S90170 to S90177 according to the value of the effect process flag provided in the RAM 90122, for example.

  The variable display start waiting process of step S90170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start variable display of a decorative pattern in the image display device 905, based on whether or not a command or the like specifying start of variable display is received from the main board 9011. Etc. are included. When it is determined to start the variable display of the decorative pattern on the image display device 905, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “1”, and the variable display start waiting process is ended.

  The variable display start setting process of step S90171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "1". In this variable display start setting processing, based on the display result and the variation pattern specified by the effect control command, the display result of the variable display of the decorative design (fixed decorative pattern), the variable display mode of the decorative design, the reach effect and various The presence / absence of execution of various effects such as a notice effect, its mode, and execution start timing are determined. Then, the effect control pattern (collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 90123 to execute the effect) that reflects the determination result or the like is set. Then, based on the set effect control pattern, the display control unit 90123 is instructed to start the variable display of the decorative pattern, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is ended. The display control unit 90123 causes the image display device 905 to start the variable display of the decorative pattern by the instruction to start the variable display of the decorative pattern.

  The variable display effect process in step S90172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "2". In the effect display during variable display, the effect control CPU 90120 instructs the display control unit 90123 to display an effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S90171 on the display screen of the image display device 905. Or driving the movable body 9032, outputting voice or sound effect from the speakers 908L and 908R by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the sound control board 9013, and sending a command (illumination signal) to the lamp control board 9014. Various effect control is performed during variable display of the decorative pattern, such as turning on / off / blinking the game effect lamp 909 and the decorative LED by output. After performing such effect control, for example, an end code indicating the variable display end of the decorative pattern is read from the effect control pattern, or a command designating that the fixed decorative pattern is stopped and displayed from the main board 9011 is received. Corresponding to what has been done, the fixed decorative design which is the display result of the decorative design is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decorative design is stopped and displayed, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "3", and the variable display effect effect processing ends.

  The special figure winning waiting process of step S90173 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “3”. In this special figure winning waiting process, the effect control CPU 90120 determines whether or not the effect control command for designating the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state has been received from the main board 9011. Then, when the production control command for designating the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state is received, if the command designates the start of the big hit game state, the value of the production process flag is set to "6. Update to ". On the other hand, if the command specifies the start of the small hitting game state, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "4" which is a value corresponding to the effect processing during the small hitting. Also, when the waiting time for receiving the command has passed without receiving the command designating to start the big hit game state or the small hit game state, it is determined that the display result in the special figure game is “miss”. Then, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "0" which is the initial value. When the value of the effect process flag is updated, the special figure hit waiting process ends.

  The effect process during small hit in step S90174 is a process executed when the value of the effect control process flag is "4". In the effect processing during the small hit, the effect control CPU 90120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the effect contents in the small hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the small hit game state based on the setting contents. . Further, in the small hitting production process, the value of the production process flag is set to a value corresponding to the small winning finish production in response to receiving a command for ending the small winning game state from the main board 9011, for example. It is updated to a certain "5", and the effect processing during the small hit is ended.

  The small hit end production process of step S90175 is a process executed when the value of the production control process flag is "5". In this small hit completion effect processing, the effect control CPU 90120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the end of the small hit game state, and various effect controls at the end of the small hit game state based on the setting contents. To execute. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "0" which is the initial value, and the small hit end effect processing is ended.

  The big hit mid-hit effect process in step S90176 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "6". In this big hit mid-game production process, the effect control CPU 90120 sets, for example, a production control pattern or the like corresponding to the production contents in the big hit game state, and executes various production controls in the big hit game state based on the set contents. Further, in the big hit midfield effect process, the value of the effect control process flag is a value corresponding to the ending effect process, for example, in response to receiving a command designating termination of the big hit game state from the main board 9011. It updates to "7" and finishes the big hit midfield effect process.

  The ending effect process of step S90177 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "7". In this ending effect processing, the effect control CPU 90120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the end of the big hit game state, and various effect controls of the ending effect at the end of the big hit game state based on the setting contents. Run. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the ending effect process is ended.

(Variation of basic explanation)
The present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 901 described in the above basic description, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the spirit of the present invention.

  The pachinko gaming machine 901 in the above basic description was a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as a prize based on the occurrence of a prize, but encloses the game medium and gives a score based on the occurrence of a prize. It may be an enclosed game machine.

  What is displayed during variable display of the special symbol is only one type of symbol (for example, a symbol indicating "-"), and variable display may be performed by repeating display and extinction of the symbol. Further, even when the symbol is displayed during the variable display, the symbol does not have to be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" may not be displayed as the display result).

  In the above basic description, the pachinko gaming machine 901 is shown as a gaming machine, but a predetermined number of bets is set by inserting medals, and a plurality of types of symbols are rotated according to the operation of the operation lever by the player, so that the player A slot machine capable of executing a game in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to a player (for example, a big bonus when the stop symbol combination is a specific symbol combination when the symbols are stopped according to the operation of the stop button by The present invention can be applied to a slot machine in which one or more of regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter referred to as bonus) are mounted.

  The program and data for implementing the present invention are not limited to the form in which they are distributed and provided to a computer device included in the pachinko gaming machine 901 by a removable recording medium, and the computer device or the like in advance. It may be distributed by being installed in the storage device included in the. Further, the program and data for implementing the present invention may be distributed by being downloaded from another device on a network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communication processing unit. It doesn't matter.

  The game execution mode can be executed not only by mounting a removable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing the program and data downloaded via a communication line in the internal memory or the like. Alternatively, it may be directly executed by using the hardware resources of the other device on the network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game may be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

  It should be noted that in the present specification, one of the expressions for comparison of various ratios such as the execution ratio of the effect (expressions such as “high”, “low”, “different”) is “0%”. May be included. For example, it is also included that one is a ratio of "0%" and the other is a ratio of "100%" or a ratio less than "100%".

(Explanation regarding the characteristic part 31AK)
Next, the characteristic part 31AK of the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 44-1 is a diagram for explaining variation patterns and reach types in the pachinko gaming machine 901 of the present embodiment. As shown in FIG. 44-1 (A), in the present embodiment, the variable pattern PA1′-1, which is a non-reach loss pattern, in which the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is not the reach mode and the display result is “miss”, PA1'-2, reach pattern of variable display of the decorative pattern is the reach mode and the display result is "miss". Reach loss variation patterns PA2'-1 to PA2'-6, PA3'-1 to PA3'-4, etc. Variation patterns PB2'-1 to PB2'-6, PB3'-1 to PB3'-4, etc., in which the display result is "big hit" are prepared.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 44-1 (B), in the present embodiment, reach effects such as normal reach and super reach A to E are executed. In this embodiment, the reach effect is also referred to as a suggestion effect that suggests that the jackpot state is controlled. As shown by the number of black stars in FIG. 44-1 (B), the reliability (big hit reliability) when each reach is executed is normal reach <super reach E <super reach D <super reach C <super reach. Reach B becomes higher in the order of super reach A. In addition, you may provide the reach which determines that it is a big hit.

  In this embodiment, the super reach is executed via the normal reach. Further, during the reach effect of the super reach, there is a case where the development effect of developing (promoting) to reach with higher reliability is executed. The variation patterns PA3′-1 to PA3′-4 and the like, which are shown in FIG. 44-1 (A), the variation patterns PB3′-1 to PB3′-4 and the like, are variation patterns corresponding to the execution of the development effect. ing. Note that FIG. 44-1 (A) shows a variation pattern in which the reliability develops to one level higher super reach, but a variation pattern in which the reliability develops more than two stages is also provided. Also, a variation pattern in which the development effect is executed multiple times may be provided.

  In this embodiment, except for the normal reach, which has the lowest reliability, the title of the reach is notified at a predetermined timing after the reach is established. As shown in FIG. 44-1 (B), the title notification mode differs depending on the reach type. Specifically, the super-reach E, which has the lowest reliability among the super-reach, is notified of the title of the reach only by display, and the super-reach other than that is notified of the title by display and voice. In this way, the notification of the title is executed by more production devices in the reach with high reliability than in the reach with low reliability. As a result, the player's expectation can be effectively agitated, and the effect of production is improved. Note that the title notification mode may be changed depending on the reliability or irrespective of the reliability. Further, even in the same reach effect, the notification mode may be changed according to the actual display result or the like. Also, the font of the title characters (Gothic font, Mincho font, etc.) and typeface (line book, open book, etc.) may be different depending on the type of reach.

  The notification of the title of the reach (title notification) is not limited to the title itself such as the name of the reach, and may be the name of the character appearing in the reach effect, the effect content of the reach effect, or the like.

(Example of performance operation of the characteristic part 31AK)
Subsequently, an example of the effect operation in the present embodiment will be described. The following production operation is executed by the production control CPU 90120 executing the production control process process based on the production control command transmitted from the main board 9011. FIG. 44-2 and FIG. 44-3 are diagrams showing an example of the effect operation of super reach in the present embodiment. FIG. 44-2 (A) shows that the variable display of the decorative pattern is executed in each of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative pattern display areas 905L, 905C, 905R of the image display device 905. ing. After that, for example, as shown in FIG. 44-2 (B), the decorative pattern showing the number 7 on “left” and “right” is stopped, and the reach mode is set. After that, the effect branches according to the type of reach.

(Super reach A)
In the case of Super Reach A, as shown in FIG. 44-2 (C), the character 31AK001, which is a ally character, is displayed on the image display device 905, and the reach effect is started. Here, for example, an animation or the like using the character 31AK001 is displayed. When a predetermined period of time elapses from the start of the super reach effect, such as when the introduction part of the reach effect of the super reach (also referred to as super reach effect) is finished, as shown in FIG. The title 31AK002 of Super Reach A (here, the characters "SP Reach A") is displayed on the entire screen, and the voice corresponding to the title name of Reach (here "Super Reach A") is output from the speaker 908. As a result, the title of Super Reach A is announced. Then, the title 31AK002 of the super reach A is erased, the character 31AK003 which is an enemy character is displayed, the dialogue 31AK004 of the character 31AK001 is displayed, or the character 31AK001 and the character 31AK003 are displayed as shown in FIG. 44-2 (E). The succeeding part of the reach effect of the super reach A that is confronted with is executed. The production in which the characters confront each other is also called a battle production, and when the teammate character wins in the battle production, it becomes a big hit, and when the teammate character is defeated, it becomes a loss.

  Note that when the dialogue is displayed on the image display device 905 during the super reach effect, the speaker 908 may output a voice corresponding to the dialogue. Further, the dialogue is not limited to being displayed in a balloon as shown in FIG. 44-2 (E), and may be displayed in subtitles on the lower portion of the image display device 905 or the like.

(Super reach B)
In the case of Super Reach B, as shown in FIG. 44-2 (C), the character 31AK001 is displayed on the image display device 905 and the reach effect is started. Here, for example, an animation or the like using the character 31AK001 is displayed. When a predetermined period of time elapses from the start of the super reach effect, such as the end of the introduction part of the super reach effect, as shown in FIG. (“SP reach B” in this case) is displayed, and the voice corresponding to the title name of reach (“super reach B” in this case) is output from the speaker 908, whereby the title of super reach B is displayed. Be informed. After that, the title 31AK005 of the super reach B is erased, the character 31AK006 which is an enemy character is displayed, the dialogue 31AK004 of the character 31AK001 is displayed, or the character 31AK001 and the character 31AK006 are displayed as shown in FIG. 44-2G. The succeeding part of the reach effect of the super reach B, which is to be confronted with, is executed.

  In this way, in the super reach A and the super reach B, the reach title is notified when a predetermined period has elapsed since the super reach effect was started. By doing so, the title can be notified after the player has shown the introduction part of the super reach effect, etc., so that the effect of the title notification can be enhanced.

  In addition, super reach A (FIG. 44-2 (C) → (D) → (E) ...) and super reach B (FIG. 44-2 (C) → (F) → (G) ...) Then, in the introduction part until the title is notified, the super reach effect is executed in a common effect mode (FIG. 44-2 (C)). By doing so, it is possible to make the player pay attention to which super-reach will be performed after the super-reach effect is started and which title will be notified. Super-reach A and super-reach B are not limited to completely commoning the presentation mode until the title is informed, and it is possible to determine which super-reach will be achieved by paying attention to the production. You may make it a common production mode. For example, in the introduction part of the super reach A and the super reach B, the super reach effect (for example, the effect of displaying the enemy character or suggesting the enemy character) is executed in a mode related to the subsequently notified title. You may By doing so, the effect of the effect is improved, and the player comes to pay attention to the effect. In this way, the title notification may be performed after it is possible to specify which super-reach will be performed.

(Super Reach D)
In the case of Super Reach D, as shown in FIG. 44-2 (H), the title 31AK007 of Super Reach D (here, the character “SP Reach D”) is displayed in a part of the center of the image display device 905. At the same time, the speaker 908 outputs a voice corresponding to the title name of the reach (“defeat the enemy” in this case), so that the title of the super reach D is notified. As described above, in the super reach D, the title is notified at the start of the super reach effect. Further, below the title 31AK007, an expectation suggestion display 31AK008 that indicates the expectation of the reach is displayed. The degree of expectation is represented by the number of black stars, as shown in FIG. Here, the expectation is the expectation of a big hit, but it does not have to be exactly the same as the reach's big hit reliability.

  It should be noted that the notification by the voice of the super reach D does not notify the title name as it is, but notifies the contents of the reach. As described above, in this embodiment, the notification mode of the title notification by voice is different depending on the type of reach. As a result, the notification mode of the title notification is diversified, and the interest is improved.

  After the title is notified in the super reach D, the character 31AK001 is displayed on the image display device 905 as shown in FIG. 44-2 (I). At this time, the title 31AK007 and the expectation suggestion display 31AK008 continue to be reduced and displayed in the upper right portion of the image display device 905 or the like. By doing so, the player can grasp the degree of expectation of the reach even during the reach production. Note that FIG. 44-2 (I) shows the effect contents common to FIG. 44-2 (C) (super reach A, super reach B), but the super reach effect dedicated to super reach D is executed. May be.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 44-2 (J), the character 31AK009, which is an enemy character, is displayed, the dialogue 31AK004 of the character 31AK001 is displayed, and the reach effect of the super reach D in which the character 31AK001 and the character 31AK009 confront each other is displayed. To be executed.

(Super reach E)
In the case of Super Reach E, as shown in FIG. 44-3 (A), the title 31AK010 of Super Reach E (here, the characters “SP Reach E”) is displayed in a part of the upper left of the image display device 905. As a result, the title of Super Reach E is announced. In Super Reach E, the title is not notified by voice. In addition to the display of the title 31AK010, the character 31AK001 and the character 31AK011 that is an enemy character are displayed, the dialogue 31AK004 of the character 31AK001 is displayed, and the reach effect of the super reach E in which the character 31AK001 and the character 31AK011 confront each other. To be executed. As described above, in the super reach E, the title is notified along with the progress of the reach effect. In Super Reach E, title 31AK010 continues to be displayed during the reach production.

  In the reach effect of the super reach E with low jackpot reliability, it is possible to prevent the player from having excessive expectations by notifying the title without stopping the reach effect. On the other hand, in the reach effects of Super Reach A, Super Reach B and Super Reach D, the progress of the reach effects is stopped and the title is notified (FIGS. 44-2 (D) and (F)). , (H)). By doing so, the title notification corresponding to the super reach effect can be executed, and the effect of the effect is improved. In addition, in the super reach effects such as super reach A, super reach B, and super reach D, the title notification may be performed without stopping the progress of the reach. Contrary to this embodiment, in the reach effect of super reach with high jackpot reliability, title notification may be performed without stopping the progress of the reach effect. In the reach effect of super reach with low jackpot reliability, the progress of the reach effect may be stopped to notify the title.

(Timing notification timing)
As described above, in this embodiment, in Super Reach A and Super Reach B, the title is notified after a predetermined period has elapsed after the start of Super Reach production, and in Super Reach D and Super Reach E, the super reach production is performed. The title is announced at the start. By doing so, the title notification according to the reach effect can be executed, and the effect of the effect is improved. In this embodiment, in Super Reach A and Super Reach B, which have a high jackpot reliability, the title is announced after a predetermined period has passed after the start of the super reach production, and Super Reach D and Super Reach that have a low jackpot reliability are announced. In E, the title was announced at the start of super reach production, but in the case of reach with high jackpot reliability, the title was announced at the start of super reach production, and in the case of reach with low jackpot reliability, super The title may be announced after a predetermined period has elapsed after the reach effect.

(Title display area)
Further, in this embodiment, in Super Reach A and Super Reach B, the title is notified on the entire screen (first area) of the image display device 905, and in Super Reach D and Super Reach E, the image display device 905 is displayed. The title is announced in a part (second area) of the screen. By doing so, the title notification according to the reach effect can be executed, and the effect of the effect is improved. In particular, in the case of a reach with high jackpot reliability, the title notification is executed in a wider display area than in the case of a reach with low reliability, so that effective title notification is possible. The title notification on the entire screen of the image display device 905 may be that the title is displayed in a size that fits the entire screen, or the entire background is used as a background for the title notification and the title is displayed there. It may be a thing (title notification using the entire screen) or the like. Further, the display area for performing the title notification may be different between the super reach A and the super reach B, or the display area for performing the title notification may be different between the super reach D and the super reach E.

  The method of changing the display area in which the title notification is performed according to the reach effect is not limited to the example of the present embodiment, and the display area in which the title notification is performed according to the reach effect may be arbitrarily changed. For example, in the case of a reach with high jackpot reliability, the title notification may be executed in a narrower display area than in the case of a reach with low reliability. Further, in the case of changing the display area for performing the title notification according to the reach effect, the display area may be changed as in this embodiment, or the display place may be changed.

(Expectation level indication)
In this embodiment, in the title notification in super-reach A and super-reach B having a high jackpot reliability, super-reach D having a jackpot reliability lower than that of super-reach A and super-reach B is displayed without displaying the expectation indication. In the title notification in, the expectation degree suggestion display was displayed. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the production from becoming dull. In addition, in the title notification in Super Reach E, which has a lower jackpot reliability than Super Reach D, the expectation level indication is not displayed. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the player from losing his / her expectation by displaying the expectation suggestion display indicating that the reliability is low in the reach with low reliability. It should be noted that the expectation suggestion display may be displayed on at least a part of super reach A, super reach B, and super reach E.

  Note that the expectation level indication is not limited to that indicated by the number of black stars, as shown in FIG. 44-2 (H), and the expectation level may be indicated by a meter or gauge. You may make it display the numerical value corresponding to. Further, as shown in FIG. 44-2 (H) and the like, in the case of being indicated by the number of black stars, half the number (half) of black stars can be displayed, and the number of stages of expectation may be increased. .

(Timing display end timing)
In addition, in this embodiment, in super reach A and super reach B, after the title is displayed, the title is erased and the super reach effect is executed. Thereby, in the super reach A and the super reach B, the reach effect can be focused. Further, in Super Reach D and Super Reach E, after the title is displayed, the title continues to be displayed until the determination effect described below is executed. As a result, in super reach D and super reach E, the type of reach can be grasped even during super reach production. Further, by the above, the title notification according to the reach effect can be executed, and the effect of the effect is improved. It should be noted that the title display end timing may be changed at any timing because the effect can be improved at any timing.

  Here, although the effect operation of the reach effect of the super reach C is omitted, for example, title notification or expectation degree suggestion display according to the jackpot reliability may be executed.

(Decision production)
After each reach effect is executed, at the timing of deriving the display result (the final stage of the variable display), the decided effect for notifying whether or not the display result is the “big hit” is executed. The decision effect includes a decision effect indicating that the display result is “big hit” and a decision effect indicating that the display result is “miss”. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 44-3 (B), a decided effect in which the image 31AK012 is displayed on the image display device 905 is executed. Thereafter, if the display result is "big hit", as shown in FIG. 44-3 (C), an image 31AK013 indicating that the teammate character has won is displayed, and as shown in FIG. 44-3 (D). A definite decorative pattern that is a jackpot combination is derived. If the display result is “miss”, an image showing that the teammate character has been defeated is displayed, and a fixed decorative pattern that is a reach lose combination is derived.

  In this embodiment, even when the title is continuously notified even during the reach effect, the notification of the title is ended before the decided effect is executed. As a result, it is possible to focus attention on the decided effect, and it is possible to execute the title notification with a sharp effect.

  In the effect operation examples shown in FIGS. 44-2 and 44-3, during the reach effect of the super reach, the decorative pattern is reduced in the lower right portion of the image display device 905 to perform variable display. The display of the decorative pattern during the reach production may be arbitrary. For example, the decorative design may not be displayed during the reach effect, and the display mode (size, position, shade, number, etc.) may be changed depending on the type of the reach effect.

  When displaying a hold display, an active display, a character that is permanently displayed during variable display, and a display related to mobile device linkage on the image display device 905, during the reach production of super reach, it is not displayed as appropriate in order to draw attention to the reach production. May be At that time, these displays may be kept displayed during the reach production with low reliability such as the super reach E. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the player from expecting excessively due to the reach effect with low reliability, and to focus on the reach effect in the reach effect with high reliability.

(Development production)
Next, an example of a production operation when the development production is executed will be described. As shown in FIG. 44-4 (A), when the development effect is executed while the reach effect of super reach D is being executed (the title notification of super reach D is being executed), FIG. As shown in (B), an effect that the reach effect is interrupted and the screen is torn is executed. After that, when developing to the super reach A, as shown in FIG. 44-4 (C), the title of the super reach A is notified and the reach effect of the super reach A is executed. In the case of development into super reach B, as shown in FIG. 44-4 (D), the title of super reach B is notified and the reach effect of super reach is executed. In this way, when the development effect is executed, the notification of the title of the reach of the development source is switched to the notification of the title of the reach of the development destination, which makes it easy to understand which reach has been developed. As shown in FIG. 44-4, in the case where the reach of the development destination is the reach for performing the title notification by the display and the sound, the title notification by the display and the sound is executed again.

  Note that the development effect is not limited to the example shown in FIG. 44-4 (B), and may be an effect in which the screen gradually cracks and cracks, or a sandstorm (display indicating that a failure has occurred). It may be displayed. With such an effect, an unexpected effect can be executed. It should be noted that there may be a developmental development of gasse, such as a production in which the screen gradually cracks but the reach does not develop.

(Expectation suggestion)
In the effect operation example shown in FIG. 44-2 (H), the expected degree suggestion display 31AK008 was designed to display a black star indicating the expected degree from the beginning, but five white stars are displayed first, It is also possible to execute the expectation suggesting effect in which the expectation is suggested by becoming a black star.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 44-5 (A), when announcing the title of Super Reach D, five white star expectation degree indications 31AK021 are displayed first. Then, as shown in FIG. 44-5 (B), a black star 31AK022 larger than the star of the expectation indication 31AK021 is displayed, and as shown in FIG. 44-5 (C), the black star 31AK022 moves and is expected. An effect that fits into one of the white stars of the degree suggestion display 31AK021 is executed. At this time, the speaker 908 outputs a sound “pin” indicating that the number of black stars indicating the degree of expectation has increased. As shown in FIGS. 44-5 (D) and (E), the same effect is repeated a number of times corresponding to the degree of expectation of reach. At this time, the sound (volume, scale, sound quality, etc.) output from the speaker 908 may be changed stepwise every time it is repeated (for each number of stars). When the number of black stars corresponding to the degree of expectation has settled in the degree-of-expectation suggestion display 31AK021, as shown in FIG. 44-5 (F), the black star is highlighted such that it glows. By doing this, it becomes easy to understand that the expectation suggestion production has ended.

  In the example shown in FIGS. 44-5 (A) to (F), the black stars are displayed one by one, and the expectation degree indicated by the expectation suggestion display is increased by one step. One or more may be displayed and the degree of expectation may be increased by two or more levels. Alternatively, half the black stars may be displayed to raise the expectation by half. In this case, different voices may be output, or the same voice may be output, depending on the number of stars displayed (the number of stages of expected degree of increase). For example, the same sound may be output when half a black star is displayed and when one black star is displayed. The same sound may be output when two and a half black stars are displayed and when three black stars are displayed. Further, there may be a case where no sound is output. By doing so, the expectation degree suggestive effect is diversified, and the effect of the effect is improved. Note that the same black star image is displayed regardless of the number of steps of the degree of expectation that increases at one time, and it fits in the white star of the degree of expectation indication, and the number of black stars increases according to the number of steps of the degree of expectation that increases. You may make it perform the effect which does.

(Direction mode)
There may be a plurality of effect modes in the effect devices such as the image display device 905, the speaker 908, and the game effect lamp 909. In different effect modes, even if the same command (for example, a command that specifies a variation pattern) is transmitted from the main board 9011, effects based on the command are executed in different effect modes. In each effect mode, the background displayed on the image display device 905, the character, the motif, the voice output from the speaker 908, and the like may be different. The effect mode may be automatically changed according to the number of times of variable display or the game state, or may be changeable by the operation of the player.

  44-5 (G) to (L) are example production operations of title notification and expectation suggestion production in the special mode when the normal mode and the special mode are provided as the production modes. In the normal mode, title notification and expectation suggestion effect are executed as shown in FIGS. 44-5 (A) to 44 (F). In the special mode, the reach effect based on the variation pattern of super reach D is the reach effect of super reach D2 having a different effect mode from the reach effect of super reach D. Therefore, when the variation pattern of super reach D is designated, the title 31AK023 of super reach D2 is displayed as shown in FIG. 44-5 (G). At this time, a sound corresponding to the reach title name is output from the speaker 908, but a sound different from the normal mode (for example, a sound having a different voice color) is output. Further, the expectation indication 31AK024 in the super reach D2 is not a star shape but a rhombus shape.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 44-5 (H), a black diamond 31AK025 larger than the star in the expectation indication 31AK024 is displayed, and as shown in FIG. 44-5 (I), the black diamond 31AK025 moves and is expected. An effect that fits in one of the white diamonds of the degree suggestion display 31AK024 is executed. At this time, the speaker 8 outputs the sound "Pong" indicating that the black diamonds indicating the degree of expectation have increased. As shown in FIGS. 44-5 (J) and (K), the same effect is repeated the number of times corresponding to the expectation of reach. When the number of black rhombuses corresponding to the degree of expectation has been set in the expectation degree suggestion display 31AK024, the black rhombus is highlighted such as shining as shown in FIG. 44-5 (L). In this way, depending on the effect mode (state when the reach effect is executed) that is determined according to the player's selection, the game status, etc., the title notification mode is made different, and the effect is diversified. improves.

  FIG. 44-5 shows an example of the effect operation when the variation pattern of the super reach D is designated, but other reach effects (title notification, expectation level) depending on the effect mode (state when the reach effect is executed). (Including suggestive effects) may be different. Depending on the effect mode (the state when the reach effect is executed), whether or not to notify the title of the reach and the execution rate of the title notification may be changed. For example, when a predetermined effect mode is selected, the reach title may not be notified. By doing so, the effect according to the preference of the player can be executed, and the effect of the effect is improved.

  In this embodiment, the expectation degree is suggested by the number of black stars in the expectation suggestion display, and the expectation suggestion effect that gradually increases the number of black stars is executed. You may make it perform the expectation suggestion production which reduces the number of the display which suggests stepwise. Such an anticipation suggestion effect may be executed in addition to the anticipation suggestion effect of this embodiment, or may be executed instead.

(Other example of development production)
In the case of executing the expectation suggesting effect in which the display showing the expectation of the expectation suggesting display is increased stepwise, the development effect may be executed after increasing the display showing the expectation. In this case, when the display indicating the degree of expectation is increased after the development effect, the display to be increased may be displayed at once instead of stepwise. For example, as shown in FIG. 44-6 (A), after the title of Super Reach D is announced and the effect of gradually increasing the black star is completed, as shown in FIG. 44-6 (B), the image display is performed. The development effect in which the button image 31AK031 is displayed on the device 905 is executed. Here, when the operation on the push button 9031B is detected, the title 31AK032 of the super reach C (here, the character "SP reach C") is displayed as shown in FIG. 44-6 (C). , The title of Super Reach C is announced. In this way, when the development effect is executed, the notification of the title of the reach of the development source is switched to the notification of the title of the reach of the development destination, which makes it easy to understand which reach has been developed. Further, below the title 31AK032, an expectation suggestion display 31AK033 in which the number of black stars is 3 is highlighted. Even if the number of black stars increases by two or more, they are displayed at once. It should be noted that, after the movable body 9032 operates, the development effect in which the title and the expectation suggestion display change may be executed.

(Preliminary notice)
In this embodiment, as a notice effect, a title notice for notifying the jackpot reliability is executed according to the title notification mode (for example, the title display color). For example, as shown in FIG. 44-7 (A), the title 31AK036 of the super reach A is displayed in black, and the sound corresponding to the title name of the reach is output from the speaker 908, whereby the title of the super reach A is displayed. After the notification, the title notice that the display color of the title 31AK036 changes to red is executed as shown in FIG. 44-7 (B). As described above, the title is displayed in black when the title announcement is not executed, and the title is displayed in a color other than black when the title announcement is executed. In the title notice shown in FIG. 44-7, the title display mode (display color) may change after the reach title is announced by voice. By doing so, the effect of the notice effect can be enhanced. The timing of displaying the title in a color other than black is not limited to this, and the title may be displayed in a color other than black from the start of display.

  In addition, when the title announcement in which the display mode (display color) of the title is changed is executed, a sound corresponding to the changed display mode may be output after the display mode of the title is changed. By doing so, the effect of the notice effect can be enhanced. Further, the title notification by voice may be executed after the display mode (display color) of the title is changed. In this case, sound may be output according to the display mode (display color) of the changed title.

(Timing notification execution timing)
It is preferable that the notification of the title during the reach is executed at a timing other than the execution timing of the effect (specific effect) such as the notice effect or the development effect in which the degree of expectation that is controlled to the big hit advantageous state is improved. By doing so, when the title is once notified, an effect that improves the degree of expectation can be executed, so that the player's sense of expectation can be maintained.

  FIG. 44-8 is a flowchart showing an example of the notice effect determination process for determining whether or not to execute the notice effect and the manner of effect. The notice effect determination process is executed by the effect control CPU 90120 within the variable display start setting process of step S90171 of FIG. 43. In the notice effect determination process, the effect control CPU 90120 first determines whether or not the variation pattern specified by the command transmitted from the main board 9011 is a super reach variation pattern (step 31AKS001).

  If it is a variation pattern of super reach (step 31AKS001; Yes), the display color of the title of super reach (whether or not to execute the title notice) is determined (step 31AKS002).

  In step 31AKS002, the display color of the title of the super reach is determined at the determination ratio shown in FIG. 44-9A, for example, depending on whether the display result is "big hit" or "miss". As shown in Fig.44-9 (A), the display color of the title of Super Reach is changed from "black", "red", "black" to "red", and "black" to "fruit pattern". There are those that change, and those that change from "red" to "fruit pattern" are provided, and the jackpot reliability is high in this order (ascending order). That is, the jackpot reliability varies depending on the timing of change in the title display color. By doing so, the player comes to pay attention to the change timing of the display color of the title, and the effect of production is improved.

  Note that the "fruit pattern" may be such that the title characters are displayed in bold type and the characters themselves are the "fruit pattern", or the background portion of the title display area may be the "fruit pattern". . There may be a pattern displayed as "fruit pattern" from the beginning. As for the display color changing, as shown in FIG. 44-7, the display color may change after the title notification is executed. As for the display color changing, there may be a plurality of timings when the display color changes. Then, the jackpot reliability may be changed according to the timing at which the display color changes. Further, since the title display period varies depending on the type of super reach, the timing at which the display color changes may vary depending on the type of super reach. In the case of super-reach (for example, super-reach D or super-reach E) having a long title display period, a plurality of changing timings may be provided and the changing timing may be determined. Then, in the case of a super-reach with a short title display period (for example, super-reach A or super-reach B), the number of changing timings may be one or less than that of a super-reach with a long title display period.

  When there are a normal mode and a special mode as the effect modes, the display color of the title is determined at the determination ratio shown in FIG. 44-9 (A) in the normal mode, and as shown in FIG. 44-9 (B) in the special mode. Determine the display color of the title at a rate different from the normal mode. In the special mode, the display color pattern and the order of reliability may be different from those in the normal mode. In this way, by changing the execution mode (display color or change timing of the display color) of the title notice depending on the effect mode, the effect is diversified and the effect is improved.

  In this embodiment, as a notice effect, a dialogue notice for notifying the jackpot reliability is executed according to the display mode (for example, the display color of the dialogue) of the character in the reach production of the super reach.

  After determining the display color of the title of the super reach, the display color of the character dialogue (whether or not to execute the dialogue notice) in the reach production of the super reach is determined (step 31AKS003).

  In step 31AKS003, the display color of the dialogue in the reach effect is determined, for example, at the determination ratio shown in FIG. 44-9 (C) depending on whether the display result is “big hit” or “miss”. As shown in FIG. 44-9 (C), the display color of the lines in the reach effect is set to “white”, “red”, and a color that changes from “white” to “red”. ), The jackpot reliability is high. That is, the jackpot reliability differs depending on the change timing of the display color of the dialogue. By doing so, the player pays attention to the change timing of the display color of the dialogue and the effect is improved. For the display color changing, the display color may be changed after the dialogue is displayed. As for the display color changing, there may be a plurality of timings when the display color changes. Then, the jackpot reliability may be changed according to the timing at which the display color changes.

  Further, the jackpot reliability may be different depending on the combination of the performance modes of the title notice and the dialogue notice. For example, when the title notice and the dialogue notice include the same effect mode (display color), the jackpot reliability may be increased when the effect modes are the same. Further, the jackpot reliability may be different depending on the combination of the timings of changing the presentation mode of the title announcement and the dialogue announcement. For example, when the change timings are the same, the jackpot reliability may be higher than when the change timings are different, or the jackpot reliability may be changed depending on which change comes first. By doing so, it is possible to draw attention to the respective change timings of the title notice and the dialogue notice.

  When the normal mode and the special mode are provided as the effect modes, the display color of the dialogue may be determined in the special mode at a rate different from that of the normal mode. In the special mode, the display color pattern and the order of reliability may be different from those in the normal mode.

  It should be noted that instead of the speech notice, a notice effect for notifying the jackpot reliability may be executed by changing the effect mode of the reach effect. In that case, in the notice production, a plurality of change timings of the production mode may be provided so that the jackpot reliability varies according to the change timing.

  After the display color of the dialogue in the reach effect is determined, or when it is determined that it is not the variation pattern of the super reach (step AK31S001; No), the presence / absence of execution and the effect mode are determined for other notice effects (step AK31S004). After that, the determination results of 31AKS002 to 31AKS004 are stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 90122 (step AK31S005), and the notice effect determination process is ended.

  In addition, in this embodiment, the title notice and the line notice can be executed in the case of super-reach, but the title notice in the case of a specific super-reach (for example, except super-reach with low reliability) is possible. Alternatively, at least one of the speech notice and the notice may be made executable. Further, the title notice and the dialogue notice have been described as being determined by the determination rate shown in FIG. 44-9, but the determination rate is arbitrary and, for example, the determination rate may be different depending on the type of super reach. Good. By doing so, the notice effect corresponding to the type of reach can be executed, and the effect of the effect is improved.

  In this embodiment, the number of executable presentation modes (the number of display colors that can be displayed) differs between the title notice and the dialogue notice. By doing so, the effects are varied and the effect of the effect is enhanced. In the title notice and the dialog notice, the number of executable production modes may be arbitrarily changed, and the number and types of executable production modes may be the same. By doing so, it is possible to execute the notice production with a sense of unity, and it becomes easier for the player to grasp the jackpot reliability.

(Action production)
When the effect form of the title notice and the dialogue notice changes, an effect indicating that the effect form changes may be executed. For example, the action effect image may be displayed on the image display device 905, and the action effect in which the image acts on at least one of the title and the dialogue may be executed. Then, after the action effect is executed, the effect mode (display color) of the title or the dialogue may be changed. The effect mode (effect effect image or the like) of the effect effect may be common regardless of whether it acts on the title or the dialogue. In addition, there may be a case where the effect mode of the title or the dialogue does not change even though the effect effect is executed. When the action effect is executed, the presence / absence of execution of the action effect, the execution timing, and the effect mode may be determined based on the determination result related to the title notice and the dialogue notice. Such a determination may be executed by the process of step AK31S004. For example, the rate at which at least one of the title notice and the dialogue notice changes according to the effect mode of the action effect (the rate at which the effect mode changes due to the action effect) may differ, or the title effect may change. The ratio of which presentation mode changes (the ratio of which effect) may be different from that of the serif notice, or the number of colors (how many stages) to change may be different. . By executing such action effect, the player pays attention to which one of the title and the dialogue acts when the action effect image is displayed, and the effect is improved. When there are a plurality of effect modes, the presence / absence of execution of effect effects and the effect mode may be determined at different rates depending on the effect modes. By doing so, the effect effect according to the effect mode can be executed, and the effect effect is improved.

  As another example of such action effect, at least one effect mode (display color) of one of a title and a dialogue is displayed according to the effect content of the reach effect (for example, the action content of the character or the effect content in the battle effect). May be changed. By doing so, the player comes to pay attention to the effect contents of the reach effect.

  The present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 901 described in the above characteristic section 31AK, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the spirit of the present invention. For example, all the characteristic portions described in the above embodiments are not essential configurations, and can be omitted as appropriate.

(Sub liquid crystal)
As a sub display device different from the image display device 905, a sub liquid crystal may be provided in the game board 902 or the game machine frame 903. Although referred to as a sub liquid crystal here, the sub display device may be configured by an organic EL or a dot matrix LED. The sub liquid crystal device may be fixed, for example, near the image display device 905, or may be a movable type or a retractable type. On the sub liquid crystal, various effects such as a notice effect and a hold display are executed. For example, the title notification may be performed on the sub liquid crystal. When the title is continuously displayed after the notification of the title like the super reach D and the super reach E of the above-described embodiment, the title or the degree of expectation suggestion display may be displayed on the sub liquid crystal. In this case, the title or the expectation suggestion display may be displayed on the sub liquid crystal after the image display device 905 notifies the title. By doing so, the title and the expectation suggestion display can be displayed without hindering the super reach effect on the image display device 905, and the title and the expectation suggestion display can be easily understood.

  In the above embodiment, an example in which the present invention is applied to the notification of the title of the reach effect as the suggestive effect has been described. However, the present invention is applied to the notification of the title related to other effects (informing mainly displaying characters). May be. For example, in the case of executing a look-ahead zone effect in which a background image and an effect mode on the image display device 905 are changed to a plurality of zones (stages, effect modes, etc.) as a notice effect (for example, a look-ahead notice effect), the transition zone is executed. The present invention may be applied to the title notification. In the case of presenting a mission (“Let's reach with 7”, “Use a stick controller to destroy all enemies”, etc.) and perform a mission effect that gives the player an advantageous state when the mission is achieved, The present invention may be applied to notification of a mission title.

(Modification 31AK-1 of Characteristic Section 31AK)
In the above-described embodiment, when it is time to derive the display result, a decided effect for notifying whether or not the display result is a "big hit" is executed, and then the display result is displayed ( 44-3 (B) to (D)). Instead of such a decided effect, at a predetermined timing before deriving the display result, an operation effect that prompts the operation of the stick controller 9031A or the push button 9031B is executed, and when the predetermined operation is detected during the operation valid period. The display result may be displayed by displaying the win / loss of the battle effect, temporarily stopping the display result, or the like. By doing so, the display result is shown according to the operation of the player, so that the player's motivation to participate in the game can be increased and the interest is improved.

  44-10 and FIG. 44-11 are diagrams showing a production operation example of super reach in modification 31AK-1 in which an operation production is executed and a display result is shown according to the operation. As shown in FIG. 44-10 (A), after the image display device 905 has reached the reach mode, for example, as shown in FIG. 44-10 (B), a character 31AK041 that is a teammate character and a character that is an enemy character. 31AK042 is displayed, and as shown in FIGS. 44-10 (C) to (F) and FIGS. 44-11 (G) to (I), the reach effect in which the character 31AK041 and the character 31AK042 confront each other is executed.

  With the reach effect, as shown in FIG. 44-10 (C), a small button image 31AK043 and a regulation line 31AK044 superimposed on the small button image 31AK043 are displayed at the lower right of the image display device 5. As a result, the operation effect using the push button 9031B is executed, but it is suggested that the acceptance of the operation is currently restricted.

  In this modification 31AK-1, a plurality of types of operation effect images indicating that the operation effect is executed are prepared. The jackpot reliability varies depending on which operation effect image is displayed and the operation effect is executed. Further, the image showing that the operation effect is executed during the reach effect may change to a more reliable mode.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 44-10 (D), the praying character 31AK045 is displayed, and as shown in FIG. 44-10 (E), the praying character 31AK045 is changed to the pleased character 31AK046 and the small button image 31AK043 is displayed. It changes to the large button image 31AK047.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 44-11 (H), the cannon 31AK048 is displayed, and as shown in FIG. 44-11 (I), the effect 31AK049 in which a bullet is shot from the cannon 31AK048 is displayed, and the large button image 31AK047 is displayed. The effect 31AK050 that the bullet hits is displayed. Then, the large button image 31AK047 changes to the stick image 31AK051.

  As described above, in this modification 31AK-1, when the operation effect image changes, the action effect indicating that the operation effect image changes is executed. The operation effect image may change without the effect effect. In addition, the operation effect image may not change even though the effect effect is executed. The rate at which the operation effect image changes may differ depending on the type of action effect.

  After that, a predetermined time before the display result is derived, the regulation line 31AK044 is deleted as shown in FIG. 44-11 (J), and the stick image 31AK051 is displayed in the central portion as shown in FIG. 44-11 (K). Is enlarged and displayed to prompt an operation of pulling the stick controller 9031A. Further, at this time, the operation on the stick controller 9031A is in the valid operation valid period.

  Here, when the operation of pulling the stick controller 9031A is detected, as shown in FIG. 44-11 (L), an image 31AK052 indicating that the teammate character has won is displayed. After that, at the timing when the variable time ends, as shown in FIG. 44-11 (M), a fixed decorative pattern that is a big hit combination is derived. When no operation is detected within the predetermined operation valid period, the image shown in FIG. 44-11 (L) is automatically displayed.

  In this modification 31AK-1, there are a small button image, a large button image, and a stick image as the operation effect images, and the operation effect using these images is executed in the order of small button image <large button image <stick image. The jackpot reliability in the case of being hit is high. Even if a low-reliability operation effect image is displayed, it may change to a highly-reliable operation effect image during the reach effect, so the effect effect is improved and the player's expectation is improved. Can be maintained.

  In the production operation examples shown in FIGS. 44-10 and 44-11, the reach notification and expectation degree indication are omitted, but the reach production shown in FIGS. 44-10 and 44-11 is omitted. Alternatively, it may be appropriately executed in parallel with the operation production. The determination related to the operation effect and the operation effect image (whether the operation effect is present, the operation effect image to be displayed, the presence of the effect effect, etc.) may be executed in step 31AKS004 of FIG. 44-8.

(Modification 31AK-2 of Characteristic Section 31AK)
You may make it perform the suggestion display which shows the expectation degree of control to an advantageous state, such as a big hit game state. For example, the shutter effect for performing the first suggestion display and the reach title effect for performing the second suggestion display may be executed. In the shutter effect, an effect of covering the screen with the shutter display is executed after the variable display is started. Further, in the reach title effect, an effect of displaying the reach title indicating the development destination of the reach effect is executed after the reach. A specific image may be included and displayed when displaying either the shutter display or the reach title display. The reach title effect may be the same as the title announcement in the above-described embodiment, or may be another effect determined by another process.

  The specific image is an image with a high jackpot reliability that is displayed by including a plurality of types of elements in the image. The plurality of types of elements include a banana image of the element E1, a melon image of the element E2, an apple image of the element E3, a watermelon image of the element E4, and a strawberry image of the element E5. The fruit pattern image configured to include these elements E1 to E5 is the specific image. In both the shutter display and the reach title display, all the elements E1 to E5 are displayed so as to be visible. Further, the display sizes of the elements E1 to E5 forming the specific image are changed and displayed according to the difference in display size between the shutter display and the reach title display. Further, all of the elements E1 to E5 are displayed so as to fit in the shutter display and the reach title display, respectively.

  When the shutter effect is executed after the start of variable display, the jackpot reliability is higher when the fruit pattern image is displayed than when the fruit pattern image is not displayed. Further, when the reach title is displayed during the execution of the reach effect, the jackpot reliability is higher when the fruit pattern image is displayed than when the fruit pattern image is not displayed. When the fruit pattern is not displayed, for example, a plain image that does not include the elements E1 to E5 is displayed. An image pattern other than the fruit pattern image may be prepared as an image showing the jackpot reliability when the shutter effect and the reach title effect are executed. For example, a white image <blue image <red image <fruit pattern image may be prepared in the order of the jackpot reliability (for example, a red shutter or a reach letter in red letters). Then, depending on whether or not the display result of the variable display is a big hit, one of the image patterns may be selected by a predetermined random number lottery.

  When performing the shutter display and the reach title display, even when the fruit pattern is displayed, the speaker 908 outputs a common sound (melody), and the game effect lamp 909 emits light. The common sound and the emission control of the game effect lamp 909 indicate to the player that the fruit pattern is a special image. When performing such shutter display and reach title display, common notification for the fruit pattern is executed. Further, in the reach title display, a specific sound (voice) is further output after the common notification. The output periods of the common sound and the specific sound may partially overlap.

  FIG. 44-12 is a display screen diagram when the shutter effect and the reach title effect are executed. As shown in FIG. 44-12 (a), when the shutter effect is executed, the shutter image 31AK061 is displayed at the start of the variable display on the image display device 905. In the shutter image 31AK061, an image of a fruit pattern including all the elements E1 to E5 is displayed. Further, when the shutter effect is executed, the notification for outputting the common sound (melody) by the speaker 908 is executed and the notification by the light emission of the game effect lamp 909 is executed. When the shutter which has been closed is opened, variable display of the decorative pattern is started as shown in FIG. 44-12 (b). The downward arrows indicate the variable display of the left, middle, and right symbols. When the variable display of the left symbol and the right symbol is temporarily stopped, the reach state is set as shown in FIG. 44-12 (c).

  Next, as shown in FIG. 44-12 (d), the super reach effect is started. The variable display is displayed, for example, in a small size on the upper right of the screen and a character is displayed on the left side of the screen. A reach title image 31AK062 is displayed at the lower right of the screen, and the content of the super reach to be executed is shown as a reach title display. In the reach title image 31AK062, a fruit pattern image including all the elements E1 to E5 is displayed. Further, in the reach title image 31AK062, the characters “battle reach” indicating that the reach effect accompanied by the battle effect is executed are displayed.

  Further, when the reach title effect is executed, the notification for outputting the common sound (melody) by the speaker 908 is executed and the notification by the light emission of the game effect lamp 909 is executed. Furthermore, after the common sound is output, an effect is produced in which the character emits a specific sound (voice) such as "hot and hot" indicating that the jackpot reliability is high. Here, in the reach title effect, the size of the suggestion display to be displayed is smaller than that in the shutter effect. However, in this way, in the reach title effect, by outputting the specific sound, it is possible for the player to easily recognize that the fruit pattern image is displayed. Although the common sound and the specific sound have been described in the case where the output periods are completely separated, the output periods may be partially overlapped.

  Then, a battle reach effect as shown in FIG. 44-12 (e) is executed. The enemy character is displayed on the left side of the screen, and the ally character is displayed on the right side of the screen. When the teammate character wins the battle with the enemy character, the word "Battle Victory!" Is displayed in the upper left of the screen. It is reported that the big hit has been confirmed by winning the battle. When the battle production is completed, the screen returns to the variable display screen based on the original numerical design. As shown in FIG. 44-12 (f), all the symbols are stopped and the big hit symbol of "777" is displayed.

  As shown in FIGS. 44-12A and 44D, both the shutter image 31AK061 and the reach title image 31AK062 are displayed including all the elements E1 to E5 that form the fruit pattern image. By doing so, the fruit pattern image can be suitably displayed in both the shutter image 31AK061 and the reach title image 31AK062 which have different display sizes. As a result, it is possible to accurately notify that the fruit pattern image with high jackpot reliability is displayed.

  The display size of the shutter image 31AK061 shown in FIG. 44-12 (a) is displayed larger than the display size of the reach title image 31AK062 shown in FIG. 44-12 (d). Therefore, the difference between the display size of the shutter image 31AK061 and the display size of the reach title image 31AK062 can be noticed.

  Further, the shutter image 31AK061 shown in FIG. 44-12 (a) and the reach title image 31AK062 shown in FIG. 44-12 (d) are displayed at different timings. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the fruit pattern image, which is the specific image, from becoming difficult to see due to overlapping execution timings.

  The determination regarding the shutter effect (presence or absence of the shutter effect and effect mode) may be executed in step 31AKS004 of FIG. 44-8. At that time, the shutter effect may be determined based on the determination result of the display color of the title in step 31AKS002 of FIG. 44-8. For example, when it is determined that the title display color is a fruit pattern, the fruit pattern shutter effect may be easily executed. Further, the decision regarding the reach title effect may be executed together with the decision regarding the shutter effect in step 31AKS004 of FIG. 44-8.

(Explanation regarding the characteristic part 207SG of the present embodiment)
Next, the characteristic unit 207SG of this embodiment will be described. FIG. 45-1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the characteristic portion 207SG of the present embodiment, and shows an arrangement layout of main members. As shown in FIGS. 45-1 and 45-7, a pachinko game machine (game machine) 901 is roughly classified into an outer frame 207SG001a formed in a vertically long rectangular frame shape, and a game board (gauge that constitutes a game board surface. Board 902 and a gaming machine frame (underframe) 207SG003 for supporting and fixing the gaming board 902. A game area is formed on the game board 902, and a game ball serving as a game medium is launched into the game area from a predetermined hitting ball launching device. Further, a glass door frame 207SG003a having a glass window is provided in the gaming machine frame 207SG003 between a door open position that opens the front surface of the gaming machine frame 207SG003 and a door closed position that closes the front surface of the gaming machine frame 207SG003. The glass door frame 207SG003a is rotatably provided so that the game area can be opened and closed. When the glass door frame 207SG003a is closed, the game area can be seen through the glass window.

  In addition, the gaming machine frame 207SG003 can be opened by inserting a door key owned by a store clerk or the like in the game arcade into a lock (not shown) and unlocking it. A player other than the store clerk can open the gaming machine frame 207SG003 and the glass. The door frame 207SG003a cannot be opened.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 45-1, the left side of the image display device 905 in the game board 902 of the pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 901 is formed in the left game area 207SG002L where the game balls can flow down. The right side of the image display device 905 in 902 is formed in a right game area 207SG002R in which a game ball can flow down.

  The left game area 207SG002L is a game area in which a relatively weakly hit (left hitting) game ball flows down by the operation of the hit ball operation handle 9030, and the right game area 207SG002R is a left game area 207SG002L by operation of the hit ball operation handle 9030. A game ball that is stronger (right-handed) than a game ball that flows down is a game area that flows down after passing through the upper path 207SG002C of the image display device 905.

  In addition, a general winning opening 9010 is arranged in the left game area 207SG002L, and a passage gate 9041, a variable winning ball device 906B, and a general winning slot 9010 are arranged in the right game area 207SG002R from upstream to downstream of the right game area 207SG002R. A winning opening 9010 and a special variable winning ball device 907 are arranged. That is, the game ball flowing down the left game area 207SG002L can be won in the first start winning hole formed by the general winning opening 9010 and the winning ball device 906A, and the game ball flowing down the right game area 207SG002R is variable. The second start winning opening formed by the winning ball device 906B, the general winning opening 9010, and the large winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 907 can be won, and the passage gate 9041 can be passed.

  As shown in FIG. 45-1, a plurality of obstacle nails 207SGK1 are arranged between the winning ball device 906A, the variable winning ball device 906B, and the special variable winning ball device 907. Therefore, the game ball flowing down the left game area 207SG002L cannot enter the second starting winning opening or the big winning opening, and the game ball flowing down the right game area 207SG002R cannot enter the first starting winning opening. Has become.

  As shown in FIGS. 45-2 and 45-7, the main board 9011 in the characteristic portion 207SG of the present embodiment is housed in the board case 207SG201 configured to be openable by the first member and the second member. The state is mounted on the back of the pachinko gaming machine 901. In addition, on the main board 9011, a lock switch 207SG051 for switching the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 901 to a changeable setting value state, and a jackpot winning probability (ball-out rate) and the like to be described later in the setting value change state. A setting switch 207SG052 that functions as a setting switch for changing a set value and an opening sensor 207SG090 that detects opening of the gaming machine frame 207SG003 are provided. Although details will be described later, the setting value change state in the characteristic portion 207SG of the present embodiment is a state in which a store clerk or the like of a game hall can confirm the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 901 (set value confirmation state). ) Is also.

  The setting switching main body portion provided with an operation unit that can be operated by the player, such as the lock switch 207SG051 and the setting switching switch 207SG052, is housed in the substrate case 207SG201 together with the main substrate 9011, and the locking switch 207SG051 and the setting switching switch 207SG052 Is exposed to the back side through an opening formed in the back surface of the substrate case 207SG201 so that it can be operated without opening the substrate case 207SG201.

  Since the board case 207SG201 having the lock switch 207SG051 and the setting changeover switch 207SG052 is provided on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 901, it is extremely difficult to operate when the gaming machine frame 207SG003 is closed, and a predetermined door key is required. By using the game machine frame 207SG003 to open, it becomes possible to operate. Further, the lock switch 207SG051 needs to be operated by a setting key owned by a store clerk or the like in the game arcade, so that only the store clerk who possesses the setting key can operate it. Further, the lock switch 207SG051 is also a switch capable of executing an ON / OFF switching operation described later with a setting key. In the characteristic part 207SG of the present embodiment, the door key and the setting key are separate keys, but they may be combined with one key.

  Further, a display monitor 207SG029 capable of displaying a set value and a base value described later is arranged on the board case 207SG201. The display monitor 207SG029 is connected to the main board 9011 and arranged on the board case 207SG201. That is, the display monitor 207SG029 is arranged on the front surface when the main board 9011 in the board case 207SG201 is viewed. The main board 9011 cannot be visually recognized in the state where the gaming machine frame 207SG003 is not opened. Therefore, the front side when visually recognizing the main board 9011 is the back surface side of the gaming board 902 with the gaming machine frame 207SG003 opened. It is the front when visually recognized, and is different from the front of the pachinko gaming machine 901. However, the front surface when visually recognizing the main board 9011 and the front surface of the pachinko gaming machine 901 may be common.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 45-1 and 45-2, at a predetermined position (for example, a lower left position of the game area) of the game board 902 of the pachinko gaming machine 901 in the characteristic part 207SG of the present embodiment, 1 special symbol display device 207SG004A capable of performing variable display of 1 special map, second special symbol display device 207SG004B capable of performing variable display of second special symbol, first hold display capable of displaying first reserved memory number 207SG025A, a second holding display 207SG025B capable of displaying the second holding storage number, a normal symbol display 207SG020 capable of executing a variable display of the normal design, a general drawing holding display 207SG025C capable of displaying the general drawing holding storage, Round display 207SG131 capable of displaying the number of rounds of the big hit game (big hit type) during the big hit game, high base state (time saving state Right hitting lamp 207SG132 that lights up in a gaming state where a game ball such as a big hit game state is shot toward the right gaming area 207SG002R, a probability variation lamp 207SG133 that lights up in the probability variation state, and a time saving lamp that lights up in a high base state (time saving state). A game information display unit 207SG200 in which 207SG134 are collectively arranged is provided.

  As shown in FIGS. 45-3 and 45-4, the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B are each composed of 8 segment LEDs. Further, in the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B, when the variable display result of the special symbol is a loss or a small hit, the variable display result can be derived and displayed in a common combination. ing.

  When the variable display result in the variable display of the first special symbol is a big hit, the first special symbol display device 207SG004A is a variable display result with two types of big hit symbols (combination of lit LEDs) for each big hit type. Derivation display is possible. In addition, in the case where the variable display result in the variable display of the second special symbol is a big hit, the second special symbol display device 207SG004B is a variable display with two kinds of big hit symbols (combination of lit LEDs) for each big hit type. Results and derivation display are possible.

  In the characteristic part 207SG of the present embodiment, the first special symbol display device 207SG004A is different from the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B, although the big hit symbols that can be derived and displayed are all different. At least a part of the jackpot symbol that can be derived and displayed and the jackpot symbol that can be derived and displayed by the second special symbol display device 207SG004B may overlap.

  As shown in FIG. 45-5, each of the first hold indicator 207SG025A and the second hold indicator 207SG025B has LEDs of four segments arranged in parallel in the left-right direction. In the first hold indicator 207SG025A and the second hold indicator 207SG025B, if the number of reserved memories is one, only the LED at the left end is turned on, and the second from the left each time the number of reserved memories increases, The third LED from the left and the fourth LED from the left are sequentially turned on. Then, each time the variable display is executed, the LEDs in the pending display corresponding to the variable display are changed in a predetermined shift direction in accordance with the reduction (consumption) of the pending storage. In part 207SG, the light is turned off toward the left).

  In the characteristic unit 207SG of the present embodiment, when both the first special figure pending storage and the second special figure pending storage exist, the variable display based on the second special figure pending storage is preferentially executed. It has become like. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 45-6, for example, when there is one first special figure reservation memory and two second special figure reservation memories (only the LED on the left end of the first reservation indicator 207SG025A). Is lit up and the left two LEDs of the second hold indicator 207SG25B are lit), the second special figure hold memory is 0 by executing the variable display based on the second special figure hold memory. After that, the variable display based on the first special figure pending storage is executed.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 45-6, the round indicator 207SG131 is composed of five segments (LEDs). In addition, as the big hit type in the characteristic portion 207SG of the present embodiment, there are provided a total of three big hit types: a big hit A which is a 5 round big hit, a big hit B which is a 10 round big hit, and a big hit C which is a 15 round big hit. However, which of the segments forming the round display 207SG131 is lit up differs depending on the type of jackpot.

  The control signal transmitted from the main board 9011 to the effect control board 9012 is relayed by the relay board 9015. The control command transmitted from the main board 9011 to the effect control board 9012 via the relay board 9015 is, for example, an effect control command transmitted and received as an electric signal. The effect control commands include, for example, a display control command used to control the image display operation in the image display device 905, a voice control command used to control the voice output from the speakers 908L and 908R, and a game effect lamp 909. And LED control commands used for controlling the lighting operation of the decorative LED.

  In addition, the effect control board 9012 in the characteristic portion 207SG of the present embodiment, the first movable body 207SG321 and the second movable body 207SG322 operable between the respective origin position and the effect position during variable display, and the like. The origin detection sensor 207SG331 capable of detecting that the first movable body 207SG321 is located at the origin position of the first movable body 207SG321, and the second movable body 207SG322 is located at the origin position of the second movable body 207SG322. The origin detection sensor 207SG332 that can detect this is connected.

  FIG. 45-8 (A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of the effect control command used in the characteristic portion 207SG in the present embodiment. The effect control command has, for example, a 2-byte structure, the first byte indicates MODE (command classification), and the second byte indicates EXT (command type). The first bit (bit 7) of MODE data is always "1", and the first bit of EXT data is "0". Note that the command form shown in FIG. 45-8 (A) is an example, and other command forms may be used. Further, in this example, the control command is composed of two control signals, but the number of control signals forming the control command may be one, or may be three or more.

  In the example shown in FIG. 45-8 (A), the command 8001H is a first variation start command for designating variation start in the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 207SG004A. The command 8002H is a second variation start command for designating variation start in the special figure game using the second special figure on the second special symbol display device 207SG004B. The command 81XXH is a decoration that is variably displayed in each of the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, 905R corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol game. This is a variation pattern designation command for designating a variation pattern (variation time) such as a design. Here, XXH indicates an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be any value that is arbitrarily set according to the instruction content by the effect control command. In the variation pattern designation command, different EXT data is set according to the designated variation pattern.

  The command 8CXXH is a variable display result notification command, and is a production control command for designating a variable display result such as a special symbol or a decorative symbol. In the variable display result notification command, for example, as shown in FIG. 45-8 (B), the determination result indicating whether the variable display result is “miss”, “big hit” or “small hit” (predetermined result) ), Or different EXT data depending on the determination result (big hit type determination result) which one of a plurality of big hit types is used when the variable display result is “big hit”.

  In the variable display result notification command, for example, as shown in FIG. 45-8 (B), the command 8C00H is a first variable display result designation command indicating a pre-determined result indicating that the variable display result is “miss”. The command 8C01H is a second variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “big hit A” and the big hit type decided result. The command 8C02H is a third variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "big hit B" and the big hit type decided result. The command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "big hit C" and the big hit type decided result. The command 8C04H is a fifth variable display result designation command that notifies the advance determination result that the variable display result is “small hit”.

  The command 8F00H is a symbol determination command for designating the variable stop (decision) of the decorative symbol in each of the "left", "middle" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, 905R in the image display device 905. The command 95XXH is a game state designation command that designates the current game state in the pachinko gaming machine 901. In the game state designation command, different EXT data is set, for example, according to the current game state in the pachinko gaming machine 901. As a specific example, the command 9500H is a first game state designation command corresponding to a game state (low base state, normal state) in which time saving control is not performed, and a command 9501H is a game state in which time saving control is performed (high base state). , The second game state designation command corresponding to the (time saving state).

  The command 96XXH is an error (abnormality) specification command that specifies the occurrence of an error (abnormality) in the pachinko gaming machine 901 and the type of the error (abnormality) that has occurred. In the error (abnormality) designation command, for example, by setting the EXT data corresponding to each error (abnormality), it is specified which error (abnormality) has been determined to have occurred on the effect control board 9012 side. Therefore, the occurrence of the specified error (abnormality) is notified by the error notification processing described later.

  The command A0XXH is a hit start designation command (also referred to as a "fanfare command") that designates the display of an effect image showing the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state. The command A1XXH is a special winning opening opening notification command for notifying that the special winning opening is in the open state in the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state. The command A2XXH is a notification command after opening the special winning opening, which notifies that it is a period during which the special winning opening is changed from the open state to the closed state in the big hit game state or the small hit game state. The command A3XXH is a hit end designation command for designating the display of the effect image at the end of the big hit game state or the small hit game state.

  In the hit start designation command and the hit end designation command, for example, the same EXT data as that of the variable display result notification command is set, so that different EXT data may be set according to the pre-determined result or the big hit type determination result. . Alternatively, in the hit start designation command and the hit end designation command, the correspondence between the pre-determined result and the big hit type determination result and the set EXT data may be different from the correspondence in the variable display result notification command. . In the big winning opening opening notification command and the big winning opening opening notification command, different EXT data is set according to the number of times of execution of the round in the big hit game state or the small hit game state (for example, "1" to "15"). To be done.

  The command B100H is based on the fact that the game ball that has passed (entered) the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A is detected by the first starting opening switch 9022A and the starting winning (first starting winning) is generated. It is the 1st starting opening winning a prize designation command which notifies that the 1st starting condition for executing the special drawing game which uses the 1st special drawing in 1st special design indicator 207SG004A is satisfied. The command B200H is based on the fact that the game ball that has passed (entered) the second starting winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 906B is detected by the second starting opening switch 9022B and the starting winning (second starting winning) is generated. , Is a second start opening winning a prize designation command for notifying that the second starting condition for executing the special drawing game using the second special drawing on the second special symbol display device 207SG004B is satisfied.

  The command C1XXH is a first reserved storage number notification command for notifying the first special figure reserved storage number in order to display the special figure reserved storage number such that it can be specified on the image display device 905 or the like. The command C2XXH is a second reserved storage number notification command for notifying the second special figure reserved storage number in order to display the special figure reserved storage number such that it can be specified on the image display device 905 or the like. The first reserved memory number notification command is, for example, when the first starting opening winning award designation command is transmitted based on that the game ball passes (enters) the first starting winning opening and the first starting condition is satisfied. , Is transmitted from the main board 9011 to the effect control board 9012. The second reserved memory number notification command is, for example, when the second starting opening winning award designating command is transmitted based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the second starting winning opening and the second starting condition is satisfied. , Is transmitted from the main board 9011 to the effect control board 9012. Further, the first reserved storage number notification command and the second reserved storage number notification command cause the special figure game to start when either the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied (when the reserved storage number decreases). It may be transmitted in response to the start of execution.

  Instead of the first reserved storage number notification command or the second reserved storage number notification command, a total reserved storage number notification command for notifying the total reserved storage number may be transmitted. That is, the total pending storage number notification command for notifying the increase (or decrease) of the total pending storage number may be used.

  The command D0XXH is a setting value designation command for designating the newly set setting value from the main board 9011 to the effect control board 9012 (effect control CPU 90120). The command E101H is a hot start notification command for notifying that the pachinko gaming machine 901 has started up without clearing the contents of the RAM 90102 (recovery of power interruption, also called hot start). The command E102H is a cold start notification command for notifying that the pachinko gaming machine 901 has cleared the contents of the RAM 90102 and activated (cold start). The command E103H is a setting value change start notification command for notifying that the operation for changing the setting value has started in the pachinko gaming machine 901 (that the pachinko gaming machine 901 has started in the setting value changing state). The command E104H is a setting value change end notification command for notifying that the setting value changing operation has been completed in the pachinko gaming machine 901. The command E105H is a set value confirmation start notification command for notifying that the operation for confirming the set value has started in the pachinko gaming machine 901 (that the pachinko gaming machine 901 has started in the set value confirming state). The command E106H is a setting value change end notification command for notifying that the setting value confirmation operation of the pachinko gaming machine 901 has ended.

  The game control microcomputer 90100 mounted on the main board 9011 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and has a ROM (Read Only Memory) 90101 for storing a game control program, fixed data, and the like, and a game control work. RAM (Random Access Memory) 90102 that provides an area, CPU (Central Processing Unit) 90103 that executes a program for game control to perform control operation, and update of numerical data indicating a random number value independently of CPU 90103. A random number circuit 90104 for performing, an I / O (Input / Output port) 90105, and a real-time clock (RTC) 90106 capable of outputting time information are configured.

  As an example, in the game control microcomputer 90100, the CPU 90103 executes a program read from the ROM 90101 to execute processing for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 901. At this time, the CPU 90103 reads fixed data from the ROM 90101 to read fixed data, the CPU 90103 writes variable data to the RAM 90102 to temporarily store various floating data, and the CPU 90103 stores various floating data to be temporarily stored in the RAM 90102. Variable data read operation to read out, CPU 90103 receives an input of various signals from the outside of the game control microcomputer 90100 via the I / O 90105, CPU 90103 to the outside of the game control microcomputer 90100 via the I / O 90105 And a transmission operation for outputting various signals are also performed.

  FIG. 45-9 is an explanatory diagram illustrating random number values counted on the main substrate 9011 side. As shown in FIG. 45-9, in the characteristic part 207SG of this embodiment, on the main substrate 9011 side, in addition to the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the big hit type, and the variation pattern. Numerical data indicating each of the random number value MR3 for determination, the random number value MR4 for determining the universal figure display result, and the random number value MR5 for determining the initial value of MR4 are controlled to be countable. A random number value other than these may be used to enhance the game effect. These random number values MR1 to MR5 may be counted by software updating using a different random counter in the CPU 90103, or may be updated by the random number circuit 90104. The random number circuit 90104 may be built in the game control microcomputer 90100, or may be configured as a random number circuit chip different from the game control microcomputer 90100. The random number used to control the progress of such a game is also called a game random number.

  Although the present embodiment exemplifies a form in which each of the random number values MR1 to MR5 is used as a value in the range shown in FIG. 45-9, the present invention is not limited to this, and each of these random number values is used. The range of MR1 to MR5 may be changed according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 901.

  45-10 shows a variation pattern in the present embodiment. In the present embodiment, among the cases where the variable display result is “miss”, the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is “non-reach” and “reach”, respectively, and A plurality of variation patterns are prepared in advance, corresponding to the case where the display result is a "big hit". Further, one variation pattern is prepared in advance in response to the case where the variation display result is "small hit". The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variation display result is “miss” and the variation display mode of the decorative pattern is “non-reach” is called a non-reach variation pattern (also referred to as “non-reach loss variation pattern”). The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the display result is “miss” and the variation display mode of the decorative pattern is “reach” is referred to as a reach variation pattern (also referred to as “reach loss variation pattern”). Further, the non-reach variation pattern and the reach variation pattern are included in the loss variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variation display result is “miss”. The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variation display result is "big hit" is called a big hit variation pattern. A variation pattern corresponding to a variation display result of "small hit" is referred to as a small hit variation pattern.

  The big hit variation pattern and the reach variation pattern include a normal reach variation pattern in which a reach effect of normal reach is executed and a super reach variation pattern in which a reach effect of super reach such as super reach α and super reach β is executed. Although only one type of normal reach variation pattern is provided in the present embodiment, the present invention is not limited to this, and like normal reach α, normal reach β, ... A plurality of normal reach variation patterns may be provided. Further, as the super reach variation pattern, three or more super reach variation patterns such as super reach γ, ... In addition to super reach α and super reach β may be provided.

  As shown in FIG. 45-10, regarding the special figure variation time of the normal reach variation pattern in which the reach effect of the normal reach in the characteristic unit 207SG of the present embodiment is executed, the super reach variation patterns of super reach α and super reach β are used. Is set shorter than. Further, regarding the special figure variation time of the super reach variation pattern in which the reach reach of super reach such as super reach α and super reach β in the present embodiment is executed, the variation time of the variation pattern in which the reach reach of super reach β is executed In this case, the special figure change time is set to be longer than the change pattern in which the super reach effect of super reach α is executed.

  Incidentally, in the present embodiment, as described above, since the variation display result is “big hit” in the order of super reach β, super reach α, and normal reach, the big hit expectation degree is set to be high, so that the normal reach variation pattern and In the super reach fluctuation pattern, the longer the fluctuation time, the higher the jackpot expectation.

  In the characteristic part 207SG of the present embodiment, as will be described later, these variation patterns are classified into variation pattern types such as non-reach type, normal reach type, and super reach type. Rather than first determining and then determining the variation pattern to be executed from the variation patterns belonging to the determined variation pattern, only the random value MR3 for variation pattern determination is determined without determining these types. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, in addition to the random number value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination, a random value for fluctuation pattern type determination is provided, and these fluctuations are set. A variation pattern belonging to a variation pattern belonging to the determined type is determined after first determining the variation pattern type from the random number for pattern type determination. It may be determined the variation pattern to be executed from.

  Further, in the characteristic part 207SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 45-10, an example is shown in which the variation content (effect content) is predetermined for each variation pattern, but the present invention is not limited to this. The present invention is not limited to this, and even if the variation pattern is the same, the variation content (effect content) may be different depending on the set value. For example, in the case of the normal reach lost variation pattern PA2-1, when the set value that is set is 1, it is a variation pattern that causes the normal reach lost, and when the set value is 2, pseudo continuous production is performed. If the set value that is set is 3 as the variation pattern that is executed twice and becomes non-reach loss, the pseudo continuous effect is executed 3 times and the variation pattern that becomes super reach loss is set.

  In the game control microcomputer 90100, the CPU 90103 executes the program read from the ROM 90101 and uses the RAM 90102 as a work area, whereby various processes for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 901 are executed. Further, the CPU 90103 is capable of generating all of various random numbers used on the main board 9011 side by executing a random number generation program.

  The ROM 90101 included in the game control microcomputer 90100 stores various table data used for controlling the progress of the game, in addition to the game control program. For example, the ROM 90101 stores table data that forms a plurality of determination tables shown in FIGS. 45-11 to 45-13, which are prepared for the CPU 90103 to make various determinations and decisions. Further, in the ROM 90101, table data forming a plurality of control pattern tables used by the CPU 90103 to output various control signals from the main board 9011, and a variation mode of each symbol in a variable display such as a special symbol or an ordinary symbol A fluctuation pattern table for storing a plurality of kinds of fluctuation patterns is stored.

  The determination table stored in the ROM 90101 includes, for example, the display result determination table (set value 1) shown in FIG. 45-11 (A), the display result determination table (set value 2) shown in FIG. 45-11 (B), and FIG. -11 (C) display result determination table (set value 3), FIG. 45-12 (A) display result determination table (set value 4), FIG. 45-12 (B) display result determination table ( Setting value 5), display result determination table (setting value 6) shown in FIG. 45-12 (C), jackpot type determination table (for first special symbol) shown in FIG. 45-13 (A), FIG. 45-13 ( B) big hit type determination table (for the second special symbol) shown in, large hit variation pattern determination table, small hit variation pattern determination table, loss variation pattern determination table, public figure display result determination table (not shown), The like are included FIGS variation pattern determination table (not shown).

  The pachinko gaming machine 901 of the characteristic part 207SG of the present embodiment is configured such that the winning probability (ball-out rate) of the big hit changes according to the set value. Specifically, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing described later, by using the display result determination table (winning probability) according to the set value, the winning probability (ball-out rate) of the jackpot is changed. . The set value is made up of 6 levels from 1 to 6, where 6 is the highest payout rate, and the smaller the value is in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1, the lower the payout rate. That is, when 6 is set as the set value, the advantage is the highest for the player, and as the value decreases in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, 1, the advantage decreases in stages. In other words, the set value is the largest value of 6, which is the most unfavorable value for the amusement hall side, and the smaller the value of 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 is, the more advantageous the amusement hall side is. Become.

  45-11 (A) to 45-11 (C) and 45-12 (A) to 45-12 (C) are explanatory views showing the display result determination table corresponding to each set value. The display result determination table is a set of data stored in the ROM 90101, and is a table in which a hit determination value to be compared with MR1 is set. In the characteristic part 207SG of the present embodiment, a display result determination table common to the first special drawing and the second special drawing is used as the display result judgment table, but the present invention is not limited to this. Alternatively, separate display result determination tables may be used for the first special figure and the second special figure.

  As shown in FIG. 45-11 (A) to FIG. 45-11 (C) and FIG. 45-12 (A) to FIG. 45-12 (C), in each display result determination table, the game state is a probable change state ( In the high accuracy state), more determination values are assigned to the special jackpot display result of the “big hit” than in the normal state or the time saving state (low accuracy state). Thereby, in the probability variation state (high accuracy state) in which the probability variation control is performed in the pachinko gaming machine 901, when the normal state or the time saving state (low accuracy state), the special figure display result is set as “big hit” and the big hit game state is controlled. Then, the probability determined (in the characteristic part 207SG of the present embodiment, 1/300 when the setting value is 1, 1/280 when the setting value is 2, 1/260 when the setting value is 3 Compared to 1/240 when the value is 4, 1/220 when the set value is 5, 1/200 when the set value is 6, compared to the special figure display result as "big hit" and controlled to the big hit game state Then, the probability of being determined becomes higher (in the characteristic part 207SG of the present embodiment, when the set value is 1, 1/200, when the set value is 2, 1/180, when the set value is 3, 1 / 160, 1/140 when the set value is 4, 1/100 For if value is 5 1/120, the set value 6). That is, in each display result determination table, when the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 901 is the probability changing state (highly accurate state), it is determined that the jackpot gaming state is controlled as compared to the normal state or the time saving state. The determination value is assigned to the determination result of whether or not to control the jackpot gaming state so as to be higher.

  In addition, in each display result determination table, the determination value is assigned so that the probability of determining that the special figure display result is “small hit” and controlled to the small hit game state is the same regardless of the game state and the set value. Has been. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 45-11 (A) to FIG. 45-11 (C) and FIG. 45-12 (A) to FIG. 45-12 (C), regardless of the game state and the set value, The special figure display result is set as "small hit" and the probability of being determined to control the small hit game state is set to 1/200. In the characteristic portion 207SG of the present embodiment, the probability that the special figure display result is set as "small hit" regardless of the set value and the small hit game state is controlled is the same probability. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the probability of determining to control the small hitting game state as the small hitting result may be different according to the set value.

  Further, as described above, in each gaming state, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 901 is 1, the probability of being determined to control the jackpot gaming state with the special map display result being "big hit" is the highest. The lower the value of the set value, the larger the value of the special value is assigned to the judgment value so that the probability of being determined to control the big hit game state as "big hit" is set (big hit probability: set value 6> set value). 5> set value 4> set value 3> set value 2> set value 1).

  That is, the CPU 90103 refers to the display result determination table corresponding to the set value set at that time, and the value of MR1 is shown in FIGS. 45-11 (A) to 45-11 (C) and 45-12. If any of the hit determination values corresponding to the big hit shown in (A) to FIG. 45-12 (C) is matched, it is determined that the big hit (big hit A to big hit C) is made for the special symbol. Further, MR1 matches any of the hit determination values corresponding to the small hits shown in FIGS. 45-11 (A) to 45-11 (C) and FIGS. 45-12 (A) to 45-12 (C). Then, it is decided to make a small hit for the special symbol. That is, the winning of the big hit and the small hit is determined with a probability according to the set value. The "probability" shown in FIGS. 45-11 (A) to 45-11 (C) and 45-12 (A) to 45-12 (C) is the probability (ratio) of being a big hit and the small hit. Indicates the probability (rate) of Also, determining whether to make a big hit is to decide whether to control the big hit gaming state, the first special symbol display device 207SG004A or the second special symbol display device 207SG004B stop symbols in It also means deciding whether or not to make a jackpot design. Also, to determine whether to make a small hit, it is to determine whether to control the small hit game state, stop in the first special symbol display device 207SG004A or the second special symbol display device 207SG004B It is also to decide whether or not to make the symbol a small hit symbol.

  Further, in the characteristic part 207SG of the present embodiment, the CPU 90103 causes the display results shown in FIGS. 45-11 (A) to 45-11 (C) and FIGS. 45-12 (A) to 45-12 (C). It is designed to judge whether to make a big hit or a small hit using a judgment table.Whether a big hit judgment table and a small hit judgment table are provided separately for each set value and whether the variable display result is a big hit Whether or not to make a small hit may be individually determined.

  In the present embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine 901 is provided with a total of six setting values 1 to 6 that can be set, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko gaming machine is not limited to this. The setting values that can be set in 901 may be 5 or less or 7 or more.

  45-13 (A) and 45-13 (B) are explanatory diagrams showing a big hit type determination table (for the first special symbol) and a big hit type determination table (for the second special symbol) stored in the ROM 90101. Is. Of these, FIG. 45-13 (A) determines the jackpot type by using the pending storage based on the game ball winning the first starting winning opening (that is, when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed). It is a table when doing. In addition, FIG. 45-13 (B) determines the jackpot type by using the pending storage based on the fact that the game ball has won the second starting winning opening (that is, when the variable display of the second special symbol is performed). It is a case table.

  The jackpot type determination table, when it is determined that the variable display result is a jackpot pattern, the jackpot type is one of jackpot A to jackpot C, based on the random number (MR2) for jackpot type determination. Is a table that is referenced to determine

  Here, the jackpot type in the characteristic unit 207SG of the present embodiment will be described using FIG. 45-14. In the characteristic portion 207SG of the present embodiment, as a big hit type, a big hit A (also called an uncertain variation big hit) that only the time saving control is executed after the end of the big hit game state and shifts to the low accuracy high base state, and the big hit game After the completion, the high-accuracy control and the time saving control are executed, and a big hit B and a big hit C (also called a positive variation big hit) are set, which shifts to a high-accuracy high base state.

  The big hit game state by "big hit A" is a normally open big hit that is repeatedly executed five times (so-called 5 rounds) that changes the special variable winning ball device 907 to the first state that is advantageous to the player. The big hit game state by "B" is a normally open big hit that is repeatedly executed 10 times (so-called 10 rounds) for changing the special variable winning ball device 907 to the first state advantageous to the player. Furthermore, the big hit game state by "big hit C" is a normally open big hit that is repeatedly executed 15 times (so-called 15 rounds) to change the special variable winning ball device 907 to the first state advantageous to the player.

  The time saving control executed after the big hit game state by "big hit A" is that a special figure game is executed a predetermined number of times (100 times in the characteristic portion 207SG of the present embodiment), or a special number of times of the predetermined number of times. Before the figure game is executed, the jackpot game state is entered and the game ends.

  On the other hand, the high-accuracy control and the time saving control which are executed after the big hit game state of the big hit B or the big hit C are continuously executed until the big hit occurs again after the end of the big hit game state. Therefore, when the big hit that occurs again is big hit B or big hit C, high-precision control and time saving control are executed again after the end of the big hit game state, so that the big hit game state is continuous without going through the normal state. It occurs in the so-called condominium state.

  In addition, in the characteristic part 207SG of the present embodiment, an example in which three types of big hits A to C are provided as big hit types, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the big hit type is 2 You may provide less than four types or four or more types.

  As shown in FIG. 45-13 (A), in the jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol), if the setting value is "1", the determination value range of MR2 is from 0 to 299. , 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A, 100 to 249 are assigned to the jackpot B, and 250 to 299 are assigned to the jackpot C. When the set value is “2”, 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A and 100 to 229 are assigned to the jackpot B in the range 0 to 299 of the determination value of the MR2. , 200 to 299 are assigned to the jackpot C. When the set value is “3”, 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 100 to 209 are assigned to the jackpot B, out of the range 0 to 299 of the judgment value of the MR2. , 150 to 299 are assigned to the jackpot C. When the set value is "4", 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 100 to 189 are assigned to the jackpot B, out of the range 0 to 299 of the judgment value of the MR2. , 190 to 299 are assigned to the jackpot C. When the set value is "5", 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 100 to 169 are assigned to the jackpot B, out of the range 0 to 299 of the determination value of the MR2. , 170 to 299 are assigned to the jackpot C. When the set value is "6", 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 100 to 149 are assigned to the jackpot B, out of the range 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2. , 150 to 299 are assigned to the jackpot C.

  In this way, when a big hit occurs in the special drawing game of the first special symbol, only the time saving control is executed after the big hitting game is finished. Among the big hit B and the big hit C for which both the probability change control and the probability change control are executed, the proportions for determining the big hit C become lower in the order of set values 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1. In other words, if the variation special figure is the first special symbol, the highest payout rate is when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 901 is 6, and the set value is 5, 4, 3, 2, The smaller the order of 1, the lower the ball output rate.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 45-13 (B), in the jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol), when the setting value is “1”, the determination value range of MR2 is 0 to 299. Of these, 0 to 99 are assigned to the big hit A, 100 to 199 are assigned to the big hit B, and 200 to 299 are assigned to the big hit C. When the set value is “2”, 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 100 to 179 are assigned to the jackpot B in the range 0 to 299 of the judgment value of the MR2. , 180 to 299 are assigned to the jackpot C. When the set value is “3”, 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 100 to 159 are assigned to the jackpot B, out of the range 0 to 299 of the determination value of MR2. , 160 to 299 are assigned to the jackpot C. When the set value is "4", 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 100 to 139 are assigned to the jackpot B, out of the range 0 to 299 of the judgment value of the MR2. , 140 to 299 are assigned to the jackpot C. When the set value is "5", 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 100 to 119 are assigned to the jackpot B, out of the range 0 to 299 of the judgment value of the MR2. , 120 to 299 are assigned to the jackpot C. Further, when the set value is "6", 0 to 99 are assigned to the big hit A and 100 to 299 are assigned to the big hit C out of the range 0 to 299 of the judgment value of the MR2. (The jackpot B is not assigned a judgment value).

  In this way, when a big hit occurs in the special drawing game of the second special symbol, only the time saving control is executed after the big hitting game is finished, while the proportion for determining the big hit A is the same, while the time saving control is finished after the big hitting game is finished. Among the big hit B and the big hit C for which both the probability variation control and the probability change control are executed, the proportions for determining the big hit C become lower in the order of set values 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1. That is, when the variation special symbol is the second special symbol, the highest payout rate is the case where the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 901 is 6, and the setting values are 5, 4, 3, 2, The smaller the order of 1, the lower the ball output rate.

  In the characteristic part 207SG of the present embodiment, when the variation special figure is the second special figure and the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 901 is 6, the big hit type is determined to be the big hit B. That is, the case where the jackpot type determination rate differs depending on the set value that is set is that one of the jackpot types is not determined (the determination rate is 0%). Although included, even when the variation special map is the second special map and the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 901 is 6, a case of determining the big hit type as big hit B may be provided. .

  As described above, in the characteristic part 207SG of the present embodiment, the determination ratio of the big hit type when the variable display result is a big hit is different according to the set value that is set, so that the enjoyment of the game can be improved. It has become.

  In the characteristic part 207SG of the present embodiment, the big hit type is determined using MR2 which is a random number value for big hit type determination, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the big hit type is It may be determined using MR1, which is a random number value for determining the special figure display result.

  Further, in the characteristic part 207SG of the present embodiment, the larger the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 901 is, the more advantageous it is for the player (the jackpot probability is increased, and the jackpot C as the jackpot type is easily determined. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the smaller the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 901, the more advantageous it may be to the player.

  Further, in the characteristic portion 207SG of the present embodiment, while the jackpot probability changes according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 901, the game itself does not change, but the present invention is not limited to this. The game playability is not limited to this, and may be changed according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 901.

  For example, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 901 is 1, the gaming performance (so-called probability variation loop type) in which the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/320 and the probability variation state is 65% in a loop, When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 901 is 2, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/200, the game ball during the jackpot game is a predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 907. While controlling the gaming state after the end of the big hit game to a probable state on the basis of passing, the game property in which the ratio of the game balls passing through the predetermined switch during the big hit game is different according to the variation special map (so-called V If the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 901 is 3, the probability of a big hit is 1/320 and the probability of a small hit is 1/50, which means that the game is played during high base (time control). Balls may be as a game of controlling the jackpot gaming state based on passing through a predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 907 (so-called one two-kind mixed type). Further, if the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 901 is any of 1 to 3, the game playability is the same, but the jackpot probability and A setting may be provided in which the small hit probability is high while the number of prize balls obtainable during the big hit game is small (for example, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 901 is any of 4 to 6). .

  Further, in this way, when changing the game characteristic according to the set value, the common switch may be used for different purposes. Specifically, in the above example, if the set value is 1 to 3, the predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 907 is a production switch (every time a game ball passes a predetermined area). When used as a switch for executing a predetermined effect), and the set value is 4 to 6, the predetermined switch is used as a game switch (a game state is changed to a certain state based on the fact that the game ball has passed the predetermined switch). It may be used as a switch for controlling the jackpot gaming state).

  Further, the ROM 90101 also stores a fluctuation pattern determination table for determining the fluctuation pattern based on the random value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination. It is determined to be one of the fluctuation patterns.

  Specifically, as the variation pattern determination table, the variation pattern determination table for the big hit used when it is predetermined that the variation display result is "big hit" and the variation display result is "small hit" The jackpot variation pattern determination table used when it is predetermined, and the variation pattern determination table for loss used when the variation display result is determined to be "miss" are prepared in advance. ing.

  In the jackpot variation pattern determination table, the variation patterns of the normal reach jackpot variation pattern (PB1-1), the super reach α jackpot variation pattern (PB1-2), and the super reach β jackpot variation pattern (PB1-3) are used. On the other hand, a predetermined random number value is assigned as the determination value within the range that the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern can take.

  As shown in FIGS. 45-15 (A) and 45-15 (B), as the big hit variation pattern determination table, the big hit variation pattern determination table (big hit A is used when the big hit type is big hit A. Jackpot) and jackpot variation pattern judgment tables (jackpot B, jackpot C) used when jackpot types are jackpot B and jackpot C, and these jackpot variation pattern judgment tables (jack jacks) A) and the variation pattern determination table for big hits (for big hits B and big hits C) show fluctuation patterns for normal reach big hits (PB1-1), fluctuation patterns for super reach α big hits (PB1-2), and super reach β big hits. For each variation pattern of the variation pattern (PB1-3), a part of the range that the random value MR3 for variation pattern determination can take A constant random number value is assigned as the judgment value.

  As shown in FIG. 45-15 (A), in the variation pattern determination table for big hits (for big hits A), when the setting value is “1”, one of the ranges 1 to 997 of the judgment values of MR3 is set. Up to 400 are assigned to the normal reach jackpot variation pattern (PB1-1), 401 to 850 are assigned to the super reach α jackpot variation pattern (PB1-2), and 851 to 997 are super reach. It is assigned to the variation pattern (PB1-3) of the β big hit. When the set value is “2”, 1 to 380 out of the range of judgment values 1 to 997 of MR3 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-1) of the normal reach jackpot, and 381 to 835. Are assigned to the variation pattern of the super reach α big hit (PB1-2), and 836 to 997 are assigned to the variation pattern of the super reach β big hit (PB1-3). When the set value is “3”, 1 to 360 of the range of judgment values of MR3 of 1 to 997 are assigned to the variation pattern (PB1-1) of the normal reach jackpot, and 361 to 820. Are assigned to the variation pattern of the super reach α big hit (PB1-2), and 821 to 997 are assigned to the variation pattern of the super reach β big hit (PB1-3). When the set value is "4", 1 to 340 of the range of judgment values 1 to 997 of MR3 are assigned to the variation pattern (PB1-1) of the normal reach jackpot, and 341 to 805. Are assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α big hit (PB1-2), and 806 to 997 are assigned to the variation pattern of super reach β big hit (PB1-3). When the set value is "5", 1 to 320 of the range of judgment values of MR3 of 1 to 997 are assigned to the variation pattern (PB1-1) of the normal reach jackpot, and 321 to 790. Are assigned to the variation pattern (PB1-2) of the super reach α big hit, and 791 to 997 are assigned to the variation pattern of the super reach β big hit (PB1-3). Further, when the set value is "6", 1 to 300 of the judgment value range 1 to 997 of MR3 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-1) of the normal reach jackpot, and 301 to 775 are set. Are assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α big hit (PB1-2), and 776 to 997 are assigned to the variation pattern of super reach β big hit (PB1-3).

  As shown in FIG. 45-15 (B), in the jackpot variation pattern determination table (jackpot B, jackpot C), when the set value is “1”, the determination value range of MR3 is from 1 to 997. , 1 to 200 are assigned to the variation pattern of the normal reach jackpot (PB1-1), 201 to 550 are assigned to the variation pattern of the super reach α jackpot (PB1-2), and 551 to 997 are assigned. It is assigned to the variation pattern (PB1-3) of the super reach β big hit. When the set value is "2", from 1 to 997 of the judgment value range of MR3, 1 to 180 are assigned to the variation pattern (PB1-1) of the normal reach jackpot, and 181 to 510 are assigned. The variation patterns (PB1-2) of super-reach α big hits are assigned, and 511 to 997 are assigned to the variation patterns of super-reach β big hits (PB1-3). When the set value is "3", 1 to 160 of the range of MR3 determination values of 1 to 997 are assigned to the variation pattern (PB1-1) of the normal reach jackpot, and 161 to 470 are assigned. It is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α big hit (PB1-2), and 471 to 997 are assigned to the variation pattern of super reach β big hit (PB1-3). Further, when the set value is "4", in the range of judgment values 1 to 997 of MR3, 1 to 140 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-1) of the normal reach jackpot, and 141 to 430 are set. It is assigned to the variation pattern (PB1-2) of the super reach α big hit, and 431 to 997 are assigned to the variation pattern of the super reach β big hit (PB1-3). When the set value is “5”, 1 to 120 of the range of judgment values 1 to 997 of MR3 are assigned to the variation pattern (PB1-1) of the normal reach jackpot, and 121 to 390 are set. It is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α big hit (PB1-2), and 391 to 997 are assigned to the variation pattern of super reach β big hit (PB1-3). When the set value is "6", 1 to 100 of the range of MR3 determination values of 1 to 997 are assigned to the variation pattern (PB1-1) of the normal reach jackpot and 101 to 350 are assigned. The variation patterns (PB1-2) of super-reach α big hits are assigned, and 351 to 997 are assigned to the variation patterns (PB1-3) of super-reach β big hits.

  In this way, when the big hit A is won in the special drawing game, the ratio of determining the fluctuation pattern (PB1-2) of the super reach α big hit is the ratio of determining the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β big hit (PB1-3). And set values 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 become lower in this order. In addition, when the big hit B or the big hit C is won in the special figure game, the rate of determining the fluctuation pattern (PB1-3) of the super reach β big hit determines the fluctuation pattern (PB1-2) of the super reach α big hit. It is higher than the ratio and lower in the order of set values 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1.

  That is, in the present embodiment, when the determination value is “big hit B” or “big hit C”, the super-reach β is easily determined, and the big hit type is “big hit A”. In this case, since the super-reach α is assigned so as to be easily determined, when the variation pattern of the super-reach β is executed, the player may be “big hit B” or “big hit C”. You can increase your expectations.

  Further, in the small hit variation pattern determination table, a predetermined random number value is a determination value for the variation pattern of the small hit variation pattern (PC1-1) within the range that the random value MR3 for variation pattern determination can take. Is assigned as. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 45-15 (C), in the small hit variation pattern determination table, even if the set value is any of 1 to 6, the determination value range of MR3 is 0 to 997. Among them, 0 to 997 are assigned to the variation pattern (PC1-1) of the small hit. Although only the PC 1-1 is provided as the variation pattern for the small hit in this embodiment, the present invention is not limited to this, and two or more variation patterns are provided as the variation pattern for the small hit, The variation pattern of the small hit may be determined from the plurality of variation patterns at different ratios with the set values 1 to 6.

  In addition, the variation pattern determination table for loss, the variation pattern determination table A for loss, which is used when the number of pending storage is 1 or less in the low base state in which the game state is not subjected to time saving control, and the low base Loss variation pattern determination table B used when the total pending storage number is 2 to 4 in the state, and loss variation used when the total pending storage number is 5 to 8 in the low base state The pattern determination table C and the variation pattern determination table D for loss, which is used when the game state is the high base state in which the time saving control is performed, are prepared in advance.

  In the variation pattern determination table A for loss, the variation pattern of non-reach loss without shortening (PA1-1), the variation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1), the variation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), the super reach A predetermined random number value is assigned as the determination value to the variation pattern of β-miss (PA2-3) within the range of the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern.

  As shown in FIG. 45-16 (A), in the variation pattern determination table A for loss (for one or less low base medium total pending storage number), when the set value is “1”, the determination value of MR3 is In the range 1 to 997, 1 to 450 are assigned to the non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-1), and 451 to 700 are assigned to the normal reach loss variation pattern (PA2-1). Up to 900 are assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the variation pattern of super reach β loss (PA2-3). When the set value is “2”, 1 to 430 are assigned to the non-reach-miss variation pattern (PA1-1) out of the range 1 to 997 of the determination value of MR3, and 431 to 700 are assigned. It is assigned to the normal reach loss variation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the super reach α loss variation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is assigned to the super reach β loss variation pattern (PA2-2). It is assigned to PA2-3). Further, when the setting value is “3”, among the judgment value range 1 to 997 of MR3, 1 to 410 are assigned to the non-reach-miss variation pattern (PA1-1), and 411 to 700 are set. It is assigned to the normal reach loss variation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the super reach α loss variation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is assigned to the super reach β loss variation pattern (PA2-2). It is assigned to PA2-3). When the setting value is “4”, 1 to 390 are assigned to the non-reach-miss variation pattern (PA1-1) in the determination value range 1 to 997 of MR3, and 391 to 700 are assigned. It is assigned to the normal reach loss variation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the super reach α loss variation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is assigned to the super reach β loss variation pattern (PA2-2). It is assigned to PA2-3). Further, when the setting value is “5”, out of the range of judgment values 1 to 997 of MR3, 1 to 370 are assigned to the non-reach-miss variation pattern (PA1-1), and 371 to 700 are set. It is assigned to the normal reach loss variation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the super reach α loss variation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is assigned to the super reach β loss variation pattern (PA2-2). It is assigned to PA2-3). Further, when the setting value is “6”, 1 to 350 of the judgment value range 1 to 997 of MR3 are assigned to the non-reach-miss variation pattern (PA1-1), and 351 to 700 are set. It is assigned to the normal reach loss variation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the super reach α loss variation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is assigned to the super reach β loss variation pattern (PA2-2). It is assigned to PA2-3).

  Further, in the variation pattern determination table B for loss, a shortened non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-2), a normal reach loss variation pattern (PA2-1), and a super reach corresponding to the total pending storage number of 2 to 4 are stored. A predetermined random number value is assigned as the determination value to the variation pattern of the α-miss variation (PA2-2) and the variation pattern of the super reach β-loss (PA2-3) within the range that the random number value MR3 for the variation pattern determination can take. ing.

  As shown in FIG. 45-16 (B), in the variation pattern determination table B for loss (for the number of low-base medium total pending storage numbers 2 to 4), when the setting value is “1”, the determination value of MR3 1 to 500 are assigned to the non-reach-miss variation pattern (PA1-2), and 501 to 700 are assigned to the normal-reach loss variation pattern (PA2-1). 701 to 900 are assigned to the change pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the change pattern of super reach β loss (PA2-3). Further, when the setting value is “2”, 1 to 480 are assigned to the non-reach-miss variation pattern (PA1-2) in the range 1 to 997 of the determination value of MR3, and 481 to 700 are assigned. It is assigned to the normal reach loss variation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the super reach α loss variation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is assigned to the super reach β loss variation pattern (PA2-2). It is assigned to PA2-3). When the set value is “3”, 1 to 460 of the judgment value range 0 to 997 of MR3 are assigned to the non-reach-miss variation pattern (PA1-2), and 461 to 700 are set. It is assigned to the normal reach loss variation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the super reach α loss variation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is assigned to the super reach β loss variation pattern (PA2-2). It is assigned to PA2-3). When the set value is “4”, 1 to 440 of the range of judgment values 1 to 997 of MR3 are assigned to the non-reach-miss variation pattern (PA1-2), and 441 to 700 are set. It is assigned to the normal reach loss variation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the super reach α loss variation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is assigned to the super reach β loss variation pattern (PA2-2). It is assigned to PA2-3). When the set value is “5”, out of the range of judgment values 1 to 997 of MR3, 1 to 420 are assigned to the non-reach-miss variation pattern (PA1-2), and 421 to 700 are set. It is assigned to the normal reach loss variation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the super reach α loss variation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is assigned to the super reach β loss variation pattern (PA2-2). It is assigned to PA2-3). When the setting value is “6”, 1 to 400 are assigned to the non-reach-miss variation pattern (PA1-2) out of the range of MR3 determination values 1 to 997, and 401 to 700 are assigned. It is assigned to the normal reach loss variation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the super reach α loss variation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is assigned to the super reach β loss variation pattern (PA2-2). It is assigned to PA2-3).

  Further, in the variation pattern determination table C for loss, a shortened non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-3), a normal reach loss variation pattern (PA2-1), and a super-reach that correspond to a total pending storage number of 5 to 8 are stored. A predetermined random number value is assigned as the determination value to the variation pattern of the α-miss variation (PA2-2) and the variation pattern of the super reach β-loss (PA2-3) within the range that the random number value MR3 for the variation pattern determination can take. ing.

  As shown in FIG. 45-16 (C), in the variation pattern determination table C for loss (for 5 or more low-base medium total pending storage numbers), when the setting value is “1”, the determination value of MR3 is Of the range 1 to 997, 1 to 550 are assigned to the non-reach-miss variation pattern (PA1-3), and 551 to 700 are assigned to the normal reach-loss variation pattern (PA2-1). Up to 900 are assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the variation pattern of super reach β loss (PA2-3). When the set value is “2”, 1 to 530 of the range of judgment values of MR3 of 1 to 997 are assigned to the non-reach-miss variation pattern (PA1-3), and 531 to 700 are assigned. It is assigned to the normal reach loss variation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the super reach α loss variation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is assigned to the super reach β loss variation pattern (PA2-2). It is assigned to PA2-3). When the set value is “3”, 1 to 510 are assigned to the non-reach-miss variation pattern (PA1-3) out of the range 1 to 997 of the determination value of MR3, and 511 to 700 are assigned. The normal reach loss variation pattern (PA2-1) is assigned, 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α loss variation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are the super reach β loss variation pattern (PA2-2). It is assigned to PA2-3). Further, when the setting value is “4”, 1 to 490 out of the range of judgment values 1 to 997 of MR3 are assigned to the non-reach-miss variation pattern (PA1-3), and 491 to 700 are set. The normal reach loss variation pattern (PA2-1) is assigned, 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α loss variation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are the super reach β loss variation pattern (PA2-2). It is assigned to PA2-3). Further, when the setting value is “5”, 1 to 470 of the judgment value range 1 to 997 of MR3 are assigned to the non-reach-miss variation pattern (PA1-3), and 471 to 700 are set. The normal reach loss variation pattern (PA2-1) is assigned, 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α loss variation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are the super reach β loss variation pattern (PA2-2). It is assigned to PA2-3). When the set value is “6”, 1 to 450 of the judgment value range 1 to 997 of MR3 are assigned to the non-reach-miss variation pattern (PA1-3), and 451 to 700 are set. The normal reach loss variation pattern (PA2-1) is assigned, 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α loss variation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are the super reach β loss variation pattern (PA2-2). It is assigned to PA2-3).

  In the variation pattern determination table D for loss, the variation pattern of the non-reach loss of shortening (PA1-4), the variation pattern of the normal reach loss (PA2-1), and the variation pattern of the super reach α loss ( PA2-2), a predetermined random number value is assigned as a determination value in the range that the random number value MR3 for variation pattern determination can take with respect to the variation pattern (PA2-3) of the super reach β loss.

As shown in FIG. 45-10 (D), in the variation pattern determination table for loss D (for high base), when the setting value is “1”, among the determination value ranges 1 to 997 of MR3, 1 to 550 are assigned to the non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-4), 551 to 700 are assigned to the normal reach loss variation pattern (PA2-1), and 701 to 900 are super reach α. It is assigned to the variation pattern of loss (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the variation pattern of super reach β loss (PA2-3). When the set value is “2”, 1 to 530 of the range of judgment values of MR3 of 1 to 997 are assigned to the non-reach-miss variation pattern (PA1-4), and 531 to 700 are assigned. The normal reach loss variation pattern (PA2-1) is assigned, 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α loss variation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are the super reach β loss variation pattern (PA2-2). It is assigned to PA2-3). When the set value is “3”, 1 to 510 are assigned to the non-reach-miss variation pattern (PA1-4) out of the range 1 to 997 of the determination value of MR3, and 511 to 700 are assigned. The normal reach loss variation pattern (PA2-1) is assigned, 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α loss variation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are the super reach β loss variation pattern (PA2-2). It is assigned to PA2-3).
When the set value is "4", 1 to 490 out of the range of judgment values 1 to 997 of MR3 are assigned to the non-reach-miss variation pattern (PA1-4), and 491 to 700 are set. The normal reach loss variation pattern (PA2-1) is assigned, 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α loss variation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are the super reach β loss variation pattern (PA2-2). It is assigned to PA2-3). When the set value is “5”, 1 to 470 of the judgment value range 1 to 997 of MR3 are assigned to the non-reach-miss variation pattern (PA1-4), and 471 to 700 are set. The normal reach loss variation pattern (PA2-1) is assigned, 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α loss variation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are the super reach β loss variation pattern (PA2-2). It is assigned to PA2-3). When the set value is “6”, 1 to 450 of the judgment value range 1 to 997 of MR3 are assigned to the non-reach-miss variation pattern (PA1-4), and 451 to 700 are set. The normal reach loss variation pattern (PA2-1) is assigned, 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α loss variation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are the super reach β loss variation pattern (PA2-2). It is assigned to PA2-3).

  As described above, when the variation pattern determination tables for loss A to D are used, the rate of determining the non-reach variation pattern or the normal reach variation pattern is higher than the rate of determining the super reach variation pattern, and the rate of determining the normal reach variation pattern. Is set to be lower in the order of set values 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1. When using the variation pattern determination tables for loss A to D, regardless of the variation pattern determination table, 701 to 900 of the determination values are the variation patterns of the super reach α loss, and 901 to 997 are the super reach β loss. If each variation pattern is assigned, that is, if the variation display result is a loss, the variation pattern of super reach is determined by a common determination rate regardless of the set value. It is possible to prevent the staging effect from being reduced due to the fact that the variable display due to is not executed.

  In the characteristic part 207SG of the present embodiment, the determination rate of the variation pattern of super-reach α loss and the determination rate of the variation pattern of super-reach β loss are completely the same between the set values as variation patterns for loss. However, the present invention is not limited to this, the determination rate of the variation pattern of these super-reach α loss and the determination rate of the variation pattern of super-reach β loss is between each set value. May differ by a slight difference (for example, about 1%).

  In the characteristic part 207SG of the present embodiment, when the variation display result is lost, the determination rate of the variation pattern of the super reach is the same regardless of the set value that has been set, but is exemplified. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the variation display result is a loss, the determination rate of all variation patterns of non-reach, normal reach, and super reach is the same regardless of the set value that is set. Alternatively, only the determination rate of the variation pattern of either non-reach or normal reach may be the same.

  Further, in the characteristic portion 207SG of the present embodiment, when the variation display result is a loss, the determination rate of the variation pattern of the super reach α loss and the variation pattern of the super reach β loss are irrespective of the set value that is set. Although the example in which both of the determination ratios are the same regardless of the set value is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the variable display result is a loss, the super reach α The determination rate of only one of the loss variation pattern determination rate and the super reach β loss variation pattern determination rate may be the same regardless of the set value.

  Further, in the characteristic part 207SG of the present embodiment, when the variation display result is a loss, the determination rate of the variation pattern of the super reach α loss and the variation pattern of the super reach β loss are irrespective of the set value that is set. Although the example in which both of the determination ratios are the same regardless of the set values is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and is set even when the variable display result is a big hit. Regardless of the set value being set, the determination rate of the variation pattern of the super reach jackpot may be the same regardless of the set value being set.

  In the characteristic part 207SG of the present embodiment, when the variation display result is a loss, the determination ratio of the variation pattern of non-reach or normal reach is different depending on the set value that has been set. Depending on the set value that has been set, there may be one or more undetermined variation patterns among the non-reach variation patterns and the normal reach variation patterns. That is, when the determination rate of the variation pattern differs depending on the set value, one of the variation patterns is not determined (the determination rate is 0%), or the specific variation pattern is 100%. It is also included to determine by the ratio of.

  The fluctuation time of the non-reach-miss variation pattern (PA1-2) is shorter than that of the non-reach-miss variation pattern without reduction (PA1-1), and the non-reach-loss variation is shorter than that of the variation pattern (PA1-2). The pattern (PA1-3) has a shorter fluctuation time (see FIG. 45-10). Therefore, when the number of pending storages is increased, the variation pattern of non-reach loss with a short variation time is determined, the pending storages are easily digested, and the number of pending storages reaches the upper limit number of 4. Occasionally, by making a start winning, it becomes difficult to generate a useless start winning that is not held, and when the number of holding memories decreases, the fluctuation pattern of non-reach loss without a long shortening By determining PA1-1), it becomes possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game due to the fact that the variable display is not executed because the time for the variable display becomes long.

  Further, in the characteristic unit 207SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 45-16 (A) to 45-16 (C), the variation is made using the variation pattern determination table for loss, which varies depending on the total number of pending storages. Although the mode for deciding the pattern is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the number of reserved memories in the special symbol to be changed (for example, the first special symbol when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed). The number of special symbols pending storage, when performing the variable display of the second special symbol, the variation pattern may be determined by using a different variation pattern determination table for loss according to the number of pending storage numbers of the second special symbol).

  Further, in the variation pattern determination table for each loss of the characteristic unit 207SG of the present embodiment, even if the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 901 is any value of 1 to 6, the variation pattern of the super reach loss. The ranges of random number values assigned to (PA2-2 and PA2-3) are the same. However, since the jackpot probability and the loss probability differ depending on the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 901, the rate at which the variable display is actually executed in the variation pattern of the super reach loss (variation pattern of the reach loss) (Appearance rate of) varies depending on the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 901. In the characteristic part 207SG of the present embodiment, a variation display is performed in a variation pattern of super reach loss according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 901, but the example is different. The present invention is not limited to this. Considering the jackpot probability and the loss probability for each set value, the variable display shows the variation of the super reach loss at the same rate regardless of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 901. It may be executed in a pattern.

  The RAM 90102 included in the game control microcomputer 90100 shown in FIG. 45-2 may be a backup RAM that is partially or wholly backed up by a backup power supply created on a predetermined power supply board. That is, even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 901 is stopped, a part or all of the content of the RAM 90102 is saved for a predetermined period (until the capacitor serving as the backup power supply is discharged and the backup power supply cannot supply power). It In particular, at least data according to the game state, that is, the control state of the game control means (such as a special figure process flag) and the data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls may be stored in the backup RAM. The data according to the control state of the game control means is data necessary for recovering the control state before the occurrence of a power failure or the like based on the data when the power is restored after a power failure or the like. Further, data according to the control state and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are defined as data indicating the progress state of the game.

  In such a RAM 90102, a game control data holding area (not shown) is provided as an area for holding various data used for controlling progress of a game in the pachinko gaming machine 901. The data holding area for game control includes a first special figure reservation storage section, a second special figure reservation storage section, a general figure reservation storage section, a game control flag setting section, a game control timer setting section, and a game control counter. It is provided with a setting unit and a game control buffer setting unit.

  The 1st special figure reservation storage section, the game ball passes (enters) the 1st starting winning a prize mouth which the winning a prize ball device 906A forms, the starting winning a prize (the 1st starting winning a prize) occurs, but the special drawing which is not started yet Hold data of a game (a special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 207SG004A) is stored. As an example, the first special figure reservation storage unit associates a winning number in the first start winning opening (detection order of gaming balls) with a holding number, and establishes a first starting condition for passage (entry) of the gaming ball. Based on the above, the CPU 90103 extracts the random number value MR1 for the variable display result determination, the random number value MR2 for the jackpot type determination, the numerical value data indicating the random number value MR3 for the variation pattern, etc. It is stored until the stored number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4"). Thus, the pending data stored in the first special figure pending storage unit indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is pending, and the variable display result in this special figure game (special figure display result ), It becomes the hold information that enables the determination of whether or not a big hit will occur.

  The second special figure reservation storage unit has a game ball passing through (entering) the second starting winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 906B and a starting winning (second starting winning) has been generated but has not been started yet. The pending data of the figure game (special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 207SG004B) is stored. As an example, the second special figure hold storage unit associates the hold number with the winning order (game ball detection order) to the second start winning hole, and establishes the second start condition when the game ball passes (enters). Based on the above, the CPU 90103 extracts the random number value MR1 for the variable display result determination, the random number value MR2 for the jackpot type determination, the numerical value data indicating the random number value MR3 for the variation pattern, etc. It is stored until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”). The pending data thus stored in the second special figure pending storage unit indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is pending, and the variable display result in this special figure game (special figure display result ), It becomes the hold information that enables the determination of whether or not a big hit will occur.

  In addition, with the game ball passing through (entering) the first starting winning opening, the holding information (first holding information) based on the establishment of the first starting condition due to the passing (entering) of the gaming ball. The hold information (second hold information) based on the establishment of the second start prize may be stored in the common hold storage unit in association with the hold number. In this case, starting port data indicating which of the first starting winning port and the second starting winning port the game ball has passed (entered) is included in the holding information and stored in association with the holding number. .

  The ordinary figure holding storage unit stores the holding information of the ordinary figure game which has not yet been started by the normal symbol display 9020, even though the game ball that has passed through the passage gate is detected by the gate switch 9021. For example, the public figure reservation storage unit is associated with the reservation numbers in the order in which the game balls have passed through the passage gate, and is used for determining the general figure display result extracted from the random number circuit 90104 or the like by the CPU 90103 based on the passage of the game balls. Numerical data or the like indicating the random number value MR4 is stored as pending data and stored until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”).

  The game control flag setting unit is provided with a plurality of types of flags whose states can be updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 901. For example, the game control flag setting unit stores data indicating the value of the flag and data indicating the ON state or the OFF state for each of the plurality of types of flags.

  The game control timer setting unit is provided with various timers used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 901. For example, the game control timer setting unit stores data indicating the timer value of each of a plurality of types of timers.

  The game control counter setting unit is provided with a plurality of types of counters for counting the count value used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 901. For example, the game control counter setting unit stores data indicating the count value of each of a plurality of types of counters. Here, the game control counter setting unit may be provided with a random counter for the CPU 90103 to count part or all of the game random numbers so that they can be updated by software.

  In the random counter of the game control counter setting unit, random number values that are not generated by the random number circuit 90104, for example, numerical value data indicating the random number values MR1 to MR4 are stored as random count values, and are periodically set according to the execution of software by the CPU 90103. Numerical data indicating each random value is updated periodically or irregularly. The software executed by the CPU 90103 to update the random count value may be for updating the random count value separately from the update operation of the numerical data in the random number circuit 90104, or may be extracted from the random number circuit 90104. Alternatively, the random count value may be updated by performing a predetermined process such as a scramble process or a calculation process on all or part of the numerical data.

  The game control buffer setting unit is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 901. For example, the game control buffer setting unit stores data indicating a buffer value in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

  Next, the display of the display monitor 207SG029 on the characteristic unit 207SG of the present embodiment will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 45-17 (A), the display monitor 207SG029 includes a first display unit 207SG029A, a second display unit 207SG029B, a third display unit 207SG029C, and a fourth display unit 207SG029D. Each of the first display unit 207SG029A to the fifth display unit 207SG29E is composed of 7 segments configured by 7 segments that draw a letter "8" and dots arranged on the lower right side of the 7 segments. The first display unit 207SG029A to the fifth display unit 207SG29E are capable of lighting and blinking in various colors, for example, red, blue, green, yellow, white, and the like. It is also possible to display these colors in different colors or so-called rainbows while changing these colors in an extremely short cycle.

  The display control of the display monitor 207SG029 in the characteristic part 207SG of the present embodiment is executed by using the non-test area in the entire area of the ROM 90101 or the RAM 90102 during the test of the pachinko gaming machine 901. .

  On the display monitor 207SG029, as shown in FIGS. 45-17 (B) and 45-17 (C), the base value calculated in the normal state (low accurate low base state) for every out 6000 balls in the full game state. Base L that is (real-time value during measurement), base 1 that is the base value calculated in the normal state (low accurate low base state) for each first out 6000 balls in all game states, and in all game states Base 2 which is the base value calculated in the second out-of-6000 ball normal state (low-probability low base state), and the third out-of-6000 ball normal state in every gaming state (low-probability low base state) Base 3, which is the base value calculated in step 3, can be displayed. The base L, the base 1, the base 2, and the base 3 are displayed on the display monitor 207SG029 in percentage.

  When actually displaying the base L on the display monitor 207SG029, in order to display "bL." Which is an abbreviation for the base L, "b" is displayed on the first display unit 207SG029A, and "L." is displayed on the second display unit 207SG029B. Is displayed, and the upper two digits (values of “00” to “99”) of the calculated value are displayed on the third display unit 207SG029C and the fourth display unit 207SG029D. When the base 1 is displayed on the display monitor 207SG029, “b” is displayed on the first display unit 207SG029A and “1.” is displayed on the second display unit 207SG029B in order to display the abbreviation “b1.” Of the base. Is displayed, and the upper two digits (value of “00” to “99”) of the calculated value are displayed on the third display unit 207SG029C and the fourth display unit 207SG029D. When the base 2 is displayed on the display monitor 207SG029, “b” is displayed on the first display unit 207SG029A and “2.” is displayed on the second display unit 207SG029B in order to display the abbreviation “b2.” Of the base. Is displayed, and the upper two digits (value of “00” to “99”) of the calculated value are displayed on the third display unit 207SG029C and the fourth display unit 207SG029D. When the base 3 is displayed on the display monitor 207SG029, “b” is displayed on the first display unit 207SG029A and “3.” is displayed on the second display unit 207SG029B in order to display the abbreviation “b3.” Of the base. Is displayed, and the upper two digits (value of “00” to “99”) of the calculated value are displayed on the third display unit 207SG029C and the fourth display unit 207SG029D.

  The display monitor 207SG029 of the present embodiment is configured to execute control for sequentially displaying the base L, the base 1, the base 2, and the base 3 under the control of the main board 9011 (CPU 90103). For example, as shown in FIG. 45-19, the main board 9011 executes control for switching the display on the display monitor 207SG029 in the order of base L → base 1 → base 2 → base 3 at intervals of 5 seconds. The display of each base value on the display monitor 207SG029 is different in display color according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 901. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 45-18, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 901 is “1”, each base value on the display monitor 207SG029 is displayed in white, and the pachinko gaming machine is displayed. When the set value set in 901 is "2", each base value on the display monitor 207SG029 is displayed in blue, and when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 901 is "3", it is displayed. Each base value on the monitor 207SG029 is displayed in yellow, and when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 901 is “4”, each base value in the display monitor 207SG029 is displayed in green, and the pachinko gaming machine 901 is displayed. When the set value set in is 5 is displayed, each base value on the display monitor 207SG029 is displayed in red, and pachinko is displayed. If the set value set in the trick machine 901 is "6" displays the base value in the display monitor 207SG029 at purple. Therefore, a clerk or the like in the game arcade can specify the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 901 simply by checking the display color of the display monitor 207SG029, without the CPU 90103 executing the set value changing processing described later. ing.

  Next, the game control main processing in the characteristic unit 207SG of the present embodiment will be described. 45-20 is a flow chart showing the game control main processing executed by the CPU 90103. In the game control main processing, the CPU 90103 first sets interruption prohibition (207SGSa001). Then, necessary initial setting is performed (207SGSa002). The initial settings include stack pointer settings, internal device (CTC (counter / timer circuit), parallel input / output port, etc.) register settings, RAM 90102 accessible settings, and the like.

  Next, the CPU 90103 determines whether backup data is stored in the RAM 90102 (107SGSa003) or whether the RAM 90102 (backup RAM) is normal (107SGSa004). If the backup data is not stored (207SGSa003; N) or the RAM 90102 is not normal (207SGSa004; N), the process proceeds to 207SGSa017 and the backup data is stored and the RAM 90102 is normal (207SGSa003; Y, 207SGSa004; Y) further determines whether the set value stored in the RAM 90102 is any one of 1 to 6, that is, whether or not the set value of a normal value is stored in the RAM 90102 (207SGSa005).

  When the set value stored in the RAM 90102 is not any of 1 to 6 (207SGSa005; N), the process proceeds to 207SGSa017, and when the set value stored in the RAM 90102 is any of 1 to 6 (207SGSa005; N). Y) indicates whether or not the set value changing flag indicating that the set value changing process to be described later was being executed before the power cut (power cut occurred during execution of the set value changing process). It is determined whether or not (207SGSa006). If the setting value changing flag is set (207SGSa006; Y), the process proceeds to 207SGSa017, and if the setting value changing flag is not set, the RAM clear flag indicating that the RAM clear processing to be described later has been executed. If it is set, the RAM clear flag is cleared (207SGSa007), and it is determined whether or not the clear switch is ON, that is, whether or not the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated while the clear switch is being operated. (207SGSa008).

  When the clear switch is ON (207SGSa008; Y), the RAM clear process for clearing the RAM 90102 is executed (207SGSa009), the RAM clear flag is set again, and the process proceeds to 207SGSa011 (207SGSa010). If the clear switch is OFF (207SGSa008; N), the process proceeds to 207SGSa011 without executing 207SGSa009 and 207SGSa010.

  In 207SGSa011, the CPU 90103 determines whether the lock switch 207SG051 is ON (207SGSa011). When the lock switch 207SG051 is ON (207SGSa011; Y), it is further determined whether or not the open sensor 207SG090 is ON (207SGSa012). When the open sensor 207SG090 is ON, that is, when the pachinko gaming machine 901 is activated with the lock switch 207SG051 being ON and the gaming machine frame 207SG003 being opened (207SGSa012; Y), the RAM clear flag is set. It is determined whether or not (207SGSa013a).

  When the RAM clear flag is set (207SGSa013a; Y), the set value changing process (207SGSa013b) for changing the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 901 is executed, and the process proceeds to 207SGSa014, and the RAM clear flag. If is not set (207SGSa013a; N), a set value confirmation process (207SGSa013c) for confirming the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 901 is executed, and the process proceeds to 207SGSa014.

  If the lock switch 207SG051 is OFF (207SGSa011; N) or the open sensor is OFF (207SGSa012; N), the process proceeds to 207SGSa014 without executing the processes of 207SGSa013a to 207SGSa013c.

  In 207SGSa014, the CPU 90103 determines whether or not the RAM clear flag is set, that is, whether or not the RAM 90102 is cleared when the pachinko gaming machine 901 is activated this time (whether RAM clear processing (207SGSa009) has been executed) ( 207SGSa014). When the RAM clear flag is set (207SGSa014; Y), the process proceeds to 207SGSa022, and when the RAM clear flag is not set (207SGSa014; N), the power supply to the internal state of the main board 9011 is stopped (power cut). Recovery processing for returning to the state (207SGSa015) is performed.

  In the recovery processing, the CPU 90103 sets the work area based on the storage content of the RAM 90102 (contents of backed up data). As a result, the game state is restored when the power supply is stopped, and if the special symbol is changing, the variation of the special symbol is restarted from the state before the restoration by executing the game control timer interrupt process described later. Will be. Then, the CPU 90103 transmits the command at the time of restoration including the hot start notification command to the effect control board 9012, assuming that the pachinko gaming machine 901 has been restored (started by hot start) in the state before the power failure, and proceeds to 207 SGSa028. (207SGSa016).

  Further, in 207SGSa017, the CPU 90103 determines whether or not the clear switch is ON, that is, whether or not the pachinko gaming machine 901 is activated while the clear switch is being operated (207SGSa017). When the clear switch is ON (207SGSa017; Y), it is further determined whether the lock switch 207SG051 is ON (207SGSa018) or whether the open sensor 207SG090 is ON (207SGSa019).

  When the lock switch 207SG051 is ON (207SGSa018; Y) and the open sensor 207SG090 is ON, that is, there is no backup data in the RAM 90102, the RAM 90102 is not normal, or the normal setting value is not set. However, when the pachinko gaming machine 901 is started by a formal procedure by the operation of an employee of the game hall (the gaming machine frame 207SG003 is opened and the lock switch 207SG051 is turned on, the pachinko game is operated while the clear switch is operated. When the machine 901 is started), the setting value stored in the RAM 90102 is cleared (207SGSa020), and if the setting value changing flag is set, the setting value changing flag is cleared (207SGSa021). Then, the processes of 207SGSa009 to 207SGSa016 described above are executed.

  When the clear switch is OFF (207SGSa017; N), the lock switch 207SG051 is OFF (207SGSa018; N), and the open sensor 207SG090 is OFF (207SGSa019; N), the process proceeds to 207SGSa031.

  Further, in 2078SGSa022, the CPU 90103 transmits a command at the time of restoration including a cold start notification command to the effect control board 9012, assuming that the pachinko gaming machine 901 is activated by cold start (207SGSa022). Then, the cold start notification timer corresponding to the period for notifying the cold start of the pachinko gaming machine 901 is set (207SGSa023), and as shown in FIG. The cold start notification is started by starting the blinking (207SGSa024).

  After executing 207SGSa024, the CPU 90103 decrements the value of the cold start notification timer by -1 (207SGSa025), and determines whether or not the cold start notification timer has timed out (207SGSa026). When the cold start notification timer has not timed out (207SGSa026; N), the processes of 207SGSa025 and 207SGSaa026 are repeatedly executed, and when the cold start notification timer has timed out (207SGSa026; Y), all segments in the display monitor 207SG029. Ends blinking (207SGSa027), and proceeds to 207SGSa028.

  In the characteristic part 207SG of the present embodiment, an example is shown in which all segments constituting the display monitor 207SG029 are blinked over the period of the cold start notification timer (for example, 5 seconds) at the time of calling and starting the pachinko gaming machine 901. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and at the time of calling and starting the pachinko gaming machine 901, only some of the segments constituting the display monitor 207SG029 may blink. Alternatively, at least some of the segments forming the display monitor 207SG029 may be turned on.

  Then, in 207SGSa028, the CPU 90103 executes a random number circuit setting process (207SGSa028) for initializing the random number circuit 90104, and causes the game control microcomputer 90100 to periodically take a timer interrupt every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms). The built-in CTC register is set (207SGSa029), and interrupts are enabled (207SGSa030). After that, the loop processing is started. Thereafter, the interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 90103 every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 90103 can periodically execute the timer interrupt process.

  Further, in 207SGSa031, the CPU 90103 tells the effect control board 9012 that the abnormal setting value is stored in the RAM 90102 (setting value abnormality error), or that the power is restored from the power interruption during the setting change described later. Then, an error designation command corresponding to the abnormal setting value is transmitted (207SGSa031). Further, the error notification execution waiting timer is set (207SGSa032). Then, the CPU 90103 decrements the value of the error notification execution waiting timer by -1 (207SGSa033), and determines whether or not the error notification execution waiting timer has timed out (207SGSa034). If the error notification execution wait timer has not timed out (207SGSa034; N), the processes of 207SGSa033 and 207SGSa034 are repeatedly executed, and if the error notification execution wait timer has timed out (207SGSa034; Y), the process shown in FIG. As shown in (B), the first display unit 207SG029A and the second display unit 207SG029B included in the display monitor 207SG029 are used as notifications (error notifications) of occurrence of a setting value error and recovery from power interruption during setting change. , “E.” is displayed on each of the third display unit 207SG029C and the fourth display unit 207SG029D (207SGSa035).

  Further, as shown in FIG. 45-27 (B), the CPU 90103 blinks all the LEDs configuring the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B (207SGSa036), and the pachinko gaming machine 901. A security signal is output to a management device such as a management computer in a game arcade via a terminal board (not shown) provided in the above, and the process proceeds to 207SGSa032 (207SGSa037). After that, the CPU 90103 repeatedly executes the processing of 207SGSa032 to 207SGSa037 until the pachinko gaming machine 901 is cut off (until the power of the pachinko gaming machine 901 is turned off by the operation of the clerk at the gaming hall, etc.), thereby displaying the display monitor 207SG029. , The first special symbol display device 207SG004A, the second special symbol display device 207SG004B by the error occurrence notification.

  In this way, the pachinko gaming machine 901 in the characteristic unit 207SG of the present embodiment displays the display monitor 207SG029, the first when the abnormal set value is set or when the set power is restored from the power interruption during the change of the set value. Since the special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B are executed to notify the occurrence of the error, the clerk at the amusement arcade, etc. generates an error from both the front side and the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 901 and sets the set value. It is possible to recognize that the power was cut off during the change. In addition, since the occurrence of an error in the pachinko gaming machine 901 and the return from the power interruption during the change of the set value can be recognized by the gaming machine management device, the security of the pachinko gaming machine 901 can be improved. Has become.

  Incidentally, in the game control main processing of the characteristic portion 207SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 45-20, when it is determined that the clear switch is ON in 207SGSa008 (207SGSa008; Y) or while the setting value is being changed in 207SGSa021. Although the mode in which the RAM clear process (207SGSa009) is executed after the flag is cleared is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the RAM clear process determines that the clear switch is ON in 207SGSa008. May be executed (207SGSa008; Y) or not after the setting value changing flag is cleared in 207SGSa021, but when the RAM clear flag is set in 207SGSa014 (207SGSa014; Y). .

  45-21 (A) is a flowchart showing the RAM clear processing (207SGSa009) executed by the CPU 90103 in the game control surface processing. In the RAM clear processing, the CPU 90103 first designates the second address from the top in the RAM 90102 (207SGSa041). Next, "00H" is set (stored) in the designated address (207SGSa042). Then, it is determined whether or not the designated address is the last address (FXXX described later) of the RAM 90102 (207SGSa043). When the designated address is not the last address of the RAM 90102 (207SGSa043; N), the next address in the RAM 90102 is designated (207SGSa044), and the designated address is the address (F002) storing the RAM clear flag. It is determined whether or not (207SGSa45).

  If the specified address is not the address storing the RAM clear flag (207SGSa045; N), the process proceeds to 207SGSa042, and if the specified address is the address storing the RAM clear flag (207SGSa045; N), Address is designated and the process proceeds to 207SGSa042 (207SGSa046). When the designated address is the last address of the RAM 90102 (207SGSa043; Y), the RAM clearing process is terminated.

  In the RAM 90102 in the characteristic unit 207SG of the present embodiment, addresses (F000 to FXXX) are assigned to each storage area, as shown in FIG. 45-21 (B). Of these storage areas, the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 901 is stored in the head address (F000) of the RAM 90102, and the second address (F001) from the head of the RAM 90102 will be described later. The temporary setting value is stored. Further, a RAM clear flag is stored in the third address (F002). At other addresses (F003 and later), special figure holding storage, general figure holding storage, various counter values, various timers, various flags, and game information including error information generated in the pachinko gaming machine 901 are stored. . The backup data (including the backup flag) is stored in a specific backup data storage area among the areas in which other information is stored. A value (for example, a set value “0”) indicating a factory shipping state is set in the head address (F000) of the RAM 90102 at the time of factory shipment. Incidentally, when the pachinko gaming machine 901 is started in a state where the value indicating the factory shipping state is set in the head address (F000) of the RAM 90102, the setting change process may be executed without fail, or the image may be changed. You may urge to restart the pachinko gaming machine 901 for executing the setting change process by the display on the display device 905.

  That is, the RAM clear process in the characteristic unit 207SG of the present embodiment is a process of storing data other than the set value and the RAM clear flag by storing "00H" in the address excluding the set value.

  Note that the characteristic unit 207SG in the present embodiment exemplifies a mode in which data other than the set value is cleared in the RAM clear processing, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko gaming machine 901 is cold. When started at the start, only the game information stored in a predetermined address of the RAM 90102 (address F003 or later in the characteristic unit 207SG of this embodiment) may be cleared.

  Further, in the characteristic part 207SG in the present embodiment, the form in which the RAM clear flag is stored in the RAM 90102 is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the RAM clear flag is set in the game control microcomputer. By storing in a register of 90100 (for example, an accumulator that is the center of calculation, a flag register that stores the state of the accumulator, or a general-purpose register), the process of storing or reading the RAM clear flag in the RAM 90102 is omitted. The processing load of the CPU 90103 may be reduced. Incidentally, when the RAM clear flag is stored in the RAM 90102, the degree of freedom of the register can be improved more than when the RAM clear flag is stored in the register of the game control microcomputer 90100. It is possible to prevent the information (data) from being overwritten.

  45-22 is a flow chart showing the setting value change processing (207SGSa013b) executed by the CPU 90103 in the game control main processing. In the setting value change processing, the CPU 90103 first starts the lighting of all the segments constituting the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B (207SGSa051), and the right-handed lamp 207SG132 and the first hold indicator. 207SG025A and the second hold indicator 207SG025B start blinking (207SGSa052, see FIG. 45-27 (A)). Further, the CPU 90103, as a mode (mode that is neither big hit A, big hit B, or big hit C shown in FIG. 45-6) corresponding to the setting value changing process, only one segment among the segments configuring the round display 207SG131. Is turned on (207SGSa052a).

  Further, the CPU 90103 transmits a setting value change start notification command to the effect control board 9012 (207SGSa053), and determines whether or not any one of the setting values 1 to 6 is stored in the address F000 of the RAM 90102. (207SGSa053a). When a value other than 1 to 6 is stored as the set value in the RAM 90102 or when the set value is not stored in the RAM 90102 (when the set value is cleared in 207SGSa020), the set value is set in the address F000 in the RAM 90102. Is set to "1" (setting value is reset to "1"), and the process proceeds to 207SGSa054 (207SGSa053b). If any one of 1 to 6 is stored in the RAM 90102 as the set value (207SGSa053a; Y), the process proceeds to 207SGSa054 without executing the process of 207SGSa053b.

  In 207SGSa054, the CPU 90103 sets a power cut detection process execution start waiting timer for waiting until the power cut detection process is executed. Then, the value of the power cut detection process execution start wait timer is decremented by 1 (207SGSa055), and it is determined whether the power cut detection process execution start wait timer has timed out (207SGSa056). When the power cut detection process execution start wait timer has not timed out (207SGSa056; N), the processes of 207SGSa055 and 207SGSa056 are repeatedly executed, and the power cut detection process execution start wait timer has timed out (207SGSa056; Y). Executes power-off detection processing (207SGSa057).

  After the power-off detection processing is executed, the CPU 90103 starts displaying the set value stored in the address F000 in the RAM 90102 on the display monitor 207SG029 (207SGSa058), and via a terminal board (not shown) provided in the pachinko gaming machine 901. A security signal is output to the management device such as the management computer of the game arcade (207SGSa059).

  Then, the CPU 90103 sets the setting value changing flag (207SGSa061), and determines whether or not the setting changeover switch 207SG052 is operated (207SGSa062). When the setting changeover switch 207SG052 is not operated (207SGSa062; N), the process proceeds to 207SGSa065, and when the setting changeover switch 207SG052 is operated (207SGSa062; Y), the address F001 of the RAM 90102 is set based on the operation of the setting changeover switch 207SG052. The contents are updated (207SGSa063).

  Specifically, when the setting value displayed on the display monitor 207SG029 is "1", the setting value "2" which is one step more advantageous to the player than "1" is set as the temporary setting value. When the setting value stored in the address F001 of the RAM 90102 and displayed on the display monitor 207SG029 is "2", the setting value "3" which is one step more advantageous to the player than "2" is provisional. A value that is one larger than the setting value displayed on the display monitor 207SG029, such as being stored in the address F001 of the RAM 90102 as a setting value, is stored in the address F001 of the RAM 90102 as a temporary setting value. When the set value displayed on the display monitor 207SG029 is "6", "1" may be stored in the address F001 of the RAM 90102 as a temporary set value.

  Then, the CPU 90103 displays the set value (temporary set value) stored at the address F001 in the RAM 90102 on the display monitor 207SG029 (207SGSa064), and determines whether the lock switch 207SG051 is ON (207SGSa065).

  When the lock switch 207SG051 is ON (207SGSa065; Y), the CPU 90103 repeatedly executes the processes of 207SGSa062 to 207SGSa065 to store a new temporary setting value in the address F001 of the RAM 90102, or the address is stored in the address F001. The set value is displayed on the display monitor 207SG029.

  When the lock switch 207SG051 is OFF in 207SGSa065 (207SGSa065; N), the CPU 90103 clears the setting value changing flag (207SGSa066) and displays the setting value (or temporary setting value) on the display monitor 207SG029. Ends (207SGSa067), and turns off all the segments constituting the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B (207SGSa067a). Furthermore, the CPU 90103 ends the blinking of the right-handed lamp 207SG132, the first hold indicator 207SG025A, and the second hold indicator 207SG025B, and the lighting of the segments forming the round indicator 207SG131 (207SGSa068, 207SGSa068a).

  Then, the CPU 90103 determines whether or not a temporary setting value is stored in the address F001 in the RAM 90102 (207SGSa069). When the temporary setting value is not stored in the address F001 in the RAM 90102 (207SGSa069; N), the process proceeds to 207SGSa072, and when the temporary setting value is stored in the address F001 in the RAM 90102 (207SGSa069; Y), further in the RAM 90102. It is determined whether or not the value of the setting value stored in the address F000 is different from the value of the temporary setting value stored in the address F001 (207SGSa070).

  When the value of the setting value stored in the address F000 in the RAM 90102 and the value of the temporary setting value stored in the address F001 are the same (207SGSa070; N), the process proceeds to 207SGSa072 and is stored in the address F000 in the RAM 90102. If the value of the set value that is stored is different from the value of the temporary set value that is stored in the address F001 (207SGSa070; Y), the temporary set value that is stored in the address F001 in the RAM 90102 is stored in the address F000. Store (207SGSa071), and proceed to 207SGSa072. That is, in the processing of 207SGSa071, the temporary setting value is updated and stored in the RAM 90102 as the actual setting value.

  Further, the CPU 90103 transmits a setting value change end notification command to the effect control board 9012 (207SGSa073), and ends the setting value change processing.

  45-23 is a flow chart showing the setting value confirmation processing (207SGSa013c) executed by the CPU 90103 in the game control main processing. In the setting value confirmation process, the CPU 90103 first starts the lighting of all the segments constituting the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B (207SGSa101), and the right-handed lamp 207SG132 and the first hold indicator. The blinking of the 207SG025A and the second hold indicator 207SG025B is started (207SGSa102, see FIG. 45-27 (A)). Further, the CPU 90103, as a mode (a mode that is neither the big hit A, the big hit B, or the big hit C shown in FIG. 45-6) corresponding to the set value confirmation process, only one of the segments configuring the round display 207SG131. Is turned on (207SGSa103).

  Further, the CPU 90103 transmits a set value confirmation start notification command to the effect control board 9012 (207SGSa104), and sets a power cut detection process execution start waiting timer for waiting until the power cut detection process is executed (207SGSa105). ). Then, the value of the power cut detection process execution start wait timer is decremented by 1 (207SGSa106), and it is determined whether the power cut detection process execution start wait timer has timed out (207SGSa107). When the power cut detection process execution start wait timer has not timed out (207SGSa107; N), the processes of 207SGSa106 and 207SGSa107 are repeatedly executed, and the power cut detection process execution start wait timer has timed out (207SGSa107; Y). Executes power-off detection processing (207SGSa108). The power-off detection process (207SGSa108) is the same as the power-off detection process (207SGSa057) in the setting value changing process described above.

  After the power-off detection processing is executed, the CPU 90103 starts displaying the set value stored in the address F000 in the RAM 90102 on the display monitor 207SG029 (207SGSa109), and via a terminal board (not shown) provided in the pachinko gaming machine 901. A security signal is output to the management device such as the management computer of the game arcade (207SGSa110).

  The CPU 90103 then determines whether the lock switch 207SG051 is ON (207SGSa111). When the lock switch 207SG051 is ON (207SGSa111; Y), the CPU 90103 waits until the lock switch 207SG051 is turned OFF by repeatedly executing the process of 207SGSa111. When the lock switch 207SG051 is OFF in 207SGSa111 (207SGSa111; N), the display of the set value on the display monitor 207SG029 is ended (207SGSa112), and the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B are also displayed. All the segments that make up are turned off (207SGSa112a). Further, the CPU 90103 ends the blinking of the right-handed lamp 207SG132, the first hold indicator 207SG025A, and the second hold indicator 207SG025B, and the lighting of the segments forming the round indicator 207SG131 (207SGSa113, 207SGSa114).

  Then, the CPU 90103 transmits a set value confirmation end notification command to the effect control board 9012 (207SGSa115), and ends the set value confirmation processing.

  Thus, from the start of the setting value change process and the setting value confirmation process, the first special symbol display device 207SG004A, the second special symbol display device 207Sg004B and the round display device 207SG131, and the first hold display device 207SG025A, the second By starting blinking of the hold indicator 207Sg025B and the right-handed lamp 207SG232, the player, the clerk of the game hall, or the like can change the set value or the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 901 from the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 901. It is possible to recognize that confirmation is in progress.

  In the characteristic part 207SG of the present embodiment, at the start of the set value change processing and the set value confirmation processing, among the segments configuring the round display 207SG131, as a mode corresponding to the set value change processing and the set value confirmation processing. Although the mode in which only one LED is turned on is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the lighting patterns of the segments that make up the round display 207SG131 are jackpot A and jackpot shown in FIG. 45-6. The lighting mode is not particularly limited as long as it is a mode that does not correspond to either B or big hit C.

  Further, in the characteristic part 207SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 45-27 (A), at the start of the set value change process or the set value check process, an aspect corresponding to the set value change process or the set value check process As an example, a mode in which the segments configuring the round display 207SG131 are lit in the same manner is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the segments configuring the round display 207SG131 can change the set value. The lights may be turned on in different manners at the start of the process and the start of the set value confirmation process.

  As described above, in the characteristic part 207SG of the present embodiment, when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 901 is once turned off (power cut) and then restarted, the lock switch 207SG051 is opened with the gaming machine frame 207SG003 open. By turning ON the clear switch and the clear switch, the setting value changing process is executed.

  At this time, on the display monitor 207SG029, as shown in FIGS. 45-25 (A) to 45-25 (E), the first display unit 207SG029A and the second display unit are turned off by turning off the power of the pachinko gaming machine 901. The display using the 207SG029B, the third display unit 207SG029C, and the fourth display unit 207SG029D (the display of the base value shown in FIG. 45-17) ends. In other words, the display monitor 207SG029 according to the present embodiment uses different numbers of display copies depending on whether the setting value change process is executed at startup or when the base value is displayed after startup is completed.

  Next, when the CPU 90103 starts the set value change processing by restarting the pachinko gaming machine 901, the display of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 901 is started on the fourth display unit 207SG029D. Then, when the setting changeover switch 207SG052 is operated in the state where the setting value is displayed on the fourth display unit 207SG029D as described above, the display on the fourth display unit 207SG029D is updated. When the lock switch 207SG051 is turned off in this state, the numerical value displayed on the fourth display unit 207SG29D is set as a new set value.

  Further, in the characteristic portion 207SG of the present embodiment, when the pachinko gaming machine 901 is powered off (powered off) and then restarted, the lock switch 207SG051 is turned on while the gaming machine frame 207SG003 is opened. By setting (clear switch is OFF), the set value confirmation processing is executed.

  At this time, on the display monitor 207SG029, as shown in FIG. 45-25 (A), FIG. 45-25 (B) and FIG. 45-25 (E), by turning off the power of the pachinko gaming machine 901, the first The display using the display unit 207SG029A, the second display unit 207SG029B, the third display unit 207SG029C, and the fourth display unit 207SG029D (the display of the base value shown in FIG. 45-17) ends. In other words, the display monitor 207SG029 according to the present embodiment uses different numbers of display copies when the set value confirmation process is executed at the time of startup and when the base value is displayed after the startup is completed.

  Next, when the CPU 90103 starts the set value confirmation processing by restarting the pachinko gaming machine 901, the display of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 901 is started on the fourth display unit 207SG029D. The display of the set value on the fourth display unit 207SG029D ends when the lock switch 207SG051 is turned off, and the pachinko gaming machine 901 becomes ready for a game.

  45-24 is a flowchart showing the power failure detection process (207SGSa013c) executed by the CPU 90103 in the set value change process and the set value confirmation process. In the set value confirmation process, first, the CPU 90103 first determines whether or not there is an input of a power supply cutoff signal indicating that the power supply voltage from the power supply substrate (not shown) has dropped to a predetermined value or less (207SGS081). When the power-off signal is not input (207SGS081; N), the process is terminated, and when the power-off signal is input (207SGS081; Y), the backup data including the setting value information stored in the RAM 90102 is specified. (207SGS082), the specified backup data is stored in the backup data storage area provided in the RAM 90102 (207SGS083). Then, after creating the check data used when restoring the backup data and storing it in the backup data storage area (207SGS084), the process shifts to a loop process that does not execute any process until the pachinko gaming machine 901 is cut off.

  Incidentally, in the game control timer interrupt processing in the characteristic portion 207SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 45-28, the CPU 90103 executes the same power-off detection processing (207SGS200) as the above-described 207SGSa057 and 207SGSa108. After that, S9021 to S9027 (see FIG. 40) are executed.

  Next, a process executed by the effect control CPU 90120 will be described.

  45-29 is a flowchart showing the effect control main processing executed by the effect control CPU 90120. In the effect control main process, the effect control CPU 90120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (207SGS401) to clear the RAM 90122 and set various initial values, and the CTC (counter / timer) mounted on the effect control board 9012. Circuit) register setting.

  In addition, the effect control CPU 90120 sets a command reception waiting timer according to the reception waiting period of the command transmitted from the main board 9011 (207SGS403). Then, the value of the command reception waiting timer is decremented by 1 (207SGS404), and it is determined whether the command reception waiting timer has timed out (207SGS405). When the command reception waiting timer has timed out (207 SGS 405; N), the processing of 207 SGS 404 and 207 SGS 405 is repeatedly executed and waits until the command reception waiting timer times out.

  When the command reception waiting timer has timed out (207SGS405; Y), the effect control CPU 90120 determines whether or not the hot start notification command has been received (207SGS406). When the hot start notification command is received (207SGS406; Y), that is, when the pachinko gaming machine 901 is restored from the power failure, the player information stored in the RAM 90122 (the player information in the player information input processing described later After receiving the input of information, the information including the number of fluctuations, the number of big hits, the number of super reach, etc. stored in the RAM 90122 is cleared (207SGS407), and the process proceeds to 207SGS427.

  When the hot start notification command is not received (207SGS406; N), the effect control CPU 90120 determines whether or not the cold notification command is received (207SGS408). When the cold notification command is received (207SGS408; Y), the player information and the performance information stored in the RAM 90122 (the number of fluctuations, the number of big hits stored in the RAM 90122 since the last time the pachinko gaming machine 901 was activated, the number of big hits, (207SGS409) while clearing the information including the number of times of super-reach, etc., and notifying that the information stored in the RAM 90102 has been cleared, and that the player information and the effect information stored in the RAM 90122 have been cleared. A RAM clear notification process for executing (RAM clear notification) is executed (207SGS410). In the RAM clear notification process, the image on the image display device 905 (for example, as shown in FIG. 45-36 (A), the player information and the effect information stored in the RAM 90122 on the image display device 905 are cleared. A notification image 207SG005M1) for notifying that the pachinko gaming machine 901 is activated after a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds) of displaying the game effect lamp 909, outputting sound from the speakers 908L and 908R, etc. It is only necessary to notify that the player information and the effect information stored in the RAM 90122 have been cleared. After the RAM clear notification process is executed, the process proceeds to 207SGS427.

  If the cold start notification command is not received (207SGS408; N), the effect control CPU 90120 determines whether the set value change start notification command or the set value confirmation start notification command is received (207SGS411). When the setting value change start notification command or the setting value confirmation start notification command is received (207SGS411; Y), that is, when the pachinko gaming machine 901 is activated in the setting value changing state or the setting value checking state, the setting value is changed. A set value related informing process for executing a notification that the operation is being performed (notifying that the setting value is being changed) and a notification that the setting value is being confirmed (notifying that the setting value is being confirmed) is executed (207SGS412).

  In addition, in the characteristic part 207SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 45-36 (B) and FIG. 45-36 (C), the image display device 905 is used as a notification during setting value change and a notification during setting value confirmation. , The notification image 207SG005M2 indicating that the setting variable is being changed and the notification image 207SG005M3 indicating that the setting value is being confirmed are displayed, but the pachinko gaming machine 901 is activated in the setting value changing state or the setting value confirming state. In general, the gaming machine frame 207SG003 is open, and a game hall clerk who changes or confirms the set value visually recognizes the display monitor 207SG029 mounted on the main board 9011. It is in the state of doing. In other words, the set value change state and the set value confirmation state are states in which the image displayed on the image display device 905 cannot be visually recognized by a store clerk or the like who changes or confirms the set value. It is considered that the clerk of the game hall cannot judge from the display of the image display device 905 whether the pachinko gaming machine 901 is in the set value changing state or the set value confirming state. Therefore, as the notification of the change of the set value and the notification of the set value being confirmed, the pachinko game machine is provided to the clerk of the game hall who changes or checks the set value by the sound output from the speakers 908L and 908R and the light emission of the game effect lamp 909. It may be notified that the 901 is activated in the set value change state or the set value confirmation state.

  Further, the effect control CPU 90120, the first movable body initialization process (207SGS413) for checking the operation of the first movable body 207SG321, and the second movable body initialization for performing the operation check of the second movable body 207SG322. The process (207SGS414) is executed. In the first movable body initialization process and the second movable body initialization process in the characteristic portion 207SG of the present embodiment, the operation check of the second movable body 207SG322 is performed after the operation check of the first movable body 207SG321 is completed. It is designed to be executed (see FIGS. 45-35).

  Here, the first movable body initialization processing and the second movable body initialization processing will be described with reference to FIGS. 45-33 and 45-34. 45-33 is a schematic explanatory diagram showing operation modes of the non-detection time operation control and the actual operation confirmation operation control performed by the effect control CPU 90120. 45-34 is an explanatory diagram showing the control speed in the actual operation confirmation operation control, and FIG. 45B is an explanatory view showing the control speed in the non-detection operation control.

  The first movable body 207SG321 and the second movable body 207SG322 are provided so as to be capable of reciprocating between their respective origin positions (first position) and effect positions (second position), and from the origin position to the effect position (first position). The forward movement to the second position) and the returning movement from the effect position to the origin position are actual operation modes of the first movable body 207SG321 and the second movable body 207SG322 during variable display and the like.

  When the first movable body initialization process or the second movable body initialization process is performed, the effect control CPU 90120 does not detect the detected portions of the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322 by the origin detection sensors 207SG331 and 207SG332, that is, the movable body is movable. If the body 207SG321, 207SG322 has moved for some reason (for example, it has moved from the origin position during transportation or installation on a game island, or if the origin could not be restored during the previous operation (for example, when the motor is removed during performance). The movable body 207SG321, 207SG322 cannot be confirmed to return to its original position due to adjustment, a failure, a catch, etc., or a movable body error (abnormal operation) has occurred, such as inability to operate. Other than the origin position When in a position (for example, a position indicated by a black circle corresponding to the non-detection operation control in FIG. 45-22, which is a predetermined position between the origin position and the union position), the non-detection operation control for returning the origin is performed Run. When this non-detection operation control is executed, since the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322 are located away from the origin position, the only operation is to move the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322 in the origin position direction.

  Further, the effect control CPU 90120 detects when the non-detection operation control is executed in the first movable body initialization process or the second movable body initialization process, or when the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322 are detected by the origin detection sensors 207SG331 and 207SG332. If so, the actual operation confirmation operation control is executed. The operation control for actual operation confirmation is the same as the actual operation actually performed in the effect using the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322 (for example, the movable body effect executed during the variable display).

  Next, the control speed set when the effect control CPU 90120 executes the non-detection operation control and the actual operation confirmation operation control will be compared. The speeds shown in FIGS. 45-34 (A) and 45-34 (B) are control speeds set by the production control CPU 90120 to operate the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322, and the movable body 207SG321. , 207SG322 is different from the actual operating speed. That is, for example, when operating the predetermined movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322, even if the same control speed is set in one movement section and the other movement section between the origin position and the effect position, one movement section When the mode is different between the other moving section and the other moving section (for example, a section with a spring and a section without a spring, a straight section and a curved section), or even when the same moving section rises and falls, the movable bodies 207SG321, 207SG322 The actual operating speed of may be different from the control speed. Even if the same control speed is set for the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322, if there is a difference in size, weight, operating mode, operating distance, drive mechanism, etc., of the movable bodies 207SG321. , 207SG322 does not necessarily have the same actual operating speed. When a plurality of movable bodies 207SG321, 207SG322 are operated by stepping motors having the same performance, even if the same control speed is set for each movable body 207SG321, 207SG322, the size, weight, and weight of each movable body 207SG321, 207SG322, When there are differences in the operation mode, operation distance, drive mechanism, etc., the actual operation speeds of the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322 are not necessarily the same.

  As shown in FIG. 45-34 (A), the effect control CPU 90120 corresponds to the timer count value of the actual operation confirmation process timer in the set actual operation confirmation process data when executing the actual operation confirmation operation control. The movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322 are operated based on the set control speed. Specifically, control is performed to accelerate from the origin position and then decelerate and stop at the effect position, and to accelerate from the effect position and then decelerate and stop at the origin position. That is, in the operation control for actual operation confirmation for confirming that each movable body 207SG321, 207SG322 can operate normally, the control speed of the movable bodies 207SG321, 207SG322 is reduced between the origin position and the effect position. Change from high speed to low speed. That is, when performing the effect using each of the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322, the effect control CPU 90120 has the lowest speed (low speed) that is the first speed and the highest speed (high speed) that is the second speed that is faster than the lowest speed. Since each movable body 207SG321, 207SG322 is controlled to operate at a speed within the range of and, even when executing the operation control for actual operation confirmation, the minimum speed (low speed) that is the first speed and the minimum speed The movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322 are controlled so as to operate at a speed within the range of the maximum speed (high speed) as the second speed which is also faster.

  That is, the minimum speed as the first speed and the maximum speed as the second speed are the actual operation speeds of the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322, and the control speeds are set to the minimum speed and the maximum speed as the operation speeds. Will be set. In the following, when the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322 are operated based on the lowest control speed, they operate at the lowest speed, and when the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322 are operated based on the highest control speed, the highest speed is achieved. It will be described as one that operates.

  Here, the control speed is set such that the operating speed of the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322 during acceleration and deceleration is the minimum speed in the actual operation confirmation operation control. Further, when returning to the origin position after moving to the effect position, the movable body 207SG321, by controlling so as to be the lowest speed in the actual operation confirmation operation control for a longer time than when stopping at the effect position. The origin detection sensors 207SG331 and 207SG332 detect the detected portion after the 207SG322 is surely decelerated.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 45-34 (B), when the effect control CPU 90120 executes the non-detection operation control, the effect control CPU 90120 moves from an arbitrary position between the origin position and the effect position to the origin position. , The control is always performed so as to operate at the lowest speed (first speed) in the actual operation confirmation operation control. That is, the effect control CPU 90120 determines that the maximum speed (maximum operation speed) in the non-detection operation control as the first operation control is equal to or lower than the minimum speed in the actual operation confirmation operation control as the second operation control (this embodiment). In the characteristic portion 207SG of the form, the speed is always the same as the minimum speed in the actual operation confirmation operation control), and is always based on the lowest minimum control speed among the control speeds set in the actual operation confirmation operation control. Control is performed to operate the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322.

  In this case, it is unclear how far the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322 are from the origin position. Therefore, when the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322 are located near the origin position, the actual operation confirmation operation control is performed. If the movable body 207SG321, 207SG322 returns to the origin position when it is operated at the control speed when accelerated, that is, at high speed, the origin detection sensors 207SG331 and 207SG332 cannot reliably detect the detected portion or can move from a short distance. Since the movable bodies 207SG321, 207SG322, etc. may be damaged by the impact when the bodies 207SG321, 207SG322 are returned to the origin position and their movement is restricted, the movable bodies 207SG321, 207SG322, etc. should be operated at the lowest speed in the actual operation confirmation operation control. Control.

  Returning to FIG. 45-29, after the first movable body initialization process (207SGS413) and the second movable body initialization process (207SGS413) are executed, the effect control CPU 90120 sets the set value during the operation check of the first movable body 207SG321. Of the set value or the set value early change end flag indicating that the check of the set value is completed is set (207SGS415). When the set value early change end flag is not set (207SGS415; N), it is further determined whether or not a set value change end notification command or a set value confirmation end notification command has been received (207SGS416). When the set value change end notification command or the set value confirmation end notification command is received (207SGS416; N), the process proceeds to 207SGS412, and when the set value change end notification command and the set value confirmation end notification command are not received (207SGS416; Y) Proceeds to 207 SGS 417. If the set value early change end flag is set (207SGS415; Y), the process of 207SGS416 is not executed and the process proceeds to 207SGS417.

  In 207SGS417, the effect control CPU 90120 determines whether or not the initialization (operation check) of the first movable body 207SG321 is completed (207SGS417). If the initialization of the first movable body 207SG321 is not completed (207SGS417; N), the set value early change end flag is set and the process proceeds to 207SG412 (207SGS418), and the initialization of the first movable body 207SG321 is completed. If it is (207SGS417; Y), it is determined whether the initialization (operation check) of the second movable body 207SG322 has been completed (207SGS419). If the initialization of the second movable body 207SG322 has not been completed (207SGS419; N), the process proceeds to 207SGS412, and if the initialization of the second movable body 207SG322 has been completed (207SGS419; Y), the setting value early change end It is determined whether the flag is set (207SGS420).

  In 207SGS420, when the set value early change end flag is set (207SGS420; Y), the set value early change end flag is cleared (207SGS421), and the first movable body initialization process (207SGS422) which is the same process as 207SGS413. ) And the second movable body initialization process (207SGS423) which is the same process as 207SGS414, and the first movable body initialization process (207SGS422) and 207SGS414 and the second movable body initialization process (207SGS423) are performed. It is determined whether or not the initialization (operation check) of the movable body 207SG321 and the second movable body 207SG322 is completed (207SGS424). When the initialization of the first movable body 207SG321 and the second movable body 207SG322 has not been completed (207SGS424; N), the process proceeds to 207SGS422, and the initialization of the first movable body 207SG321 and the second movable body 207SG322 has been completed. (207SGS424; Y) advances to 207SGS427.

  As described above, regarding the processing of these 207SG412 to 207SG424, as shown in FIG. 45-35 (A), the effect control CPU 90120 receives the setting value change start notification command or the setting value confirmation start notification command (pachinko). The setting value change notification and the setting value confirmation notification are started from the time when the gaming machine 901 is controlled to the setting value change state or the setting value confirmation state, and the first movable body initialization processing and the second movable body initialization processing are performed. To execute. As described above, in the characteristic portion 207SG of the present embodiment, the second movable body initialization process is executed after the first movable body initialization process is completed, that is, the first movable body 207SG321. After the operation check is completed, the operation check of the second movable body 207SG322 is executed.

  At this time, as shown in FIG. 45-35 (A), after the first movable body initialization process and the second movable body initialization process, the effect control CPU 90120 notifies the set value change end notification command or the set value confirmation end notification. When the command is received, that is, when the change of the set value or the confirmation of the set value is finished after the operation check of the first movable body 207SG321 and the second movable body 207SG322 is finished, the first movable body initialization process is performed again. The second movable body initialization process is executed.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 45-35 (B), of the first movable body initialization processing and the second movable body initialization processing, only the first movable body initialization processing is finished and the effect control is performed. When the CPU 90120 for use receives the set value change end notification command or the set value confirmation end notification command, that is, the operation check of the first movable body 207SG321 is completed, but the operation check of the second movable body 207SG322 is not completed yet. When the change of the set value and the confirmation of the set value are completed in the state where there is no such a state, the first movable body initialization processing and the second movable body initialization processing are executed again after the second movable body initialization processing is completed. It is like this.

  Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 45-35 (C), the effect control CPU 90120 receives a setting value change end notification command or a setting value confirmation end notification command at a timing at which the first movable body initialization processing is not yet completed. In this case, that is, when the change of the set value and the confirmation of the set value are completed while the operation check of the first moveable body 207SG321 is not completed, the first moveable body initialization process and the second moveable body initializing process being executed Only the initialization processing is executed, and the first movable body initialization processing and the second movable body initialization processing are not executed again.

  When the setting value change start notification command and the setting value confirmation start notification command have not been received by the 207SGS 411 (207SGS411; N), the effect control CPU 90120 determines whether or not an error specification command has been received (207SGS425). . When the error designation command is received (207SGS425; Y), the error notification processing (207SGS426) for performing the error notification indicated by the error designation command is executed, and when the error designation command is not received (207SGS425; N), , 207 SGS403.

  As the error notification in the characteristic part 207SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 45-36 (D), if the notification image 207SG005M4 corresponding to the error identified from the error designation command is displayed on the image display device 905. Good.

  As described above, in the effect control main processing in the characteristic unit 207SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 45-30, when the pachinko gaming machine 901 is started by hot start, the player information (the player information While clearing the number of fluctuations, the number of big hits, the number of super-reach, etc., from the RAM 90122 after receiving the input, the production information (the number of fluctuations, the number of big hits, the number of super-reach since the last start of the pachinko gaming machine 901) ) And set value information (any one of the values “1” to “6” corresponding to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 901) are not cleared from the RAM 90122. Further, when the pachinko gaming machine 901 is started by cold start, the player information and the effect information are cleared from the RAM 90122, while the setting value information is not cleared from the RAM 90122. Further, when the pachinko gaming machine 901 is started in the set value changing state or the setting confirming state, the player information and the effect information are not cleared from the RAM 90122, while the set value information is already stored in the RAM 90122. The existing set value information is overwritten (updated and stored).

  That is, in the characteristic part 207SG of the present embodiment, the information to be cleared from the RAM 90122 differs depending on whether the pachinko gaming machine 901 is started in hot start, cold start, set value confirmation state, or set value change state. There is.

  Then, in 207 SGS 427, the effect control CPU 90120 specifies which of the hot start notification command, the cold start notification command, the setting value change end notification command, and the setting value confirmation end notification command has been received, and the image display device 905 receives the reception. The display of the initial symbol corresponding to the command is started. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 45-31, when the received command is a hot start notification command, a set value confirmation end notification command, or a cold start notification command, that is, a new set value is set in the pachinko gaming machine 901. If it is not set, the display of the decorative design is started on the image display device 905 with a combination of “1”, “2”, and “3” from the left as the initial design. Further, if the received command is a setting value change end notification command, that is, if there is a possibility that a new setting value has been set in the pachinko gaming machine 901, from the left as an initial symbol on the image display device 905 The display of the decorative pattern is started with the combination of "4", "5", and "6".

  In the characteristic part 207SG in the present embodiment, when there is a possibility that a new set value is set in the pachinko gaming machine 901, “4”, “5” from the left as an initial symbol on the image display device 905. , And “6” are combined to start displaying the decorative pattern, the present invention is not limited to this, and a set value (eg, “6”) advantageous to the player is set. When set, a decorative value is a combination of "4", "5", and "6" as the initial design at a higher rate than when a setting value that is unfavorable to the player (for example, "1") is set. It may be displayed. By doing so, it is possible to suggest that the pachinko gaming machine 901 is set with a setting value that is advantageous for the player, and it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game.

  In the characteristic part 207SG in the present embodiment, when there is a possibility that a new set value is set in the pachinko gaming machine 901, “4”, “5” from the left as an initial symbol on the image display device 905. , And “6” are combined to start displaying the decorative pattern, the present invention is not limited to this, and a set value (eg, “6”) advantageous to the player is set. The initial symbol displayed on the image display device 905 may be different depending on whether the set value is set or the set value that is disadvantageous to the player (for example, “1”) is set. In addition, the speaker 908L and 908R are used when a set value that is advantageous to the player (for example, "6") is set and when a set value that is disadvantageous to the player is set (for example, "1"). The volume of the output sound, the light amount of the game effect lamp 909, and the like may be different.

  Then, returning to FIG. 45-29, the effect control CPU 90120 sets “4” to the read-ahead restriction counter in order to restrict the execution of the read-ahead notice effect in the first four fluctuations (207SGS428). After that, the effect control CPU 90120 proceeds to loop processing for monitoring the timer interrupt flag (207SGS429). When a timer interrupt occurs, the effect control CPU 90120 sets a timer interrupt flag in the timer interrupt process. If the timer interrupt flag is set (ON), the effect control CPU 90120 clears the flag (207SGS430), and executes the following processing.

  The effect control CPU 90120 first executes a start notification process for notifying that the pachinko gaming machine 901 has been started (207SGS431). In the activation notification processing, for example, it is determined whether or not the interruption is the first interruption from the activation of the pachinko gaming machine 901. If it is the first interrupt from the activation of the pachinko gaming machine 901, it is specified which of the hot start notification command, the cold start notification command, the set value change end notification command, and the set value confirmation end notification command is received, The boot notification process table corresponding to the received command is selected, and the boot notification process timer corresponding to the received command is started. After the start notification process timer is started, the start notification process is executed at the next and subsequent interrupts to start the pachinko gaming machine 901 based on the value of the start notification process timer and the start notification process table. Notification may be performed.

  In the characteristic part 207SG in the present embodiment, the command received when the pachinko gaming machine 901 is activated is one of a hot start notification command, a cold start notification command, a set value change end notification command, and a set value confirmation end notification command. Depending on whether there is a pachinko gaming machine 901, the mode of activation notification is different.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 45-32, when a hot start notification command or a set value confirmation end notification command is received when starting the pachinko gaming machine 901, that is, a new pachinko gaming machine 901 When the set value is not set, the game effect lamp 909 emits light for 60 seconds and the speakers 908L and 908R output the output sound A for 30 seconds. It should be noted that the 60-second light emission start timing of these game effect lamps 909 and the output start timing of the output sound A for 30 seconds from the speakers 908L, 908R are the same, but the 60-second light emission start timing of these game effect lamps 909 is the same. The output start timing of the output sound A for 30 seconds from the speakers 908L and 908R may be different.

  When a cold start notification command is received when the pachinko gaming machine 901 is activated, that is, when a new set value is not set in the pachinko gaming machine 901 and the data in the RAM 90102 is cleared. In this case, the game effect lamp 909 emits light for 60 seconds and the output sound B is output from the speakers 908L and 908R for 30 seconds. Although the emission start timing of these game effect lamps 909 for 60 seconds and the output start timing of the output sound B for 30 seconds from the speakers 908L, 908R are the same, the emission start timing of these game effect lamps 909 for 60 seconds is the same. The output start timing of the output sound B from the speakers 908L and 908R for 30 seconds may be different.

  In other words, the specific control in the present invention is, when the pachinko gaming machine 901 is started in the hot start or the setting confirmation state, the production control CPU 90120 causes the gaming effect lamp 909 to emit light for 60 seconds and the speakers 908L and 908R for 30 seconds. When the pachinko gaming machine 901 is activated by cold start, the CPU 90120 for effect control emits the game effect lamp 909 for 60 seconds and outputs the sound for 30 seconds from the speakers 908L, 908R. It includes both performing the output of B.

  In addition, when the set value change end notification command or the set value change end notification command is received when starting the pachinko gaming machine 901, the game effect lamp 909 emits light for 40 seconds and the speakers 908L, 908R for 20 seconds. The output sound C is output, and the image display device 905 displays a message image for 40 seconds (for example, a message image indicating that the setting value change is completed). Although the emission start timing of these game effect lamps 909 for 40 seconds, the output start timing of the output sound C for 20 seconds from the speakers 908L, 908R, and the display start timing of the message image on the image display device 905 are the same, The emission start timing of the game effect lamp 909 for 40 seconds, the output start timing of the output sound C from the speakers 908L and 908R for 20 seconds, and the display start timing of the message image on the image display device 905 may be different.

  In particular, when a set value change end notification command is received when starting the pachinko gaming machine 901, and when a hot start notification command or a cold start notification command is received when starting the pachinko gaming machine 901. Unlike the above, since the message image is displayed on the image display device 905, it is easy to recognize that the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 901 has been changed.

  In the characteristic part 207SG of the present embodiment, an example is shown in which the start notification when the pachinko gaming machine 901 is started is executed using the game effect lamp 909, the speakers 908L and 908R, and the image display device 905. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko gaming machine 901 is provided with an external output terminal capable of outputting a signal to a management device such as a management computer of a game hall or a counter of each machine, and the pachinko gaming machine 901 is activated. As a start notification when the above, a signal that can specify that the pachinko gaming machine 901 has started may be output from the external output terminal to the management device.

  Further, in the characteristic part 207SG of the present embodiment, even if the pachinko gaming machine 901 is started in any of a hot start, a cold start, a setting change state, and a setting confirmation state, a device for performing start notification is partly common. An example is shown in which the game effect lamp 909 emits light and the speakers 908L and 908R output sound. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko gaming machine 901 is hot. The device that executes the start notification differs depending on whether the start is started in the start, the cold start, the setting change state, or the setting confirmation state (for example, when the pachinko gaming machine 901 is started by the cold start, the image display device 905). When the pachinko gaming machine 901 is started in the setting change state by displaying the message image in Signal may be equal) to output to the management device from the force terminal.

  In addition, the notification mode in each device that executes the startup notification may be different depending on whether the pachinko gaming machine 901 is started in the hot start, cold start, setting change state, or setting confirmation state. Specifically, when the pachinko gaming machine 901 is started by cold start, all the gaming effect lamps 909 provided in the pachinko gaming machine 901 are made to emit light, while the pachinko gaming machine 901 is started in the setting change state. In this case, only a part of the game effect lamp 909 provided in the pachinko gaming machine 901 may be made to emit light.

  Further, when the pachinko gaming machine 901 is started in the setting change state, the gaming machine frame 207SG003 is in the opened state, and therefore sound is output from only one of the speakers 908L and 908R (the pachinko gaming machine 901 When three or more speakers are provided, sound is output only from some speakers.) When the pachinko gaming machine 901 is started by cold start, the gaming machine frame 207SG003 is closed. In many cases, sound may be output from all the speakers 908L and 908R. Further, when the pachinko gaming machine 901 is started in the setting changed state, a message image indicating that the setting is being changed such as “setting changing” is displayed on the image display device 905, while the pachinko gaming machine 901 is cold. When it is activated at the start, a message image indicating that the RAM 90102 or the RAM 90122 such as “RAM has been cleared” may be displayed on the image display device 905 may be displayed.

  Furthermore, when the pachinko gaming machine 901 is provided with a plurality of external output terminals described above, the terminals that output signals to the management device may be different according to each notification. For example, when the pachinko gaming machine 901 is started in the setting change state, as a setting value change notification, a period until the setting value change ends (until the setting value change end notification command or the setting value designation command is received). A signal is output from the terminal corresponding to the setting change over a period of time) to the management device, and after the setting value change is completed, a signal is output from the terminal corresponding to the error or RAM clear to the management device as a RAM clear notification. When the pachinko gaming machine 901 is started by cold start, it is only necessary to output a signal from the terminal corresponding to the error or RAM clear to the management device as the RAM clear notification.

  When the external output terminal is commonly used in each notification, the timing of outputting a signal to the management device may be different according to each notification.

  As described above, in the boot notification process, the boot notification mode of the pachinko gaming machine 901 is different depending on the received command, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko gaming machine 901 is not limited to this. The startup notification of may be executed in the notification mode of 1 regardless of the received command. Also, the activation notification of the pachinko gaming machine 901 exemplifies a mode that is executed when any of the hot start notification command, the cold start notification command, the set value confirmation end notification command, and the set value change end notification command is received. The present invention is not limited to this, and of the hot start notification command, the cold start notification command, the setting value confirmation end notification command, and the setting value change end notification command, even if the pachinko gaming machine 901 receives the command. You may provide the command which does not perform start notification.

  Further, in the characteristic part 207SG in the present embodiment, as the initialization effect in the present invention, a different mode of activation notification is executed according to the command received when the pachinko gaming machine 901 is activated, or the pachinko gaming machine 901 is executed. Although the form which displays the decorative pattern of a different combination according to the command received when starting is displayed on the image display apparatus 905 is illustrated, this invention is not limited to this and these initialization effects are shown. The mode of the start notification and the combination of the decorative patterns may be all different depending on the command received when the pachinko gaming machine 901 is started, or only a part thereof may be the same.

  Further, in the characteristic part 207SG in the present embodiment, in any of the case where the pachinko gaming machine 901 is activated by hot start, is activated by cold start, is activated in the setting change state, or is activated in the setting confirmation state. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the pachinko gaming machine 901 is activated by a hot start or in a setting confirmation state, these activation notifications are performed. May not be executed.

  Returning to FIG. 45-29, the effect control CPU 90120 then executes power-off detection processing (207SGS432). In the power-off detection process, as shown in FIG. 45-37, the effect control CPU 90120 first receives an input of a power-off signal from a power supply board (not shown) indicating that the power supply voltage has dropped below a predetermined value. It is determined whether or not (207SGS441). When the power-off signal is not input (207SGS441; N), the processing is terminated, and when the power-off signal is input (207SGS441; Y), the setting value information and the player information stored in the RAM 90122 are displayed. The included backup data is specified (207SGS442), and the specified backup data is stored in the backup data storage area provided in the RAM 90122 (207SGS443). Then, after creating the check data used when restoring the backup data and storing it in the backup data storage area (207SGS444), the process shifts to a loop process that does not execute any process until the pachinko gaming machine 901 is cut off.

  Returning to FIG. 45-29, the effect control CPU 90120 next analyzes the received effect control command, and sets a flag in accordance with the received effect control command (command analysis process: 207SGS433). In this command analysis processing, the effect control CPU 90120 confirms the content of the command transmitted from the main board 9011 stored in the received command buffer. The effect control command transmitted from the game control microcomputer 90100 is received by the interrupt process based on the effect control INT signal and is stored in the buffer area formed in the RAM 90122. In the command analysis processing, which command (see FIG. 45-8) is the effect control command stored in the buffer area is analyzed.

  Next, the effect control CPU 90120 performs effect control process processing (207SGS434). In the effect control process process, the process corresponding to the current control state (effect control process flag) is selected from among the processes corresponding to the control state, and the display control of the image display device 905 is executed.

  Next, a production random number updating process (207SGS435) for updating the count value of the counter for generating a production random number such as a big hit symbol determination random number, a player information input process (207SGS436) for receiving an input of player information, and a game. Player information output processing (207SGS437) for outputting player information, and performance information total processing (207SGS438) for totaling performance information are executed. After that, the process proceeds to a loop process of monitoring the timer interrupt flag (207SGS429).

  In the player information input process, the effect control CPU 90120 causes the player to operate the stick controller 9031A or the push button 9031B to generate a password (a password generated in an external server in which the player's game information is stored in advance). The player can access the server by using a communication terminal such as a smartphone and receive the input of the generated password) and stores the player information specified from the password in the RAM 90122. Further, the effect control CPU 90120 updates and stores the number of fluctuations, the number of big hits, the number of super reach, etc. as the player information stored every time the variable display, the big hit game, and the super reach are executed.

  In the player information output process, the effect control CPU 90120 generates a two-dimensional code based on the player information stored in the RAM 90122 by operating the stick controller 9031A or the push button 9031B of the player, and the two-dimensional code is generated. Is displayed on the image display device 905. After the completion of displaying the two-dimensional code, the player information stored in the RAM 90122 is cleared. The player reads the two-dimensional code displayed on the image display device 905 with a mobile terminal such as a smartphone and transmits the player information aggregated in the current game to an external server, so that the pachinko game machine is played. The cumulative player information in 901 can be stored in the server.

  In the effect information totaling process, the effect control CPU 90120 updates and stores the number of fluctuations, the number of big hits, the number of super reach, etc. stored in the RAM 90122 as effect information every time a variable display, a big hit game, and a super reach are executed. To do.

  Next, an effect control process process in the characteristic unit 207SG of the present embodiment will be described. As illustrated in FIG. 45-38, in the effect control process processing, the effect control CPU 90120 first determines whether or not the value of the prefetching restriction counter is “0” (207SGS451). If the value of the read-ahead regulation counter is "0" (207SGS451; Y), after executing the read-ahead notice setting process (S90161), one of S90170 to S90177 (see FIG. 43) depending on the effect control process flag. Execute the process.

  If the value of the read-ahead regulation counter is one of "1" to "4" (207SGS451; N), it is further determined whether the value of the effect control process flag is "1" (207SGS452). ). When the value of the effect control process flag is either "0" or "2" to "7" (207SGS452; N), one of S170 to S177 (see FIG. 43) according to the effect control process flag. When the process is executed and the value of the effect control process flag is “1” (207SGS452; Y), the value of the prefetch restriction counter is decremented by 1 (207SGS453), and S90170 to S90177 (according to the effect control process flag). (See FIG. 43). By executing the processing of 207SGS451 to 207SGS453 as described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 901 immediately after startup, execution of the prefetching notice effect is restricted until the variable display is executed four times.

  In the characteristic part 207SG in the present embodiment, the effect control main processing and the effect control process processing are executed by the effect control CPU 90120 based on the activation of the pachinko gaming machine 901, so that the variable display is performed four times. Although the form of restricting the execution of the pre-reading notice effect is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the CPU 90103 starts the winning a prize determination process based on the activation of the pachinko gaming machine 901 (FIG. The execution of the pre-reading notice effect may be restricted over four variable displays by not executing (see No. 41).

  As described above, in the characteristic part 207SG of the present embodiment, based on the fact that the pachinko gaming machine 901 is ready to play, the execution of the pre-reading notice effect is restricted over four variable displays. Although the present invention is not limited to this, the volume of the sound output from the speakers 908L and 908R, the game based on the fact that the game becomes possible is set based on the fact that the game is possible. The light amount of the effect lamp 909, the setting of the effect according to the RTC, and the like may be set in the factory-shipped state.

  As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 901 according to the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 44-2 (H), the effect control CPU 90120 has the reach effect of the super reach A or super reach B as the first suggestion effect, It is possible to execute the reach effect of Super Reach C or Super Reach D as the second suggestion effect, and when executing the reach effect of Super Reach C or Super Reach D, the super reach C or Super Reach D is executed. Since the title 31AK007 corresponding to the reach effect of the super reach C or the super reach D is notified from the start of the reach effect, the notification of the title 31AK007 according to the reach effect can be executed, and the effect of the effect can be improved.

The present embodiment also includes Invention 207SG described below. That is, conventionally, as a pachinko gaming machine with a set value changing function, there is, for example, one described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2010-200902, the fact that the setting state is set is notified only on the liquid crystal screen, and thus it is not possible to suitably notify that the setting state is set. There was a problem. Therefore, when paying attention to the problem, as a gaming machine described in means 1 of invention 207SG for solving the problem,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 901) that can be variably displayed and can be controlled in an advantageous state advantageous for a player (for example, a jackpot gaming state),
Setting means capable of setting any of the plurality of setting values (for example, 1 to 6 as the setting value) (for example, a portion in which the CPU 90103 executes the setting value changing process shown in FIG. 45-22); ,
With game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 90103 executes special symbol process processing) capable of executing control relating to the advantageous state based on the set value set by the setting means,
Equipped with
Controlled by the game control means, at least an information display unit including a variable display unit (eg, first special symbol display device 207SG004A and second special symbol display device 207SG004B) capable of performing variable display (for example, game information display Part 207SG200),
When the specific condition is satisfied (for example, as shown in FIG. 45-20, when the pachinko gaming machine 901 is activated, the clear switch, the lock switch 207SG051, and the open sensor 207SG090 are respectively ON), the setting value of the setting means is changed. The process moves to a setting state in which the setting can be performed (for example, the state in which the CPU 90103 is executing the setting value changing process shown in FIG. 45-22),
When it is in the setting state, a display capable of recognizing the setting state is displayed on the information display unit (for example, as shown in FIG. 45-27 (A), the CPU 90103 is executing the setting value changing process). If it is, the part that lights up all the segments that make up the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B)
According to this feature, since it is informed that the setting state is set in the information display unit in which the variable display, which is an important display in the gaming machine, is notified, this feature is preferable. Notification can be made.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine described in means 2 of invention 207SG,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 901) that can be variably displayed and can be controlled in an advantageous state advantageous for a player (for example, a jackpot gaming state),
Setting means capable of setting any of the plurality of setting values (for example, 1 to 6 as the setting value) (for example, a portion in which the CPU 90103 executes the setting value changing process shown in FIG. 45-22); ,
With game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 90103 executes special symbol process processing) capable of executing control relating to the advantageous state based on the set value set by the setting means,
Equipped with
Controlled by the game control means, at least an information display unit including a variable display unit (eg, first special symbol display device 207SG004A and second special symbol display device 207SG004B) capable of performing variable display (for example, game information display Part 207SG200),
Set by the setting means when the confirmation condition is satisfied (for example, as shown in FIG. 45-20, when the pachinko gaming machine 901 is started, the clear switch is OFF, and the lock switch 207SG051 and the open sensor 207SG090 are ON). To a confirmation state in which the set value being confirmed can be confirmed (for example, the state in which the CPU 90103 is executing the setting value confirmation processing shown in FIG. 45-23),
When it is in the confirmation state, a display capable of recognizing the confirmation state is displayed on the information display unit (for example, as shown in FIG. 45-27 (A), the CPU 90103 is executing the set value confirmation process). If it is, the part that lights up all the segments that make up the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B)
According to this feature, since it is informed that it is in the confirmation state in the information display section where the variable display, which is an important display in the gaming machine, is notified, this feature is preferable. Notification can be made.

Further, as a gaming machine described in means A of invention 207SG for solving the problem of the gaming machine described in JP 2010-200902 A,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 901) that can be variably displayed and can be controlled in an advantageous state advantageous for a player (for example, a jackpot gaming state),
Setting means capable of setting any of the plurality of setting values (for example, 1 to 6 as the setting value) (for example, a portion in which the CPU 90103 executes the setting value changing process shown in FIG. 45-22); ,
With game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 90103 executes special symbol process processing) capable of executing control relating to the advantageous state based on the set value set by the setting means,
Equipped with
Controlled by the game control means, at least an information display unit including a variable display unit (eg, first special symbol display device 207SG004A and second special symbol display device 207SG004B) capable of performing variable display (for example, game information display Part 207SG200),
When the specific condition is satisfied (for example, as shown in FIG. 45-20, when the pachinko gaming machine 901 is activated, the clear switch, the lock switch 207SG051, and the open sensor 207SG090 are respectively ON), the setting value of the setting means is changed. The process moves to a setting state in which the setting can be performed (for example, the state in which the CPU 90103 is executing the setting value changing process shown in FIG. 45-22),
When in the setting state, the information display unit displays a display that can be recognized as being in the setting state (for example, as shown in FIG. 45-27 (A), the CPU 90103 is executing the setting value changing process). If it is, the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B all the segments that make up),
further,
A movable body operably provided (for example, reels 301L, 301C, 301R),
Drive means (for example, reel stepping motors 307L, 307C, 307R) for generating drive force for operating the movable body;
The drive control of the drive means is controlled by a clock signal (for example, a control clock signal) and a plurality of different control signals (for example, output control signal, electrical angle initialization signal, forward / reverse rotation signal, excitation setting signal 0, excitation setting). Drive control means (for example, motor drive circuits 85, 86, 87) that can be executed based on inputs of signal 1, excitation setting signal 2, A-phase output setting signal, B-phase output setting signal),
Production control means (for example, production control board 80) for controlling movable production (for example, variable display production) accompanied by the operation of the movable body,
Convert serial control data (for example, motor drive circuit 1 control data, motor drive circuit 2 control data, motor drive circuit 3 control data) by a serial signal transmitted from the effect control means into a plurality of different control signals. Output to the drive control means, and serial clock data by a serial signal transmitted from the effect control means (for example, motor drive circuit 1 clock signal data, motor drive circuit 2 clock signal data, motor drive circuit A signal conversion means (for example, a serial signal circuit 89) capable of converting the 3 clock signal data into a clock signal for control and outputting the clock signal to the drive control means;
A game machine characterized by including is described, and according to this feature, since it is informed that it is in a setting state in the information display unit where variable display, which is an important display in the game machine, is executed, Appropriate notification can be performed. Further, the clock signal input to the drive control means can be directly managed by the production control means by the serial clock data, and an inappropriate clock signal which is not synchronized with the serial signal from the individual clock signal generation circuit is driven. It is possible to prevent improper drive control from being performed by being input to the control means.

In addition, you may make it suggest a setting value by the aspect of the movable body production accompanied by the operation | movement of a movable body. For example, by selecting the mode of the movable body effect from a plurality of types by lottery or the like, and changing the selection ratio of each mode of the movable body effect by the set value that is set, the set value that is set is a game. The more advantageous the person is, the easier it is to perform the movable body effect according to the specific type of aspect. By doing so, the form of the movable body production is rich in variation, and moreover, the player can be given an opportunity to infer the set value by the appearance ratio of each form of the movable body production, so that the enjoyment of the game can be improved. You can
Further, as the effect display device, an image display device may be provided separately from the effect variable display unit 300, and the set value suggesting effect may be performed by the image display device. For example, displaying a character on an image display device, selecting the character from among a plurality of types each time a predetermined effect condition is established by lottery, etc., and varying the selection ratio of each character depending on the set value. Thus, the more advantageous the set value that is set for the player, the easier it is for the effect of the specific type of character to be performed. By doing so, it is possible to give the player an opportunity to infer the setting value based on the appearance ratio of each character, so that it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game.

Further, as a game machine described in means B of invention 207SG that solves the problem of the game machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 901) that can be variably displayed and can be controlled in an advantageous state advantageous for a player (for example, a jackpot gaming state),
Setting means capable of setting any of the plurality of setting values (for example, 1 to 6 as the setting value) (for example, a portion in which the CPU 90103 executes the setting value changing process shown in FIG. 45-22); ,
With game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 90103 executes special symbol process processing) capable of executing control relating to the advantageous state based on the set value set by the setting means,
Equipped with
Controlled by the game control means, at least an information display unit including a variable display unit (eg, first special symbol display device 207SG004A and second special symbol display device 207SG004B) capable of performing variable display (for example, game information display Part 207SG200),
Set by the setting means when the confirmation condition is satisfied (for example, as shown in FIG. 45-20, when the pachinko gaming machine 901 is started, the clear switch is OFF, and the lock switch 207SG051 and the open sensor 207SG090 are ON). To a confirmation state in which the set value being confirmed can be confirmed (for example, the state in which the CPU 90103 is executing the setting value confirmation processing shown in FIG. 45-23),
When in the confirmation state, the information display unit displays a display that allows the confirmation of the confirmation state (for example, as shown in FIG. 45-27 (A), the CPU 90103 is executing the set value confirmation process). If it is, the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B all the segments that make up),
further,
A movable body operably provided (for example, reels 301L, 301C, 301R),
Drive means (for example, reel stepping motors 307L, 307C, 307R) for generating drive force for operating the movable body;
The drive control of the drive means is controlled by a clock signal (for example, a control clock signal) and a plurality of different control signals (for example, output control signal, electrical angle initialization signal, forward / reverse rotation signal, excitation setting signal 0, excitation setting). Drive control means (for example, motor drive circuits 85, 86, 87) that can be executed based on inputs of signal 1, excitation setting signal 2, A-phase output setting signal, B-phase output setting signal),
Production control means (for example, production control board 80) for controlling movable production (for example, variable display production) accompanied by the operation of the movable body,
Convert serial control data (for example, motor drive circuit 1 control data, motor drive circuit 2 control data, motor drive circuit 3 control data) by a serial signal transmitted from the effect control means into a plurality of different control signals. Output to the drive control means, and serial clock data by a serial signal transmitted from the effect control means (for example, motor drive circuit 1 clock signal data, motor drive circuit 2 clock signal data, motor drive circuit A signal conversion means (for example, a serial signal circuit 89) capable of converting the 3 clock signal data into a clock signal for control and outputting the clock signal to the drive control means;
A game machine characterized by comprising: According to this feature, since it is informed that the information display unit in which variable display which is an important display in the game machine is executed is in a confirmation state, Appropriate notification can be performed. Further, the clock signal input to the drive control means can be directly managed by the production control means by the serial clock data, and an inappropriate clock signal which is not synchronized with the serial signal from the individual clock signal generation circuit is driven. It is possible to prevent improper drive control from being performed by being input to the control means.

In addition, you may make it suggest a setting value by the aspect of the movable body production accompanied by the operation | movement of a movable body. For example, by selecting the mode of the movable body effect from a plurality of types by lottery or the like, and changing the selection ratio of each mode of the movable body effect by the set value that is set, the set value that is set is a game. The more advantageous the person is, the easier it is to perform the movable body effect according to the specific type of aspect. By doing so, the form of the movable body production is rich in variation, and moreover, the player can be given an opportunity to infer the set value by the appearance ratio of each form of the movable body production, so that the enjoyment of the game can be improved. You can
Further, as the effect display device, an image display device may be provided separately from the effect variable display unit 300, and the set value suggesting effect may be performed by the image display device. For example, displaying a character on an image display device, selecting the character from among a plurality of types each time a predetermined effect condition is established by lottery, etc., and varying the selection ratio of each character depending on the set value. Thus, the more advantageous the set value that is set for the player, the easier it is for the effect of the specific type of character to be performed. By doing so, it is possible to give the player an opportunity to infer the setting value based on the appearance ratio of each character, so that it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine described in means 3 of invention 207SG,
The display capable of recognizing the setting state or the confirmation state is a display different from the display displayed on the information display section during the game (for example, as shown in FIGS. 45-4 and 45-27). In, the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B display mode in the case of deriving and displaying the variable display result, and the display mode in the case of the setting value change state or the setting value confirmation state, Different parts)
A gaming machine characterized by that is described, and according to this characteristic, it is possible to accurately recognize that it is in a setting state or a confirmation state.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine described in Means 4 of Invention 207SG,
When in the setting state or the confirmation state, the variable display unit performs a display capable of recognizing the setting state or the confirmation state (for example, the first special symbol display device 207SG004A or the second special symbol display (A part that lights up all the segments that form the device 207SG004B)
A gaming machine characterized in that it is described, and according to this characteristic, it is possible to perform suitable notification on the variable display section.

Furthermore, as a game machine described in means 5 of invention 207SG,
The variable display section is composed of a plurality of small display sections that can be turned on independently (for example, the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B are each composed of eight segments. Part),
As a display capable of recognizing that the setting state or the confirmation state, all of the small display unit is turned on (for example, the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B (The part that lights up all the constituent segments)
According to this feature, it is possible to easily recognize that the game machine is in the setting state or the confirmation state.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine described in Means 6 of Invention 207SG,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 901) that shoots a game medium into a gaming area (for example, a left gaming area 207SG002L and a right gaming area 207SG002R) to play a game.
The information display unit includes a firing direction notification unit (for example, a right-handed ramp 207SG132) that notifies the firing direction of the game medium in the game area,
When it is in the setting state or the confirmation state, a display capable of recognizing the setting state or the confirmation state is displayed in the firing direction notification unit (for example, as shown in FIG. 45-27 (A), (The part that blinks the right-handed lamp 207SG132 in the set value change state or the set value confirmation state)
A gaming machine characterized in that it is described, and according to this feature, it is possible to perform suitable notification in the firing direction notification unit.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine described in means 7 of invention 207SG,
A holding storage unit (for example, a portion where the CPU 90103 executes the start winning determination process shown in FIG. 41) capable of storing information regarding variable display as holding information,
The information display unit includes a hold display unit (for example, a first hold display 207SG025A and a second hold display 207SG025B) capable of displaying a hold display corresponding to the hold storage stored in the hold storage unit,
When the setting state or the confirmation state is set, a display capable of recognizing the setting state or the confirmation state is displayed on the hold display unit (for example, as shown in FIG. 45-27 (A), (A portion that blinks all the segments that configure the first hold indicator 207SG025A and the second hold indicator 207SG025B in the value change state and the set value confirmation state)
A gaming machine characterized in that it is described, and according to this feature, it is possible to perform a suitable notification on the hold display unit.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine described in means 8 of invention 207SG,
In the advantageous state, a special variable device (special variable winning ball device 907) capable of changing between a first state in which the game medium can enter and a second state in which the game medium is less likely to enter than the first state,
The information display unit includes a number notification unit (for example, a round display 207SG131) that notifies the number of times the special variable device is in the first state in the advantageous state,
When it is in the setting state or the confirmation state, a display capable of recognizing the setting state or the confirmation state is displayed in the number-of-times notification unit (for example, as shown in FIG. (A portion where only one segment is lit among the segments constituting the round indicator 207SG131 in the value change state and the set value confirmation state)
A gaming machine characterized in that it is described, and according to this feature, it is possible to perform a suitable notification in the number-of-times notification unit.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine described in means 9 of invention 207SG,
A game information storage unit (for example, a RAM 90102) capable of storing at least game information for the game control unit to control the progress of the game,
Detection means (for example, a clear switch) capable of detecting the state of the gaming machine when the power is turned on,
A state information storage unit (for example, an area of the address F002 of the RAM 90102) capable of storing state information (for example, a RAM clear flag) capable of specifying the state of the gaming machine detected by the detection unit when the power is turned on,
Equipped with
The game control means,
A first condition (for example, a state in which the clear switch is ON) that includes a special state (for example, a state in which the clear switch is ON) when the power of the gaming machine is detected by the detection means is satisfied. While the game is being executed, an initialization process for initializing the game information storage means accompanied with the deletion of the game information (for example, a portion where the CPU 90103 executes the RAM clear process shown in FIG. 45-21 (A)) is executed. Is feasible,
The second condition (for example, the clear switch is ON and the lock switch is included) that the state of the gaming machine at power-on detected by the detection means is a special state (for example, the clear switch is ON) When 207SG051 and open sensor 207SG090 are ON), the setting change process for changing the set value can be executed, and the initial condition is executed when the first condition is satisfied. Initialization processing common to the initialization processing can be executed based on the state information stored in the state information storage means (for example, a RAM clear processing and a setting value change processing can be executed).
Whether the first condition or the second condition is satisfied, the state information is not erased (for example, as shown in FIG. 45-21 (A), the RAM clear flag is cleared in the RAM clear process). (No part)
According to this feature, the initialization process can be made common when the first condition is satisfied and when the second condition is satisfied. It is possible to accurately execute the initialization process based on the state information while preventing the storage capacity of the processing program from increasing.
The gaming machines described in Means 3 to 9 of Invention 207SG applicable to the gaming machines described in Means 1 and 2 of Invention 207SG described above are gaming machines described in Means A and B of Invention 207SG described above. Can also be applied to.

The present embodiment also includes Invention 208SG described below. That is, conventionally, as a pachinko gaming machine with a set value changing function, there is, for example, one described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, there is a problem that it is not possible to appropriately leave the occurrence of a predetermined error in the setting state. Therefore, when paying attention to the problem, as a gaming machine described in means 1 of invention 208SG that solves the problem,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 901) that can be variably displayed and can be controlled in an advantageous state advantageous for a player (for example, a jackpot gaming state),
Setting means capable of setting any of the plurality of setting values (for example, 1 to 6 as the setting value) (for example, a portion in which the CPU 90103 executes the setting value changing process shown in FIG. 45-22); ,
With game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 90103 executes special symbol process processing) capable of executing control relating to the advantageous state based on the set value set by the setting means,
Equipped with
Controlled by the game control means, at least an information display unit including a variable display unit (eg, first special symbol display device 207SG004A and second special symbol display device 207SG004B) capable of performing variable display (for example, game information display Part 207SG200),
When the specific condition is satisfied (for example, as shown in FIG. 45-20, when the pachinko gaming machine 901 is activated, the clear switch, the lock switch 207SG051, and the open sensor 207SG090 are respectively ON), the setting value of the setting means is changed. The process moves to a setting state in which the setting can be performed (for example, the state in which the CPU 90103 is executing the setting value changing process shown in FIG. 45-22),
When the specific condition is satisfied but a predetermined error occurs, a display capable of specifying that the predetermined error has occurred is displayed on the variable display section (for example, as shown in FIG. 45-27 (B)). In, when the setting value error occurs, all the segments constituting the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B blinks)
According to this feature, according to this feature, a predetermined error occurs even if a specific condition is satisfied in the variable display unit that executes the variable display that is an important display in the game machine. Since it is notified by the display, it is possible to preferably notify that the predetermined condition has been met but a predetermined error has occurred.

In addition, as a game machine described in means A of invention 208SG that solves the problem of the game machine described in JP 2010-200902 A,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 901) that can be variably displayed and can be controlled in an advantageous state advantageous for a player (for example, a jackpot gaming state),
Setting means capable of setting any of the plurality of setting values (for example, 1 to 6 as the setting value) (for example, a portion in which the CPU 90103 executes the setting value changing process shown in FIG. 45-22); ,
With game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 90103 executes special symbol process processing) capable of executing control relating to the advantageous state based on the set value set by the setting means,
Equipped with
Controlled by the game control means, at least an information display unit including a variable display unit (eg, first special symbol display device 207SG004A and second special symbol display device 207SG004B) capable of performing variable display (for example, game information display Part 207SG200),
When the specific condition is satisfied (for example, as shown in FIG. 45-20, when the pachinko gaming machine 901 is activated, the clear switch, the lock switch 207SG051, and the open sensor 207SG090 are respectively ON), the setting value of the setting means is changed. The process moves to a setting state in which the setting can be performed (for example, the state in which the CPU 90103 is executing the setting value changing process shown in FIG. 45-22),
When the specific condition is satisfied but a predetermined error occurs, a display capable of specifying that the predetermined error has occurred is displayed on the variable display section (for example, as shown in FIG. 45-27 (B)). In the case where a setting value error occurs, all the segments composing the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B are blinked),
further,
A movable body operably provided (for example, reels 301L, 301C, 301R),
Drive means (for example, reel stepping motors 307L, 307C, 307R) for generating drive force for operating the movable body;
The drive control of the drive means is controlled by a clock signal (for example, a control clock signal) and a plurality of different control signals (for example, output control signal, electrical angle initialization signal, forward / reverse rotation signal, excitation setting signal 0, excitation setting). Drive control means (for example, motor drive circuits 85, 86, 87) that can be executed based on inputs of signal 1, excitation setting signal 2, A-phase output setting signal, B-phase output setting signal),
Production control means (for example, production control board 80) for controlling movable production (for example, variable display production) accompanied by the operation of the movable body,
Convert serial control data (for example, motor drive circuit 1 control data, motor drive circuit 2 control data, motor drive circuit 3 control data) by a serial signal transmitted from the effect control means into a plurality of different control signals. Output to the drive control means, and serial clock data by a serial signal transmitted from the effect control means (for example, motor drive circuit 1 clock signal data, motor drive circuit 2 clock signal data, motor drive circuit A signal conversion means (for example, a serial signal circuit 89) capable of converting the 3 clock signal data into a clock signal for control and outputting the clock signal to the drive control means;
According to this feature, a variable display unit that executes variable display, which is an important display in the game machine, has a predetermined error even if a specific condition is satisfied. Since the fact that the error has occurred is notified by the display, it is possible to preferably notify that the predetermined error has occurred although the specific condition is satisfied. Further, the clock signal input to the drive control means can be directly managed by the production control means by the serial clock data, and an inappropriate clock signal which is not synchronized with the serial signal from the individual clock signal generation circuit is driven. It is possible to prevent improper drive control from being performed by being input to the control means.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine described in Means 2 of Invention 208SG,
The gaming machine is described in which the predetermined error is at least an error related to a storage area in which the set value is stored (for example, an error equal to or larger than the set value). According to this feature, the set value is set. It is possible to suitably notify that an error has occurred in the storage area in which is stored and the setting value needs to be reset.

Furthermore, as a game machine described in means 3 of invention 208SG,
If the power failure occurs before the new setting value changed in the setting state is settled, an error related to the storage area in which the setting value is stored occurs at the time of recovery from the power failure. Even if not, the display that can specify that an error has occurred is performed in the variable display area (for example, even when the power is restored during the setting change as shown in FIG. 27B, the first special symbol) Display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B all the segments that make up the blinking part)
According to this feature, it is necessary to re-set the set value due to the occurrence of power interruption before the set value is confirmed without newly setting an error. It can be suitably notified.
The gaming machine described in the means 2 to 3 of the invention 208SG that can be applied to the gaming machine described in the means 1 of the invention 208SG described above can also be applied to the gaming machine described in the means A of the invention 208SG described above. it can.

The present embodiment also includes Invention 209SG shown below. That is, conventionally, as a pachinko gaming machine with a set value changing function, there is, for example, one described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. Further, as a pachinko gaming machine provided with an information display means capable of displaying predetermined information regarding a given gaming value, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent No. 6209653. However, when the information display means described in Japanese Patent No. 6209653 is applied to the pachinko gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, a display unit for confirming the set value and an information display unit are provided. However, there is a problem that the cost of the gaming machine cannot be reduced by separately providing. Therefore, when paying attention to the problem, as a gaming machine described in means 1 of invention 209SG that solves the problem,
A gaming machine capable of playing a game using a game medium and capable of being controlled in an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
Setting means capable of setting any of the plurality of setting values (for example, 1 to 6 as the setting value) (for example, a portion in which the CPU 90103 executes the setting value changing process shown in FIG. 45-22); ,
With game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 90103 executes special symbol process processing) capable of executing control relating to the advantageous state based on the set value set by the setting means,
A game value giving means for giving a game value based on a game medium entering a predetermined area (for example, a game ball wins a first starting winning opening, a second starting winning opening, a general winning opening 9010, a big winning opening, etc. The part where prize balls are paid out by doing),
It has a plurality of display units (for example, the first display unit 207SG029A to the fourth display unit 207SG029D), and has predetermined information about the game value provided by the game value providing means (for example, the base shown in FIG. 45-17C). An information display means (for example, display monitor 207SG029) capable of displaying a value),
Equipped with
The information display means can display setting value information that can specify the setting value set by the setting means when a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, as shown in FIG. 45-25, a pachinko game). When the lock switch 207SG051 and the open sensor 207SG090 are ON and the clear switch is OFF when the machine 901 is started, the set value can be displayed in the set value confirmation state),
The number of the display units used is different between when the predetermined information is displayed and when the setting value information is displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. When it is displayed, the first display unit 207SG029A, the second display unit 207SG029B, the third display unit 207SG029C, and the fourth display unit 207SG029D are used, and when the set value is displayed on the display monitor 207SG029, the fourth display unit is displayed. (A part where only 207SG029D is used)
According to this feature, since the set value information is also displayed on the information display means capable of displaying the predetermined information regarding the game value, a display means for displaying the set value information is provided. Since it is not necessary to provide each separately, the cost of the gaming machine can be reduced.

Further, as a game machine described in means A of invention 209SG for solving the problem of the game machine described in JP 2010-200902 A,
A gaming machine capable of playing a game using a game medium and capable of being controlled in an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
Setting means capable of setting any of the plurality of setting values (for example, 1 to 6 as the setting value) (for example, a portion in which the CPU 90103 executes the setting value changing process shown in FIG. 45-22); ,
With game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 90103 executes special symbol process processing) capable of executing control relating to the advantageous state based on the set value set by the setting means,
A game value giving means for giving a game value based on a game medium entering a predetermined area (for example, a game ball wins a first starting winning opening, a second starting winning opening, a general winning opening 9010, a big winning opening, etc. The part where prize balls are paid out by doing),
It has a plurality of display units (for example, the first display unit 207SG029A to the fourth display unit 207SG029D), and has predetermined information about the game value provided by the game value providing means (for example, the base shown in FIG. 45-17C). An information display means (for example, display monitor 207SG029) capable of displaying a value),
Equipped with
The information display means can display setting value information that can specify the setting value set by the setting means when a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, as shown in FIG. 45-25, a pachinko game). When the lock switch 207SG051 and the open sensor 207SG090 are ON and the clear switch is OFF when the machine 901 is started, the set value can be displayed in the set value confirmation state),
The number of the display units used differs depending on whether the predetermined information is displayed or the setting value information is displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 45-25, the base value is displayed on the display monitor 207SG029). When it is displayed, the first display unit 207SG029A, the second display unit 207SG029B, the third display unit 207SG029C, and the fourth display unit 207SG029D are used, and when the set value is displayed on the display monitor 207SG029, the fourth display unit is displayed. 207SG029D is used only),
further,
A movable body operably provided (for example, reels 301L, 301C, 301R),
Drive means (for example, reel stepping motors 307L, 307C, 307R) for generating drive force for operating the movable body;
The drive control of the drive means is controlled by a clock signal (for example, a control clock signal) and a plurality of different control signals (for example, output control signal, electrical angle initialization signal, forward / reverse rotation signal, excitation setting signal 0, excitation setting). Drive control means (for example, motor drive circuits 85, 86, 87) that can be executed based on inputs of signal 1, excitation setting signal 2, A-phase output setting signal, B-phase output setting signal),
Production control means (for example, production control board 80) for controlling movable production (for example, variable display production) accompanied by the operation of the movable body,
Convert serial control data (for example, motor drive circuit 1 control data, motor drive circuit 2 control data, motor drive circuit 3 control data) by a serial signal transmitted from the effect control means into a plurality of different control signals. Output to the drive control means, and serial clock data by a serial signal transmitted from the effect control means (for example, motor drive circuit 1 clock signal data, motor drive circuit 2 clock signal data, motor drive circuit A signal conversion means (for example, a serial signal circuit 89) capable of converting the 3 clock signal data into a clock signal for control and outputting the clock signal to the drive control means;
According to this feature, since the set value information is also displayed on the information display means capable of displaying the predetermined information about the game value, a display for displaying the set value information is provided. It is not necessary to separately provide means, and the cost of the gaming machine can be reduced. Further, the clock signal input to the drive control means can be directly managed by the production control means by the serial clock data, and an inappropriate clock signal which is not synchronized with the serial signal from the individual clock signal generation circuit is driven. It is possible to prevent improper drive control from being performed by being input to the control means.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine described in means 2 of invention 209SG,
The information display means is capable of displaying error information capable of specifying that an error has occurred in at least the storage area in which the set value is stored (for example, as shown in FIG. 45-26 (B), When the set value abnormality error occurs, “E.” is displayed on the first display unit 207SG029A, the second display unit 207SG029B, the third display unit 207SG029C, and the fourth display unit 207SG029D),
The number of display units used is the same when the predetermined information is displayed and when the error information is displayed (for example, FIGS. 45-25 (A) and 45-26 (B)). As shown in FIG. 7, the first display unit 207SG029A, the second display unit 207SG029B, the third display unit 207SG029C, and the fourth display are used for displaying the base value on the display monitor 207SG029 and for displaying the occurrence of the abnormal error. Part 207SG029D) (the part that uses the part 207SG029D) is described, and according to this feature, it is possible to notify that an error has occurred regarding the storage area in which the set value is stored, and to notify the set value information. Can be easily recognized as different error information.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine described in means 3 of invention 209SG,
The display section is composed of a plurality of small display sections that can be turned on independently (for example, each of the first display section 207SG029A, the second display section 207SG029B, the third display section 207SG029C, and the fourth display section 207SG029D is 8 Part consisting of individual segments),
Equipped with detection means (for example, clear switch) that can detect the state of the gaming machine when the power is turned on,
When the state of the gaming machine at power-on detected by the detection means satisfies an initialization condition (for example, a clear switch is ON), the information display means is a small unit that constitutes each display unit. All of the display parts are turned on to be in the full-lighting display state (for example, as shown in FIG. 45-26 (A), the first display part 207SG029A, the second display part 207SG029B, the third display part 207SG029C, and the fourth display part). 207SG029D is a part that repeats all blinking and all extinguishing (flashing) of all the segments that make up the segment)
According to this feature, it is possible to confirm whether or not all of the small display units are normal.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine described in Means 4 of Invention 209SG,
Equipped with detection means (for example, clear switch) that can detect the state of the gaming machine when the power is turned on,
When the state of the gaming machine at power-on detected by the detecting unit satisfies the predetermined condition, the information display unit displays the set value information without being in the all-lit display state (for example, As shown in FIG. 45-22, in the case where the CPU 90103 executes the set value confirmation process, after executing 207SGSa015 and 207SGSa016, 207SGSa28 to 207SGSa030 are executed and the base value is displayed on the display monitor 207SG029.)
A game machine characterized by the above is described, and according to this feature, the setting value can be confirmed quickly.
The gaming machines described in Means 2 to 4 of Invention 209SG that can be applied to the gaming machine described in Means 1 of Invention 209SG described above can also be applied to the gaming machines described in Means A of Invention 209SG described above. it can.

The form of the present embodiment also includes Invention 210SG shown below. That is, conventionally, as a pachinko game machine that executes a confirmation operation of a movable body based on a change operation of a set value, for example, there is one described in JP-A-2017-189349. However, in the pachinko gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2017-189349, if the confirmation operation of the movable body is executed during the change of the set value, the operator may miss the confirmation operation. Therefore, it is conceivable to execute the confirming operation again after the setting value changing operation is completed. In this case, when the setting value changing operation is completed during the first movable body confirming operation, the changing operation is completed. There is a problem that a new movable body confirmation operation is started from the timing, and the movable body may perform an unintended operation. Therefore, when paying attention to the problem, as a gaming machine described in means 1 of invention 210SG that solves the problem,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 901) that can be controlled in an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player,
A movable body (for example, a first movable body 207SG321 and a second movable body 207SG322) operably provided,
Control means for controlling the operation of the movable body (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 90120 executes the first movable body initialization processing and the second movable body initialization processing);
Setting means capable of setting any of the plurality of setting values (for example, 1 to 6 as the setting value) (for example, a portion in which the CPU 90103 executes the setting value changing process shown in FIG. 45-22); ,
With game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 90103 executes special symbol process processing) capable of executing control relating to the advantageous state based on the set value set by the setting means,
Equipped with
When the specific condition is satisfied, the setting means shifts to a setting state in which the setting value can be set (for example, as shown in FIG. 45-20, when the pachinko gaming machine 901 is activated, a clear switch and a lock switch). When the 207SG051 and the open sensor 207SG090 are both ON, the CPU 90103 executes the setting value change processing),
The control means is
When the confirmation operation control (for example, actual operation confirmation operation control) for causing the movable body to perform the confirmation operation for confirming that the movable body can operate normally is performed when the state is changed to the setting state. It can be executed when the setting state is finished (for example, as shown in FIG. 45-35, the effect control CPU 90120 actually executes from the timing when the setting value change start notification command or the setting value confirmation start notification command is received. Actual operation from the portion that sequentially executes the first movable body initialization processing including the operation confirmation operation control and the second movable body initialization processing, and the timing at which the set value change end notification command and the set value confirmation end notification command are received. (A portion that sequentially executes a first movable body initialization process and a second movable body initialization process including confirmation operation control),
If the setting state ends while the movable body is performing the confirmation operation by the confirmation operation control when the setting state is entered, the confirmation operation control due to the end of the setting state is not executed (for example, 45-35 (C), during the second movable body initialization process that is being executed based on that the effect control CPU 90120 receives the set value change start notification command or the set value confirmation start notification command. When the effect control CPU 90120 receives the set value change end notification command or the set value confirmation end notification command, the effect control CPU 90120 receives the set value change end notification command or the set value confirmation end notification command. (Part where 1 movable body initialization processing and 2nd movable body initialization processing are not executed)
A game machine characterized by the above is described, and according to this feature, it is possible to prevent the movable body from performing an unintended operation.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine described in means 2 of invention 210SG,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 901) that can be controlled in an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player,
A movable body (for example, a first movable body 207SG321 and a second movable body 207SG322) operably provided,
Control means for controlling the operation of the movable body (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 90120 executes the first movable body initialization processing and the second movable body initialization processing);
Setting means capable of setting any of the plurality of setting values (for example, 1 to 6 as the setting value) (for example, a portion in which the CPU 90103 executes the setting value changing process shown in FIG. 45-22); ,
With game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 90103 executes special symbol process processing) capable of executing control relating to the advantageous state based on the set value set by the setting means,
Equipped with
When the confirmation condition is satisfied, the state shifts to a confirmation state in which the set value set by the setting means can be confirmed (for example, as shown in FIG. 45-20, cleared when the pachinko gaming machine 901 is activated. When the switch is OFF and the lock switch 207SG051 and the opening sensor 207SG090 are ON, the CPU 90103 executes the set value confirmation processing),
The control means is
Confirmation operation control (for example, first movable body initialization processing and second movable body initialization processing) for causing the movable body to perform confirmation operation for confirming that the movable body can operate normally is performed. Can be executed at the time of shifting to the confirmation state and at the time of ending the confirmation state (for example, as shown in FIG. 45-35, the production control CPU 90120 causes the setting value change start notification command or the setting value confirmation From the timing when the start notification command is received, a portion that sequentially executes the first movable body initialization processing and the second movable body initialization processing including the actual operation confirmation operation control, the setting value change end notification command, and the setting value confirmation (A portion that sequentially executes the first movable body initialization process and the second movable body initialization process including the actual operation confirmation operation control from the timing of receiving the end notification command),
If the confirmation state ends while the movable body is performing the confirmation operation by the confirmation operation control when the confirmation state is entered, the confirmation operation control due to the completion of the confirmation state is not executed (for example, 45-35 (C), during the second movable body initialization process that is being executed based on that the effect control CPU 90120 receives the set value change start notification command or the set value confirmation start notification command. When the effect control CPU 90120 receives the setting value change end notification command or the setting value confirmation end notification command, the effect control CPU 90120 receives the setting value change end notification command or the setting value confirmation end notification command. (Part where 1 movable body initialization processing and 2nd movable body initialization processing are not executed)
A game machine characterized by the above is described, and according to this feature, it is possible to prevent the movable body from performing an unintended operation.

Further, as a game machine described in means A of invention 210SG for solving the problem of the game machine described in JP-A-2017-189349,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 901) that can be controlled in an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player,
A movable body that is operably provided (for example, the first movable body 207SG321 and the second movable body 207SG322, or the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R),
Control means for controlling the operation of the movable body (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 90120 executes the first movable body initialization processing and the second movable body initialization processing);
Setting means capable of setting any of the plurality of setting values (for example, 1 to 6 as the setting value) (for example, a portion in which the CPU 90103 executes the setting value changing process shown in FIG. 45-22); ,
With game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 90103 executes special symbol process processing) capable of executing control relating to the advantageous state based on the set value set by the setting means,
Equipped with
When the specific condition is satisfied, the setting means shifts to a setting state in which the setting value can be set (for example, as shown in FIG. 45-20, when the pachinko gaming machine 901 is activated, a clear switch and a lock switch). When the 207SG051 and the open sensor 207SG090 are both ON, the CPU 90103 executes the setting value change processing),
The control means is
When the confirmation operation control (for example, actual operation confirmation operation control) for causing the movable body to perform the confirmation operation for confirming that the movable body can operate normally is performed when the state is changed to the setting state. It can be executed when the setting state is finished (for example, as shown in FIG. 45-35, the effect control CPU 90120 actually executes from the timing when the setting value change start notification command or the setting value confirmation start notification command is received. Actual operation from the portion that sequentially executes the first movable body initialization processing including the operation confirmation operation control and the second movable body initialization processing, and the timing at which the set value change end notification command and the set value confirmation end notification command are received. (A portion that sequentially executes a first movable body initialization process and a second movable body initialization process including confirmation operation control),
If the setting state is ended while the movable body is performing the confirmation operation by the confirmation operation control when the setting state is entered, the confirmation operation control due to the end of the setting state is not executed ( For example, as shown in FIG. 45-35 (C), during the second movable body initialization process that is being executed based on that the effect control CPU 90120 receives the setting value change start notification command or the setting value confirmation start notification command. When the effect control CPU 90120 receives the set value change end notification command or the set value confirmation end notification command, the effect control CPU 90120 receives the set value change end notification command or the set value confirmation end notification command. (A portion where the first movable body initialization process and the second movable body initialization process are not executed),
further,
A movable body operably provided (for example, reels 301L, 301C, 301R),
Drive means (for example, reel stepping motors 307L, 307C, 307R) for generating drive force for operating the movable body;
The drive control of the drive means is controlled by a clock signal (for example, a control clock signal) and a plurality of different control signals (for example, output control signal, electrical angle initialization signal, forward / reverse rotation signal, excitation setting signal 0, excitation setting). Drive control means (for example, motor drive circuits 85, 86, 87) that can be executed based on inputs of signal 1, excitation setting signal 2, A-phase output setting signal, B-phase output setting signal),
Production control means (for example, production control board 80) for controlling movable production (for example, variable display production) accompanied by the operation of the movable body,
Convert serial control data (for example, motor drive circuit 1 control data, motor drive circuit 2 control data, motor drive circuit 3 control data) by a serial signal transmitted from the effect control means into a plurality of different control signals. Output to the drive control means, and serial clock data by a serial signal transmitted from the effect control means (for example, motor drive circuit 1 clock signal data, motor drive circuit 2 clock signal data, motor drive circuit A signal conversion means (for example, a serial signal circuit 89) capable of converting the 3 clock signal data into a clock signal for control and outputting the clock signal to the drive control means;
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the movable body from performing an unintended operation. Further, the clock signal input to the drive control means can be directly managed by the production control means by the serial clock data, and an inappropriate clock signal which is not synchronized with the serial signal from the individual clock signal generation circuit is driven. It is possible to prevent improper drive control from being performed by being input to the control means.

Further, as a game machine described in means B of invention 210SG for solving the problem of the game machine described in JP-A-2017-189349,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 901) that can be controlled in an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player,
A movable body that is operably provided (for example, the first movable body 207SG321 and the second movable body 207SG322, or the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R),
Control means for controlling the operation of the movable body (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 90120 executes the first movable body initialization processing and the second movable body initialization processing);
Setting means capable of setting any of the plurality of setting values (for example, 1 to 6 as the setting value) (for example, a portion in which the CPU 90103 executes the setting value changing process shown in FIG. 45-22); ,
With game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 90103 executes special symbol process processing) capable of executing control relating to the advantageous state based on the set value set by the setting means,
Equipped with
When the confirmation condition is satisfied, the state shifts to a confirmation state in which the set value set by the setting means can be confirmed (for example, as shown in FIG. 45-20, cleared when the pachinko gaming machine 901 is activated. When the switch is OFF and the lock switch 207SG051 and the release sensor 207SG090 are ON, the CPU 103 executes the set value confirmation processing),
The control means is
Confirmation operation control (for example, first movable body initialization processing and second movable body initialization processing) for causing the movable body to perform confirmation operation for confirming that the movable body can operate normally is performed. Can be executed at the time of shifting to the confirmation state and at the time of ending the confirmation state (for example, as shown in FIG. 45-35, the production control CPU 90120 causes the setting value change start notification command or the setting value confirmation From the timing when the start notification command is received, a portion that sequentially executes the first movable body initialization processing and the second movable body initialization processing including the actual operation confirmation operation control, the setting value change end notification command, and the setting value confirmation (A portion that sequentially executes the first movable body initialization process and the second movable body initialization process including the actual operation confirmation operation control from the timing of receiving the end notification command),
If the confirmation state ends while the movable body is performing the confirmation operation by the confirmation operation control when the confirmation state is entered, the confirmation operation control due to the completion of the confirmation state is not executed ( For example, as shown in FIG. 45-35 (C), during the second movable body initialization process that is being executed based on that the effect control CPU 90120 receives the setting value change start notification command or the setting value confirmation start notification command. When the effect control CPU 90120 receives the set value change end notification command or the set value confirmation end notification command, the effect control CPU 90120 receives the set value change end notification command or the set value confirmation end notification command. (A portion that does not execute the first movable body initialization process and the second movable body initialization process),
further,
A movable body operably provided (for example, reels 301L, 301C, 301R),
Drive means (for example, reel stepping motors 307L, 307C, 307R) for generating drive force for operating the movable body;
The drive control of the drive means is controlled by a clock signal (for example, a control clock signal) and a plurality of different control signals (for example, output control signal, electrical angle initialization signal, forward / reverse rotation signal, excitation setting signal 0, excitation setting). Drive control means (for example, motor drive circuits 85, 86, 87) that can be executed based on inputs of signal 1, excitation setting signal 2, A-phase output setting signal, B-phase output setting signal),
Production control means (for example, production control board 80) for controlling movable production (for example, variable display production) accompanied by the operation of the movable body,
Convert serial control data (for example, motor drive circuit 1 control data, motor drive circuit 2 control data, motor drive circuit 3 control data) by a serial signal transmitted from the effect control means into a plurality of different control signals. Output to the drive control means, and serial clock data by a serial signal transmitted from the effect control means (for example, motor drive circuit 1 clock signal data, motor drive circuit 2 clock signal data, motor drive circuit A signal conversion means (for example, a serial signal circuit 89) capable of converting the 3 clock signal data into a clock signal for control and outputting the clock signal to the drive control means;
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the movable body from performing an unintended operation. Further, the clock signal input to the drive control means can be directly managed by the production control means by the serial clock data, and an inappropriate clock signal which is not synchronized with the serial signal from the individual clock signal generation circuit is driven. It is possible to prevent improper drive control from being performed by being input to the control means.

Furthermore, as a game machine described in means 3 of invention 210SG,
The control means is
When the movable body is not located at a predetermined origin position, return operation control (for example, non-detection operation control) for performing a return operation to position the movable body at the origin position is performed by the confirmation operation. Can be done before executing control,
When the setting state or the confirmation state ends during the return operation, the confirmation operation control is executed after the end of the return operation (for example, first movable body initialization processing or second movable body initialization processing). In the above, the part that executes the actual operation confirmation operation control after ending the non-detection automatic operation control)
A game machine characterized by the above is described, and according to this feature, it is possible to prevent the movable body from performing an unintended operation.

Furthermore, as a game machine described in means 4 of invention 210SG,
The control means is
If the setting state or the confirmation state ends while the movable body is performing the confirmation operation, the setting state or the confirmation state ends if the operation state of the confirmation operation satisfies a predetermined condition. The confirmation operation control is not executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 45-35 (C), the first movement based on the fact that the production control CPU 90120 receives the setting value change start notification command or the setting value confirmation start notification command). When the set value change end notification command or the set value confirmation end notification command is received during the execution of the body initialization processing, the first movable body initialization processing or the second movable body is newly added after the execution of the second movable body initialization processing. On the other hand, when the operation status of the confirmation operation does not satisfy the predetermined condition, the confirmation operation control based on the end of the setting state or the confirmation state is performed. (For example, as shown in FIG. 45-35 (B), the first movable body initialization processing based on the effect control CPU 90120 having received the set value change start notification command and the set value confirmation start notification command ends. However, when the setting value change notification command or the setting value confirmation notification command is received during the execution of the second movable body initialization processing, the first movable body initialization processing is newly performed after the completion of the second movable body initialization processing. And a portion for sequentially executing the second movable body initialization processing)
According to this feature, when the setting state or the confirmation state ends, the confirmation operation can be executed again according to the operation state of the confirmation operation.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine described in means 5 of invention 210SG,
A plurality of the movable bodies,
The control means is
The confirmation operation control can be sequentially executed for each of the movable bodies (for example, a part where the effect control CPU 90120 sequentially executes the first movable body initialization processing and the second movable body initialization processing),
When the setting state or the confirmation state is completed when the confirmation operation is not completed for all the movable bodies, and when the number of the movable bodies for which the confirmation operation is completed satisfies a predetermined condition, The confirmation operation control due to the end of the setting state or the confirmation state is not executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 45-35 (C), the production control CPU 90120 causes the setting value change start notification command or the setting value confirmation start notification command If the set value change end notification command or the set value confirmation end notification command is received during execution of the first movable body initialization processing based on the reception of the Movable body initialization processing and second movable body initialization processing are not executed) On the other hand, if the number of the movable bodies for which the confirmation operation has been completed does not satisfy a predetermined condition, the setting state is set. Alternatively, confirmation operation control based on the completion of the confirmation state is executed for each of the movable bodies (for example, as shown in FIG. 45-35 (B), the effect control CPU 90120 causes the setting value change start notification command or the setting value to be changed). When the first movable body initialization processing based on the reception of the confirmation start notification command is completed and the set value change notification command or the set value confirmation notification command is received during execution of the second movable body initialization processing, (A portion for newly executing the first movable body initialization processing and the second movable body initialization processing after the second movable body initialization processing is completed)
According to this feature, when the setting state or the confirmation state ends, the confirmation operation can be executed again according to the operation state of the confirmation operation.
The gaming machines described in the means 3 to 5 of the invention 210SG that can be applied to the gaming machines described in the means 1 and the means 2 of the invention 210SG are the gaming machines described in the means A and the means B of the invention 210SG. Can also be applied to.

  The characteristic part 207SG in the present embodiment has been described above with reference to the drawings, but the specific configuration is not limited to these examples, and even if there are changes and additions without departing from the scope of the present invention, Included in the invention.

  For example, in the characteristic unit 207SG of the embodiment, the game information display unit 207SG200, the first special symbol display device 207SG004A, the second special symbol display device 207SG004B, the first hold display 207SG025A, the second hold display 207SG025B, ordinary Although the figure display device 207SG020, the universal figure hold display device 207SG025C, the round display device 207SG131, the right striking lamp 207SG132, the probability variation lamp 207SG133, and the time saving lamp 207SG134 are exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this. The game information display unit 207SG200 need only include the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B.

  In the characteristic unit 207SG of the above-described embodiment, the CPU 90103 is executing the set value changing process (setting value changing state) and the setting value checking process is being executed (setting value checking state). The 1 special symbol display device 207SG004A and the 2nd special symbol display device 207SG004B have been illustrated as being in the same mode, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the CPU 90103 is executing the setting value changing process. In some cases and in the case where the set value confirmation process is being executed, the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B may be turned on or blinked in different modes. By doing this, the pachinko gaming machine 901 is in either the set value change state or the set value confirmation state depending on the lighting mode or blinking mode of the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B. You can easily tell if there is.

  Further, in the characteristic part 207SG of the above-mentioned embodiment, in the setting value change state and the setting value confirmation state, by lighting all the segments that constitute the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B, The display mode (lighting mode) of the 1 special symbol display device 207SG004A or the second special symbol display device 207SG004B and the display mode when the first special symbol display device 207SG004A or the second special symbol display device 207SG004B derives and displays the variable display result. Although different forms have been illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the display mode of the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B in the setting value change state and the setting value confirmation state (lighting) Aspect) is the first special symbol display device 207S 004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B, if different from the display mode in the case of deriving and displaying the variable display result, of all the segments that make up the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B It is not necessary to turn on some of the segments.

  Further, in the characteristic portion 207SG of the embodiment, in the setting value change state and the setting value confirmation state, all the segments and the round display device 207SG131 that constitute the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B are configured. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The example is one in which the right-handed lamp 207SG132, the right hold lamp 207SG132, and all the segments composing the first hold indicator 207SG025A and the second hold indicator 207SG025B are blinked. Instead, in the set value changing state or the set value confirming state, one segment constituting the round display 207SG131 is turned on, the right-handed lamp 207SG132 is blinked, and the first hold indicator 207SG025A and the second hold indicator 207SG025B are configured. Of all segments The dark, not executed, or may be executed only partially.

  Further, in the characteristic part 207SG of the above-mentioned embodiment, in the set value changing state and the set value confirming state, only one of the segments constituting the round display 207SG131 is turned on, but the present invention is not limited to this. Is not limited to this, and if the combination does not correspond to the jackpot type shown in FIG. 45-6, the number of lit segments of the round indicator 207SG131 in the set value change state or the set value confirmation state is plural. It may be.

  Further, in the characteristic portion 207SG of the above-described embodiment, an example in which the notification of the setting value abnormality error is executed using the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the pachinko gaming machine 901 may be individually provided with an LED for error notification, and the LED may be turned on or blinked to notify that a setting value error has occurred.

  Further, in the characteristic portion 207SG of the above-described embodiment, a mode in which the display monitor 207SG029 for displaying the base value on the pachinko gaming machine 901 is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko gaming machine is not limited thereto. The machine 901 may not be provided with the display monitor 207SG029. If the pachinko gaming machine 901 is not provided with the display monitor 207SG029 as described above, a display means for displaying a set value (or a provisional set value) in the set value change state or the set value confirmation state may be newly provided. .

  Further, in the characteristic portion 207SG of the above-described embodiment, when the change of the set value or the confirmation of the set value is completed during the execution of the first movable body initialization processing or the second movable body initialization processing, the first movable body Depending on whether or not the initialization processing is being executed, that is, whether or not the confirmation operation of the first movable body 207SG321 has already been completed, a new first movable body initialization processing or a second movable body initialization processing is performed. Although the mode for deciding whether or not to execute is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and whether or not to execute a new first movable body initialization process or second movable body initialization process, It may be determined according to the operation distance of each movable body, the remaining period required for the confirmation operation of each movable body, and the like.

  Further, in the characteristic portion 207SG of the embodiment, the first special symbol display device 207SG004A, the second special symbol display device 207SG004B, the first reserved display device 207SG025A, the second reserved display device 207SG025B, which constitute the game information display portion 207SG200, The round display 207SG0131, the right-handed lamp 207SG132, and the like are set differently from those in the game to notify that the pachinko gaming machine 901 is in the set value changing state or the set value confirming state. Is not limited to this, the first special symbol display device 207SG004A, the second special symbol display device 207SG004B, the first hold display device 207SG025A, the second hold display device 207SG025B, the round display that constitutes the game information display unit 207SG200 207SG0131, the like right-handed lamp 207SG132, may have a structure in which pachinko gaming machine 901 is displayed on the notification if during the game that the setting value is changed status and settings confirmation state (lit or flashing).

  Further, in the characteristic portion 207SG of the embodiment, the first special symbol display device 207SG004A, the second special symbol display device 207SG004B, the first reserved display device 207SG025A, the second reserved display device 207SG025B, which constitute the game information display portion 207SG200, The round display 207SG0131, the right-handed lamp 207SG132, and the like are set differently from those in the game to notify that the pachinko gaming machine 901 is in the set value changing state or the set value confirming state. Is not limited to this, and the "mode different from that during game" may include different blinking periods, luminance, different emission colors of each segment, and the like.

  Further, in the characteristic part 207SG of the above-described embodiment, the first movable body initialization process and the second movable body initialization are performed from the time when the effect control CPU 90120 receives the set value change start notification command and the set value confirmation start notification command. As the processing, the mode in which the non-detection operation control and the actual operation confirmation operation control of each movable body are executed has been exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the effect control CPU 90120 notifies the set value change start. From the time when the command or the set value confirmation start notification command is received, the non-detection operation control of each movable body is executed, and the effect control CPU 90120 receives the set value change end notification command or the set value confirmation end notification command The actual operation confirmation operation control of each movable body may be executed.

  Further, in the characteristic portion 207SG of the embodiment, the first special symbol display device 207SG004A, the second special symbol display device 207SG004B, the first reserved display device 207SG025A, the second reserved display device 207SG025B, which constitute the game information display portion 207SG200, The mode in which the pachinko gaming machine 901 is informed that the pachinko gaming machine 901 is in the set value changing state or the set value confirming state by lighting or blinking the round indicator 207SG131 and the right-handed lamp 207SG132 has been exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this. Not the one, when the pachinko gaming machine 901 is in the set value change state or the set value confirmation state, the first special symbol display device 207SG004A, the second special symbol display device 207SG004B, the first hold indicator 207SG025A, the second hold indicator 207SG025 , Round indicator 207SG131, may be provided with written description of the lighting or blinking of the right-handed light 207SG132 is executed at a predetermined position of the pachinko gaming machine 901 (e.g., a position near the game information display unit 207SG200). By doing so, the clerk of the game hall, etc. not familiar with the pachinko gaming machine 901, the first special symbol display device 207SG004A, the second special symbol display device 207SG004B, the first hold indicator 207SG025A, the second hold It is possible to prevent the lighting or blinking of the display 207SG025B, the round display 207SG131, and the right-handed lamp 207SG132 from being erroneously recognized as a failure of the pachinko gaming machine 901 or the like.

  Incidentally, in the game control main processing of the characteristic portion 207SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 45-20, when it is determined that the clear switch is ON in 207SGSa008 (207SGSa008; Y) or while the setting value is being changed in 207SGSa021. Although the mode in which the RAM clear processing (207SGSa009) is executed after the flag is cleared is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention is not limited to this, and the RAM clear processing is performed. Does not determine that the clear switch is ON in 207SGSa008 (207SGSa008; Y) or clear the setting value changing flag in 207SGSa021, but determines that the RAM clear flag is set in 207SGSa014 (2 7SGSa014; Y) to be executed.

1 Pachinko gaming machine 80 Production control board 83, 84 Motor drive power supply circuit 85, 86, 87 Motor drive circuit 89, 89 'Serial signal circuit 301L Reel 301C Reel 301R Reel 307L First reel stepping motor 307C Second reel stepping motor 307R Third reel stepping motor BLM1 First reel brushless motor BLM2 Second reel brushless motor BLM3 Third reel brushless motor 901 Pachinko gaming machine 904A First special symbol display device 904B Second special symbol display device 905 Performance display device 90100 Game control micro Computer 90120 CPU for production control

Claims (1)

A gaming machine capable of playing,
A movable body operably provided,
Drive means for generating a driving force for operating the movable body,
Drive control means capable of executing drive control of the drive means based on input of a clock signal and a plurality of different control signals;
Production control means for controlling the production of a movable body accompanied by the operation of the movable body,
The serial control data by the serial signal output from the effect control means can be converted into a plurality of different control signals and output to the drive control means, and the serial clock data by the serial signal output from the effect control means can be converted. A signal converting means capable of converting into a clock signal and outputting to the drive control means,
Suggestion production execution means capable of executing suggestion production suggesting that the player is controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to the player,
A title notifying unit capable of notifying a title corresponding to the suggestive effect,
The title notification means can notify the title corresponding to the suggested effect when a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the suggested effect,
The suggestive effect execution means can execute at least a first suggestive effect and a second suggestive effect as the suggestive effect,
In the second suggestion effect, the title notifying unit notifies the title corresponding to the second suggestion effect from the start of the second suggestion effect.